Magnum C Series

MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR
SERIES
X-RAY GENERATOR
SERVICE MANUAL
PREPARED BY:
APELEM-DMS Group
Parc Scientifique Georges Besse
175, Allée Von Neumann
30035 NIMES CEDEX 1 – France
Tel : 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 07
Fax : 00 33 (0)4 66 29 71 23
Email : [email protected]
Web site : www.apelem.com
DOCUMENT REFERENCE NUMBER: 3Z-40-001 Rev. H

PRE-INSTALLATION 1¾
MAGNUM C / INSTALLATION 2¾
MAGNUM C DR
SERVICE AND INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING, AND
CALIBRATION 3¾
INSTALLATION
MANUAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4¾
Manual part number: TROUBLESHOOTING 5¾

3Z-40-001 Rev.H
REGULAR MAINTENANCE 6¾
THEORY OF OPERATION 7¾
SPARES 8¾
SCHEMATICS 9¾
The original version of this manual (April 03, 2008)

has been drafted in the English language.
MAGNUM C X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H Page 0-1
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
The design and information contained in this document is proprietary to APELEM-DMS Group, has been designed and
developed at private expense, and is the exclusive property of APELEM-DMS GROUP. The information contained
herein is loaned in confidence solely for the installation, operation, and maintenance of APELEM-DMS GROUP
equipment. This document may not be duplicated in whole or in part, or be used for re-engineering, reverse
engineering, or otherwise reproducing in any form or creating or attempting to create or permitting, allowing or
assisting others to create or manufacture APELEM-DMS GROUP’s product or products derived therefrom, without the
express written permission of APELEM-DMS GROUP.
Page 0-2 Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H MAGNUM C X-Ray Generator Service Manual
Pre-installation 1
CHAPTER 1
PRE-INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Generator Description........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3 Radiographic Performance ................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.4 Environmental Specifications................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.5 Applicable Standards ............................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ................................................................................................... 1-8
1.1.7 RoHS Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.0 SAFETY.................................................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.1 Safety and Warning Symbols.............................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings ............................................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels........................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.3.0 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................1-17
1.3.1 Generator Heat Output ....................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements ......................................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.3 Generator Ground Requirements ....................................................................................................... 1-21
1.3.4 Locating and Mounting the Generator ................................................................................................ 1-22
1.3.5 Cable Entrance and Seismic Center Location.................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.6 Tools and test Equipment Required ................................................................................................... 1-24
1.3.7 Pre-Installation Checklist .................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS......................................................................... 1-25
1.5.0 COMPATIBILITY LISTING ..................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.6.0 RUNTIME LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE) ..................................................... 1-29
1.7.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT......................................................................................................................... 1-30
1.8.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT.............................................................................................................. 1-30
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.
1 Pre-installation
1.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter summarizes the main features of the MAGNUM C® and MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators
(performance, regulatory and compatibility). Safety information is provided, along with environmental,
room, and installation requirements. This chapter concludes with a pre-installation checklist and a
diagram showing the major component layout.
The information in this chapter is provided in order for the installer to be able to plan the site
layout prior to installation of the generator.
1.1.1 Generator Description
The MAGNUM C® 100 kHz high frequency X-ray generator is a component for use in film-based
stationary radiographic X-ray systems. The MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generator adds a digital interface for
digital radiography (DR) equipment. The MAGNUM C ® X-ray generator consists of a main power cabinet
and an optional membrane control console. The MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generator consists of a main
power cabinet and an optional membrane, touchscreen or mini-console (used with digital interface). The
main power cabinet contains the HT tank and control circuits, the filament drivers, a low speed starter
(optional dual speed starter on some models of MAGNUM C® DR), and interface connections to the
room equipment.
The control console allows the operator to select the technique factors, image receptors, etc.,
and to initiate an X-ray exposure.
1.1.2 Features
The following are the main features of and the options available for the generator:
• Integral low speed starter, compatible with X-ray tubes with type “R” stator. Optional compatibility with
GE 23/23 Ω equal impedance “E” stator.
• Optional dual-speed starter on some models of MAGNUM C® DR (not available on 208 / 230 VAC,
1-phase & 3-phase units), compatible with tube types listed in chapter 2.
• Capable of interfacing with various DR imaging systems (MAGNUM C® DR only).
• 24 VDC, 110, or 220 VAC power source for Buckys (fused at 0.8 amps).
• 24 VAC 150 watts power source for collimator lamp.
• 24 VDC 45 watts power source for system locks.
• Optional AEC.
• Optional DAP (Dose-Area Product).
• Tomography
Pre-installation 1
1.1.3 Radiographic Performance
kVp range: 40 to 125 kV or 40 to 150 kV, depending on

model.
kVp steps: variable in 1 kV steps.
kVp accuracy: ± 5 % + 1 kV.
Risetime (10-90%): <1.5 ms.
Time range: 1.0 to 6300 milliseconds.
mAs range 0.1 to 500 mAs (32/40 kW)
0.1 to 630 mAs (50 kW)
0.1 to 800 mAs (65 kW).
0.1 to 1000 mAs (80 kW)
mAs accuracy: ± (10 % + 0.2) mAs.
mA range 10 to 400 mA (32 kW)
10 to 500 mA (40 kW)
10 to 630 mA (50 kW)
10 to 800 mA (65 kW)
10 to 1000 mA (80 kW)
Coefficient of linearity: 0.05 (station to station) mAs.
Coefficient of reproducibility: kV, mAs ≤ 0.05.
Duty Cycle Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed
by a minimum 10 second wait period.
1.1.4 Environmental Specifications
OPERATING
Ambient temperature range 10 to 40 °C (50 to 104 °F).
Relative humidity 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
Altitude -700 to 3000 meters (1100 to 700 hPa, 825 to 525 mm Hg).
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

Ambient temperature range -25 to 70 °C (-13 to 158 °F)..
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Atmospheric pressure range -700 to 3000 meters (1100 to 700 hPa, 825 to 525 mm Hg).
• Long-term storage over 40 °C will reduce the service life of electrolytic capacitors in the
generator.
• The membrane control console is limited to a minimum temperature of -20°C, with a
maximum duration of 48 hours at that temperature. Transport and storage is limited to a
maximum duration of 120 hours between 50 and 70 °C, with an absolute humidity not to
exceed the humidity of 85% RH at 50 °C.
• Touchscreen console temperatures below -20°C and above +50°C are limited to 10 days
maximum duration, with a humidity not exceeding 50 % RH.
1 Pre-installation
1.1.5 Applicable Standards
The MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR series of X-ray generators comply with the regulatory requirements
and design standards in this section as follows:
• VZW2555 series: Only the standards marked with an asterisk * under SAFETY.
• VZW2556 series: All standards in this section.
A) SAFETY
• * FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR subchapter J, section 1010 and
1020 (USA).
• * Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).

• Medical Device Regulations (Canada).
• EC Directive 93/42/EEC (amended by 2007/47/EC) concerning Medical Devices (European
Community).
• * EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1, EN 60601-2-7/IEC 60601-2-7, CSA 601.1, UL60601.1.

-Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
-Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
-Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
-Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
-Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
• EN 60601-1-4/IEC 60601-1-4, EN ISO 14971, EN 60601-1-6/IEC 60601-1-6 **.
** This standard applies only to X-ray generators with an APELEM-DMS GROUP-supplied operator’s
console. It does not apply to “smart power supplies” in which the OEM or integrator supplies the
operator’s console.
NOTE: All referenced standards are considered to be at the latest adopted revision.
The CE Mark is a declaration by the manufacturer that the product complies with
the requirements of the applicable European Union (EU) medical device directive
and that the product has been subject to conformity assessment procedures as
provided in that directive.
A CSA mark with the indicators “C” and “US” means that product is certified for
both the U.S. and Canadian markets, to the applicable U.S. and Canadian
standards.
Pre-installation 1
B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2:2001/IEC 60601-1-2:2001)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions
The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the VZW2556 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators use RF energy only for
CISPR 11 their internal functions. Therefore, the RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions Class A The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators must be used only in a
CISPR 11 (The VZW2556 shielded location with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and,
series of X-ray for each cable that exits the shielded location, a minimum RF filter
generators in attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230
combination with MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the
shielded location) minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB).
Harmonic Not Applicable
emissions The VZW2556 series is suitable for use in all establishments other
IEC 61000-3-2 than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-
voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
Voltage Not Applicable
domestic purposes.
fluctuations/
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
NOTE It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specifications.
1 Pre-installation
1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment –
test test level level guidance
Electrostatic ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile.
discharge (ESD) ± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
IEC 61000-4-2 relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power ± 2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV for ± 1 kV for
input/output lines input/output lines
Surge ± 1 kV line to line ± 1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 ± 2 kV line to ± 2 kV line to commercial or hospital environment.
earth earth
Voltage dips, < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality should be that of a typical
short interruption, (> 95 % dip in UT) (> 95 % dip in UT) commercial or hospital environment. If the user
and voltage for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle of the VZW2556 series X-ray generator requires
variations on continued operation during power mains
power supply interruptions, it is recommended that the X-ray
40 % UT 40 % UT
input lines generator be powered from an uninterruptible
(60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT)
IEC 61000-4-11 power supply or battery.
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles
70 % UT 70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT) (30 % dip in UT)
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT) (> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a
IEC 61000-4-8 typical commercial or hospital environment
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Pre-installation 1
1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test test level level
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms The VZW2556 series of X-ray generators must be
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 150 kHz to used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF
80MHz 80MHz shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that
enters the shielded location, a minimum RF filter
attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz and
47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30
MHz is 40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is
47dB.)
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Field strengths outside the shielded location from
IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz to 2.5 80MHz to 2.5 fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
GHz GHz electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3
V/m.a
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X-ray
generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.
1 Pre-installation
1.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
In accordance with the intended use, some models of this series of X-ray generators comply with the
European Council Directive concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to compliant products
signifies this. One of the harmonized standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of
electromagnetic emission from this equipment and its required immunity from the electromagnetic
emissions of other devices.
It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.
1.1.7 RoHS Compliance
MAGNUM C ® / MAGNUM C ® DR
产品中有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration.
有毒有害物质或元素
部件名称 Hazardous substances’ name
Component Name
铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
Generator X O O X O O
Console X O O X O O
Pre-installation 1
O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下
X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006
标准规定的限量要求
• 此表所列数据为发布时所能获得的最佳信息
• 由于缺少经济上或技术上合理可行的替代物质或方案，此医疗设备运用以上一些有毒有害物质来实
现设备的预期临床功能，或给人员或环境提供更好的保护效果。
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication
• Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended
clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to
lack of reasonably (economically or technically) available substitutes.
1 Pre-installation
1.2.0 SAFETY
1.2.1 Safety and Warning Symbols
The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console.
High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence of

high voltage.
Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard

to operators, service personnel or to the equipment.
It indicates a requirement to refer to the
accompanying documentation for details.
Radiation exposure symbol used on operator

console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
WARNING THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE Radiation warning label on operator console.
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT
AND OPERATOR UNLESS Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the X-
SAFE EXPOSURE ray generator.
FACTORS, OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS AND
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
ARE OBSERVED.
1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings
WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS
SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES ARE OBSERVED.
WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS.
APELEM-DMS GROUP CANADA INC. (“THE MANUFACTURER”) PROVIDES
INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND ASSOCIATED HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES
NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-SALE OPERATING AND SAFETY PRACTICES.
THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR

NOT MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND
INSTALLATION MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED
IN ANY WAY.
THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY

RADIATION OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM
POOR OPERATING TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.
Pre-installation 1
1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE

CONSOLE.
For the membrane console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a
serial port for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the
main cabinet.
For the touchscreen console, GEN on the rear of the touchscreen is for the
interconnect cable to the generator, HS is for connection of an external hand switch,
COM 1 & COM 2 are serial ports for use by external devices, LO (3.5 mm stereo jack)
is for customer supplied speakers (minimum 8 ohms, do not use externally amplified
speakers), ETH is a standard 10/100 Ethernet connection, USBA and USBB are USB
ports for connection of external devices, CF is for the compact flash memory card
which holds the touchscreen software, and SW1 is the console upgrade button.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY
RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED
WITHIN PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
1 Pre-installation
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN
POWER DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THESE AREAS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT
LIMITED TO, THE MAIN FUSE HOLDER AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS ON THE H.V.
AUXILIARY BOARD, THE AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER, AND THE MAIN POWER
CONTACTOR.
LED DS1 ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE
+24 VDC SUPPLY.
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER
FROM THE ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE MAIN CABINET PRESENT A
SAFETY HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE
DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING THE GENERATOR.
AN LED CONNECTED ACROSS THE DC BUS INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF HIGH
VOLTAGE. THIS LED IS MOUNTED ON THE EMC CAPACITOR BOARD (ON SOME
MODELS, THE EMC CAPACITOR BOARD DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY
COMPONENTS OTHER THAN THE LED AND THE SERIES RESISTORS).
DO NOT RELY SOLELY ON BLEEDER CIRCUITS AND HIGH-VOLTAGE ON
INDICATORS IN THE GENERATOR TO PROTECT YOU. DUE TO THE
POSSIBILITY OF COMPONENT FAILURE, IT MUST NEVER BE ASSUMED
THAT AN UNLIT LED ENSURES THAT NO HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT.
USING A VOLTMETER, CONFIRM THAT NO HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY SERVICE.
The following notes apply to the touchscreen console only.
WARNING: THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE HAS NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS. DO NOT

ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE.
NOTE: WHEN ATTACHING THE BASE TO THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE, ENSURE THAT
THE TOUCHSCREEN IS RESTING ON A FLAT, CLEAN SURFACE WITH A PIECE OF
NON-ABRASIVE MATERIAL BETWEEN THE TOUCHSCREEN AND THE SURFACE.
NOTE: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED CIRCUITRY INSIDE THE

TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE, THE MAXIMUM BACK-PLATE SCREW LENGTH MUST BE
LIMITED TO 25 mm (1 INCH).
NOTE: FOR WALL MOUNTED TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLES, ENSURE THAT THE BASE IS
SECURED PROPERLY TO A WALL STUD.
WARNING: PLEASE ENSURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT AREA AROUND THE VENTING SLOTS
OF THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE TO ALLOW PROPER COOLING OF THE
INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
Pre-installation 1
NOTE: THE SET SCREW COLLAR MUST BE POSITIONED ON THE UPPER HALF OF THE
TILT ARM TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY SHOULD THE TOUCHSCREEN SLIP
WHILE ADJUSTING THE VIEWING HEIGHT.
USE THE PROVIDED ALLEN KEY TO ENSURE THAT THE SET SCREW COLLAR IS
LOCKED INTO POSITION SUCH THAT THERE IS NO LESS THAN 25 mm (1 INCH)
OF CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE TOUCHSCREEN
CONSOLE AND THE TOUCHSCREEN BASE PLATE WHEN THE TOUCHSCREEN IS
ADJUSTED TO ITS MINIMUM HEIGHT.
PLEASE BE SURE TO SUPPORT THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE WHEN
ADJUSTING ITS VIEWING POSITION.
1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels
This subsection defines the safety labels used inside and outside the generator cabinet.
NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE PROVIDED TO ALERT SERVICE

PERSONNEL THAT SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED
IS IGNORED.
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME
FOR ALL CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS.
WARNING: IF ANY COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL REQUIRED
PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY
REPLACE THE COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE

AND RATING.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your X-ray
generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these instructions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and / or competent safety
authorities.
1 Pre-installation
Weight Label
This label is attached to the main generator cabinet and to the HT tank, and states the approximate
weight of the main cabinet with the HT tank, and the weight of the HT tank separately. Do not attempt to
lift these items without proper assistance.
Caution HV/High Energy Warning Label
This label is attached to the generator cabinet and on the inside of the back cover above the HT tank.
The DC bus capacitors (approximately 300 to 670 VDC, depending on model) will remain charged for up
to 5 minutes after the AC mains is disconnected or the console is switched off.
Caution HV Behind Cover Label
This label is attached to the outside of the generator cabinet, the cover over the inverter assembly, the
cover over the DSS board and the fan cover. Mains voltage is present inside the cabinet whenever the
main disconnect is switched on. Additionally, the DC bus capacitors will remain charged for up to 5
minutes after the AC mains is disconnected or the console is switched off.
Pre-installation 1
1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)
WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS. ONCE THE COVER(S) ARE
REMOVED. CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS CAPACITORS IS
NEAR ZERO BEFORE SERVICING. IF THIS VOLTAGE EXCEEDS 48 VDC, THE
CAPACITORS MUST BE MANUALLY DISCHARGED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Notice
This notice is printed on the HT tank lid and cautions against over-tightening the nuts on the transformer
feedthrough terminals (for the primary of the HT transformers).
Danger High Tension Notice
This notice is printed on the HT tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the tank
lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting link is
opened for mA/mAs measurements.
Auxiliary Transformer Labels
These labels are fixed on the outer face of the auxiliary transformer and indicate the presence of high
voltage taps on the primary of 120, 200, 240, 400 and 480 VAC. Ensure the main power disconnect is
switched off and appropriate documentation is consulted before attempting to service this component.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Be certain that you are aware of all potential high voltage
locations and hazards as detailed in this section before removing any covers, or attempting
any service on this X-ray generator.
1 Pre-installation
FUSE RATINGS:
LOCATION 1 PHASE UNITS 3 PHASE UNITS
MAIN LINE FUSES: F1, F2: FRN-R-50 * F1, F2, F3: AG40 * for
(32/40 kW 400/480 V
units).
SC60 * for 32/40 kW
208-230 V 3 phase
units).
OTN60 *for 50 kW
208/230 V units.
SC60 * for 50 kW
400/480 units.
OTS60 * for 65 and 80
kW units.
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD: F2: GDC-2 * F2: GDC-2 *
F3: GDC-500mA * F3: GDC-500mA *
CONSOLE BOARD: F1: GDC-1A * F1: GDC-1A *
ALL 208/230 V UNITS ALL 400/480 V UNITS

H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD: F1, F6, F7: S506-8A * F1, F6, F7: S506-8A *
F2, F3: 372-1500 * F2, F3: 372-1500 *
F4, F5, F11: GDC-6.3A * F4, F5: FNQ-1 *
F8, F9, F12: GDC-2A * F8, F9: FNQ 2 *
F10: GMA-800-R * F10: GMA-800-R *
F11: GDC-6.3A *
F12: GDC-2A *
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD N/A F1, F2: A70QS10-14F *
* Refer to chapter 8, spares list, for APELEM-DMS GROUP part number for these fuses.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on the membrane console
board in the area of T1, C36, and J5. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent
backlight on the LCD display.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: AC mains voltage and / or DC bus voltage (approximately 325 to
670 VDC, depending on model) is present on the H.V. auxiliary board whenever the AC mains
is energized. Ensure that the AC mains is switched off and locked out before servicing this
board. See the note below regarding the DC bus voltage.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage is present on all components connected to the AC
mains (line fuses, auxiliary transformer, H.V. auxiliary board, main power contactor, etc)
whenever the AC mains is switched on. Additionally, DC bus voltage is present on certain
components (mains rectifier assembly, DC bus capacitors, inverter assembly, HT tank, H.V.
auxiliary board, etc) whenever the generator is switched on, and will remain on for up to 5
minutes after the console is switched off or the AC mains is switched off or disconnected.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 600 VDC is present on the dual speed starter
board whenever the generator is switched on. This voltage is sourced from the DC bus
capacitors in the generator, and therefore the high voltage hazard will remain for up to 5
minutes after the generator has been switched off.
Pre-installation 1

DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE
High voltage (approximately 325 to 670 VDC, depending on model) is present on the inverter
assembly and associated components whenever the AC mains is energized and the console
is switched on, and for up to 5 minutes after the console is switched off or the AC mains is
disconnected. THIS COMBINATION OF HIGH VOLTAGE AND HIGH CURRENT IS
POTENTIALLY LETHAL. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS UNIT.
1.3.0 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
1.3.1 Generator Heat Output
The maximum heat output of the main generator cabinet is less than 1000 BTU / hour in normal clinical
use, with a maximum of 70 BTU / hour heat output for the console. The console is convection-cooled, and
the main cabinet is fan cooled. The console and main cabinet should never be covered when the
generator is switched on, as any covering may interfere with the cooling.
1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements
The tables in this section show mains power requirements for various configurations of MAGNUM C®
and MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators. The installer must ensure that the generator is connected to the
proper mains voltage as per the nameplate on the generator.
The table below depicts the power requirements for the 32 kW MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR X-ray
generators.
Line Voltage 208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 1 phase.
208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 3 phase.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current 220 Amps at 208 VAC (1 phase).
122 Amps/phase at 208 VAC (3 phase).
200 Amps at 230 VAC (1 phase).
65 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
Nominal Current * ≤5 Amps.
Momentary Power Consumption 45 kVA.
1 Pre-installation
1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)
generators.
208 VAC - 5% to 230 VAC + 10%, 3 phase.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
Momentary Current 275 Amps at 208 VAC (1 phase).
250 Amps at 230 VAC (1 phase).
generators.
400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
Momentary Current 192 Amps/phase at 208 VAC.
The table below depicts the power requirements for the 65 kW MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
Pre-installation 1
The table below depicts the power requirements for the 80 kW MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators.
Line Voltage 400 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3 phase.
* Nominal Current = Generator standby current only. External or installer-supplied equipment

connected to the generator may increase the nominal current beyond the values shown.
The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES BETWEEN
THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES USED AT AN
INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE (VOLTAGE LEVEL), THE
CURRENT REQUIREMENTS, AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE RUN, AND MUST BE CONFIRMED
BY THE INSTALLER.
FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS WELL AS THE
CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT MUST MEET
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES, AND IS USUALLY DETERMINED BY
HOSPITAL / CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.
THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE INSTALLER
MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOAD REQUIREMENTS.
A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING TO
DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER.
1 Pre-installation

Generator Series Minimum Generator Minimum Minimum Minimum Apparent
and Mains Voltage Recommended Momentary Recommended Recommended Recommended Mains
Mains Line Current Generator Distribution Ground Resistance
Disconnect to Service Rating Transformer Wire
Generator Rating Size
(15 ft/5 m max) *
32 kW #2 *** 220 A 120 A 45 kVa #2 0.045 Ω
208 VAC, 1p. (33 mm2) (33 mm2)
32 kW #2 *** 200 A 120 A 50 kVa #2 0.055 Ω
2
230 VAC, 1p. (33 mm ) (33 mm2)
32 kW #4 ** 122 A 100 A 45 kVa #4 0.07 Ω
208 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
32 kW #4 ** 110 A 100 A 45 kVa #4 0.09 Ω
230 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
32 kW #6 ** 65 A 100 A 45 kVa #6 0.27 Ω
2
400 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
32 kW #6 ** 55 A 100 A 45 kVa #6 0.40 Ω
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
40 kW #2 *** 275 A 120 A 65 kVa #2 0.035 Ω
208 VAC, 1p. (33 mm2) (33 mm2)
40 kW #2 *** 250 A 120 A 65 kVa #2 0.045 Ω
230 VAC, 1p (33 mm2) (33 mm2)
40 kW #4 ** 154 A 100 A 55 kVa #4 0.055 Ω
208 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
40 kW #4 ** 139 A 100 A 55 kVa #4 0.075 Ω
230 VAC, 3p. (21 mm2) (21 mm2)
40 kW #6 ** 80 A 100 A 55 kVa #6 0.22 Ω
400 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
40 kW #6 ** 65 A 100 A 55 kVa #6 0.32 Ω
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
50 kW #2 *** 192 A 100 A 65 kVa #2 0.045 Ω
2
208 VAC, 3p. (33 mm ) (33 mm2)
50 kW #2 *** 174 A 100 A 65 kVa #2 0.055 Ω
2
230 VAC, 3p. (33 mm ) (33 mm2)
50 kW #6 ** 100 A 100 A 65 kVa #6 0.17 Ω
400 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
50 kW #6 ** 80 A 100 A 65 kVa #6 0.24 Ω
2
480 VAC, 3p. (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
65 kW #6 *** 125 A 100 A 85 kVa #6 0.13 Ω
400 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
65 kW #6 *** 105 A 100 A 85 kVa #6 0.19 Ω
2
480 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
80 kW #6 *** 155A 100A 105 kVa #6 0.10 Ω
400 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm2) (13.3 mm2)
80 kW #6 *** 130A 100A 105 kVa #6 0.15 Ω
2
480 VAC, 3p (13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm2)
* Refer to 1.3.3 for general grounding information. Maximum wire gauge is # 2 AWG Cu (33 mm2).
** Maximum wire gauge is # 4 AWG Cu (21 mm2).
*** Maximum wire gauge is # 2 AWG Cu (33 mm2).
Pre-installation 1
Recommended Service Disconnect: As per the above table
• All wiring and grounding should comply with the national electrical code or equivalent.
• All wiring must be copper.
• The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
1.3.3 Generator Ground Requirements
• A suitable ground must be connected from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the generator,
located to the right of the main fuse block, on the sub-panel. The ground wire is typically part of the
line cord, and the current capacity of the ground conductor must normally be equal to or greater than
that of the line conductors.
• A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm2) or larger should be connected from the X-ray tube housing
to the H.T. tank ground stud (located at the top of the HT tank).
• If a neutral line is provided with the system, under no circumstances is it to be used for ground
purposes. The ground must carry fault currents only.
1 Pre-installation
1.3.4 Locating and Mounting the Generator
The main generator cabinet is self-standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
• The floor must be flat and level.
• The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
• The installer must supply generator hold-down brackets, if required. Alternately, mounting holes have
been provided in the base of the generator. The generator may then be anchored to the floor via
these holes.
• Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side of the generator for installation
and service. See figure 1-1 for recommended clearances.
• A cable trough, conduit, or raceway (1 in; 2.5 mm, diameter) should be provided from the control
console to the main cabinet to allow routing of the control cable if required.
• The control console is normally freestanding on a desk or shelf. It may be anchored if necessary.
Figure 1-1: Generator clearances
Pre-installation 1
1.3.5 Dimensions, Cable Entrance and Seismic Center Location
Figure 1-2 shows the dimensions of the generator cabinet, the locations of the cable access slots, the AC
mains cable entry, and the seismic center location for the MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR X-ray
generator.
The dimensions and weight of the generator and control console(s) are shown in the table below.
ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT

Main cabinet in shipping pack 30.5 (775)* 21.5 (546)* 38 (965)* 151 (68.6)
Main cabinet unpacked 25.7 (653)* 13.7 (348)* 24.3 (617)* 135 (61)
Membrane console 12.3 (313)** 10.9 (277)** 3.7 (94)** 6 (2.72)
Touchscreen control console 15.9 (404) 14.6 (371)** 11.2 (285)** 18 (8.2)
with base maximum**
Touchscreen control console 13.1 (333)** 14.6 (371)** 3.5 (89)** 10 (4.5)
without base
* Refer to Figure 1-2
** Refer to Figure 1-3
The above dimensions are inches (mm); weights are in pounds (kg).
Figure 1-2: MAGNUM ® / MAGNUM C® DR cable entry locations and seismic center
1 Pre-installation
1.3.5 Dimensions, Cable Entrance and Seismic Center Location (Cont)
Figure 1-3: MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR operator console dimensions
1.3.6 Tools and test Equipment Required
The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of
the generator.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of
screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable tools (i.e. drill, drill bits,
etc) and mounting hardware must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: terminal lugs, caps, splices etc.
A calibrated DVM that indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth;
appropriate leads, probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp. This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a non-
invasive meter such as the Keithley TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR
type measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A suitable mA / mAs meter.
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to
speed.
A sufficient selection of absorbers to allow AEC calibration if this option is
fitted. A suggested selection is Lexan in thickness of 5.0, 10.0, and 15.0 cm,
or water in plastic containers of homogenous density in thickness of 5.0, 10.0,
and 15.0 cm.
Vapor proof compound for the HT terminations.
Pre-installation 1
1.3.7 Pre-Installation Checklist
Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to
the inside of the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an
elevator available?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the generator?
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been
completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off
the shipping pallet?
1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS
Figure 1-3 shows the external view and dimensions of the membrane and touchscreen operator’s
consoles. Figures 1-4 and 1-5 show the major components located inside the generator cabinet. Figure
1-6 is an internal view of the console, showing the major components and cabling. Figure 1-4 does not
represent all models. This is meant to show major component layout only.
Figure 1-4: Major generator subassemblies view 1
1 Pre-installation
1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS (Cont)
Figure 1-5: Major generator subassemblies view 2
Pre-installation 1
1.4.0 GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS (Cont)

CONSOLE BOARD
J3 J8 J4
JW2 JUMPERS IN - PREP / X-RAY
F1 JW1
J5 BUTTONS ENABLED
JW1 / JW2
JUMPERS OUT - PREP / X-RAY
BUTTONS DISABLED
JW1 / JW2
J1
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
J9
J7
Figure 1-6: Console internal view
Figure 1-7: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter
1 Pre-installation
1.5.0 COMPATIBILITY LISTING
This X-ray generator is compatible with the following equipment:
X-RAY TUBES:
Refer to the compatibility statement and to chapter 2 of this manual.
NOTE: REFER TO THE SECTIONS “LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY” OR

“PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER” IN CHAPTER 2 OF THIS MANUAL FOR
FURTHER DETAILS.
AEC DEVICES:
Refer to the compatibility statement at the front of this manual.
DR INTERFACE:
Refer to the compatibility statement at the front of this manual.
Pre-installation 1
1.6.0 RUNTIME LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE)
User / End User License Agreement

You should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using this product. It contains
software (“Software”), the use of which is licensed by APELEM-DMS Group. to you, the original end user,
for your use only as set forth below. If you do not agree to the terms and conditions of the agreement, do
not use the software. If you use any part of the software, such use shall indicate that you accept these
terms.
1. The Software embedded in this Product is protected by international intellectual property rights and
treaties. You may use the software in object code form only and are prohibited from distributing the
software as such. There is no grant of any of the Software’s proprietary source code. This license
does not grant you any rights to patents, copyright, trade secrets, trademarks, or any other rights with
respect to the Software. You are not authorized to modify or to create derivative works based on this
software. You are not authorized to decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the
embedded Software. APELEM-DMS GROUP reserves all rights not expressly granted herein.
2. You are authorized to copy the Software only for the following purposes.
a. If such copying is an essential step in the use of the Software and in accordance with this
agreement; or
b. To make an archival copy for back up purposes.
3. If making a copy pursuant to Section 2 above, you must ensure that all trademark, copyright and
intellectual property notices are reproduced and included on any copies that are made.
4. The Software embedded in this Product is provided to you within the same warranty terms, as those
offered for the Products, except for any third party software, which is offered “as is” and without
warranties of any kind including, but not limited to: warranties of merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose, title and non-infringement.
5. The Software embedded in this Product is not intended for use in or with systems, devices, or
products intended to support of sustain life or for any aviation or nuclear reactor application in which
the software or its failure, malfunction, or inadequacy could directly or indirectly cause or contribute to
personal injury or death or significant property damage. It is your responsibility, as the User or End
User, to ascertain the suitability of the Software for your particular situation and / or application.
6. This agreement is effective until terminated. The agreement shall terminate immediately if you fail to
adhere to the terms and conditions set forth herein. Upon termination, you must immediately cease
all use of the Software and destroy any and all copies of the embedded Software in your possession.
7. This agreement represents the entire agreement between you and APELEM-DMS GROUP with
respect to the Software, and supersedes all other agreements or representations, whether written or
oral. The terms of this agreement can only be modified by the express written consent of both parties.
If any part of this agreement is held to be unenforceable as written, it will be enforced to the
maximum extent allowed by applicable law, and without effect to the enforceability of any other part.
8. Should you have questions regarding the use of the Software, please contact [email protected].
1 Pre-installation
1.7.0 CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:
Mail: Apelem-Dms Group

175 allée Von Neumann
30035 NIMES CEDEX 1 - FRANCE
Telephone: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 07
Fax: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 98
Attention: Customer Service Department
E-mail: [email protected]
1.8.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT
The compatibility statement for this generator is located at the front of this manual.
Pre-installation 1
1.9.0 OPEN-SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE)
The software included in the product covered by this manual may contain copyrighted software programs
that are licensed under the General Public License (GPL) V2. A copy of the GPL can be found on the
GNU website, www.gnu.org. You may obtain the corresponding source code for a period of three years
by forwarding your request to:
Apelem-Dms Group
Telephone: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 07
Fax: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 71 23
E-mail: [email protected] Subject: Open Source Code
Note: The subject line for any requests must indicate “Open Source Code” in order to obtain a response.
Distribution charges applicable at the time of request may apply.
All Open Source Software will be provided “AS IS”; there are (i) no representations or warranties and (ii)
neither APELEM-DMS Group, nor any of the developers or contributors to Open Source Software shall
have any liability or obligation to the customer with respect to Open Source Software beyond what is
granted in the particular Open Source Software license. Any modification to software code residing in
APELEM-DMS GROUP products shall void all warranties and render products “Not for Clinical Use”.
APELEM-DMS Group shall have no liability or obligation for any APELEM-DMS Group products
containing modified software.
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:
Mail: Apelem-Dms Group

Telephone: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 07
Fax: 00 33 (0)4 66 29 09 98
E-mail: [email protected]
Installation 2
Chapter 2
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2.0 UNPACKING ............................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.0 REMOVING THE GENERATOR COVER................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 Main Cabinet ......................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.2 Control Console .................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor ................................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR............................................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 Control Console .................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.2 Hand Switch (Optional) ....................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.3 Stator Connections.............................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.6.4 Thermal Switch ................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6.5 Power Line Mains................................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.6.6 High Tension Cables........................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.7 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground.............................................................................................................. 2-15
2.6.8 Room Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 2-16
2.6.9 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay .............................................................................. 2-16
2.6.10 Safety Interlocks.................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY .................................................................................. 2-16
2.7.1 Setting 120 / 240 VAC Boost Voltage ................................................................................................. 2-17
2.8.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL-SPEED STARTER .................................................................................. 2-18
2.8.1 EPROM type / dual speed starter ....................................................................................................... 2-18
2.8.2 Setting tube type ................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.8.3 Configuring dual speed starter 901297-15 / 901298-15 ..................................................................... 2-21
2.9.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS........................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.10.0 INITIAL RUN-UP..................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.10.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection.............................................................................. 2-22
2.10.2 Initial Voltage Measurements.............................................................................................................. 2-24
2.11.0 TUBE MA AUTO CALIBRATION............................................................................................................. 2-25
2.12.0 FINAL CHECKS...................................................................................................................................... 2-25
2 Installation
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking and installing the MAGNUM C® and MAGNUM C® DR
X-ray generators. This chapter also describes the basic wiring and setup of the generator (console, X-ray
tube, AC mains, etc), allowing for initial power-up of the generator. This is followed by tube seasoning and
auto calibration.
2.2.0 UNPACKING
1. Inspect the shipping pack(s) for evidence of shipping damage.

• The generator and the membrane control console (if applicable) are shipped in one pack.
• The optional touchscreen console is shipped in a separate pack from the generator.
If there is evidence of shipping damage, note this in the event that a damage claim is justified.
Taking pictures of the damage is also recommended.
2. Remove the cardboard outer pack from the generator. See the cautionary note below before
removing the pack.
CAUTION: OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK (S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE
THE CONTENTS.
3. Set aside the cardboard pack.
WARNING: THE GENERATOR MAIN CABINET (WITH HT OIL TANK) WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY
135 POUNDS (61 KG). ONE PERSON SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE
THIS ASSEMBLY WITHOUT PROPER EQUIPMENT OR ASSISTANCE.
4. Remove and unpack the membrane control console, if included. This is strapped to the top of the
generator. Then carefully lift the generator from the pallet.
5. Remove and unpack the optional hand switch and the optional mini-console control unit, if
included.
6. If applicable, unpack the optional touchscreen console along with the base and console cables.
7. Inspect all items for shipping damage, including loose hardware if applicable.
8. Unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the generator.
9. Keep the shipping packs. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in their shipping
pack(s) and notify the carrier and the customer support department as described in chapter 1 of
this manual.
2.3.0 REMOVING THE GENERATOR COVER
1. Remove and set aside the screws and washers securing the cover to the generator chassis.
2. Carefully lift the cover off the chassis.
Installation 2
2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
Refer to the section GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS in chapter 1 for major
component identification and layout.
2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
2.5.1 Main Cabinet
Place the generator cabinet in a location that will allow the following:
• Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1.
• Air circulation: The main cabinet is fan cooled, therefore room-temperature air must be free to
circulate around the cabinet. The cooling slots in the cabinet must be unobstructed at all times.
• A stable footing.
• Close proximity to service-disconnect boxes. Cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on or tripped over.
• Do not locate the X-ray generator within the patient environment of the X-ray room.
2.5.2 Control Console
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT
DURING SETUP / CALIBRATION OR NORMAL OPERATION OF THE GENERATOR.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL CONSOLE
INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS COMPLETED.
Position the control console in its intended location and ensure that it is stable.
• The control console (membrane console, touchscreen console, or mini-console) must be located
inside an X-ray shielded control booth within the X-ray room, or outside the X-ray room.
• If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
• Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow for easy viewing of the displays.
• If the optional CPI pedestal stand (membrane console) is to be used for the console mounting, follow
the mounting instructions supplied with the stand.
Membrane Console
Note: Some jurisdictions require that the console PREP and EXPOSE buttons be disabled if a hand
switch is used. This is done by removing JW1 and JW2 from the console board as described below.
1. Turn the console upside down and place it on a clean, non-abrasive surface.
2. Remove and set aside the screws securing the console base to the molded case, and the
hardware from the console ground stud.
3. Remove the console base (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
2 Installation
2.5.2 Control Console (Cont)
4. Locate and then remove JW1 and JW2 from the console board. Refer to the appropriate figure in
chapter 1, in the section GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.
5. Do not discard the jumpers that were removed in the previous step. These will need to be
reinstalled if the console PREP and EXPOSE buttons must be enabled in the future.
6. Reinstall the console base by reversing the previous steps.
Touchscreen Console
The touchscreen base is shipped as a separate item, and must be attached to the touchscreen console
before continuing with the installation. A Phillips screwdriver is required to attach the base to the
touchscreen console. A hex key has been included to adjust the tension on the tilt-arm mechanism.
1. Carefully unpack the touchscreen console and the desk-mount base components and set the
packaging aside. Verify that all components are undamaged.
2. Place the touchscreen console facedown on a FLAT, CLEAN, NON-ABRASIVE surface.
3. Note the two sets of VESA (Video Equipment Standards Association) mounting holes on the back
plate and on the touchscreen console. One set of holes is spaced at 100 mm, and the other set is
spaced at 75 mm. CPI recommends the use of the 100 mm spaced VESA holes. Line up the back
plate with the touchscreen (observe orientation). Attach the base using the screws provided. See
figure 2-1.
100mm(3.94")
75mm(2.95")
100mm(3.94")
75mm(2.95")
Figure 2-1: Touchscreen base back plate showing VESA mounting holes
Installation 2
NOTE: THE SET SCREW COLLAR MUST BE SECURED ON THE UPPER HALF OF THE TILT ARM
TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY SHOULD THE TOUCHSCREEN SLIP WHILE ADJUSTING
THE VIEWING HEIGHT.
ADJUST THE SET SCREW COLLAR (FIGURE 2-4) USING THE PROVIDED HEX KEY
BEFORE ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE. THE SET SCREW
COLLAR MUST BE POSITIONED SUCH THAT THERE IS NO LESS THAN 25 mm (1 INCH)
OF CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE BOTTOM EDGE OF THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE AND
THE TOUCHSCREEN BASE PLATE WHEN THE TOUCHSCREEN IS ADJUSTED TO ITS
MINIMUM HEIGHT.
PLEASE BE SURE TO SUPPORT THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE WHEN ADJUSTING ITS
VIEWING POSITION.
Position the touchscreen console in its intended location and ensure that it is stable.
• The touchscreen console must be placed on a solid and level surface. There must be no risk of it
tipping or falling, especially if raised to its maximum viewing height.
• Ensure that the display is positioned at a height and angle to allow for easy viewing.
2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor
If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1. This should not be done until all
cable hookups to the generator are completed.
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR
Unless specified otherwise, all cables (except AC mains) should be routed into the generator main
cabinet through the cable access slots at the upper rear of the generator. The cables should be secured
to the lip on the inside of the cable access slots using tie-wraps or equivalent fasteners. For connections
that must be made to the H.V. auxiliary board, AEC board, or to the generator control board, route the
cables over the top of the fan-mounting bracket and over the chassis divider panel.
The AC mains cable is routed into the generator via the cable clamp on the rear of the generator,
adjacent to the main fuses.
All cables should be kept away from high voltage areas in the cabinet, and dressed neatly in
place. Cables should be cut to the correct length if possible, as excess cabling may contribute to EMI/RFI
problems. For those cables that cannot be cut to the correct length (HT cables and console cables for
example), try to minimize the area inside of any loops of excess cable, as these loops can create an
antenna.
Ferrules should be used on the ends of all stranded wires that are connected to terminal
connections in the generator. These must be supplied by the installer.
EXCESS LENGTHS OF CABLING MUST NEVER BE BUNDLED UP AND STORED INSIDE THE
GENERATOR.
2 Installation
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR (Cont)
2.6.1 Control Console
Membrane Console
1. Note the protective cover connected to the console cable. This is intended to protect the console
cable connectors during shipping and while routing the console cable during installation.
Disconnect the generator end of the cable (the end with the ferrite bead) from the protective
cover, and then route the end of the cable with the protective cover attached as required.
Remove and discard the protective cover when finished. After removing the protective cover,
inspect the console cable connectors for any damage. Please see figure 2-2 for an example of
such damage.
2. Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the cable access slot
nearest to the generator control board. The cable must be routed as per figure 2-3. Connect the
generator end of the console cable to J3 on the generator control board.
Figure 2-2: Console cable connector damage example
3. Connect the free end of the console cable to J8 at the rear of the console. Leave sufficient slack
in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
Touchscreen Console
2. Connect the free end of the console cable to GEN on the rear of the touchscreen console. Leave
sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
3. Tighten the screw locks to fully secure the “D” connectors.
4. Connect one end of the supplied ground wire to the touchscreen console ground screw, shown in
figure 2-4. Connect the other end of the ground wire to the ground connector near the main line
fuses in the generator (figure 2-8). Dress the ground wire away from high voltage areas in the
generator. This ground location may have other ground wires already connected; ensure that
these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the X-ray tube ground connection.
Note that this ground wire is required for EMC compliance only. It has no safety impact.
Installation 2
5. Optional: Connect customer-supplied speakers (minimum 8 ohms) to LO (3.5 mm stereo jack) on

the rear of the touchscreen console (do not use externally amplified speakers). Use cable ties to
secure the speaker cable to the console cable for support. Pins 1 and 2 (left and right) on the 3.5
mm male stereo jack must be shorted together on the cable that plugs into the touchscreen
console.
Please note that connecting external speakers will disable one of the on-board touchscreen
speakers.
Note: Connecting the touchscreen console cable to any connector other than J20 on the
generator control board may cause damage to the generator. Verify that the console cable
has been connected correctly prior to powering up the generator.
Mini-Console (optional)
2. Connect the free end of the console cable to the 15-pin male connector that is attached to the
short piece of console cable connected to the mini-console. Tighten the screw locks to fully
secure the “D” connectors on the console cable.
3. An extra cable (9-pin ‘D’ to RJ45) is included with the optional mini-console. This must be
connected from the standard serial port (9-pin ‘D’ connector) on the imaging computer to
J3 on the generator control board on any DR systems that require serial communication
with the generator.
Note: Connecting the mini-console cable to any connector other than J19 on the generator
control board may cause damage to the generator. Verify that the console cable has been
connected correctly prior to powering up the generator.
2 Installation
Figure 2-3: Console cable routing
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.

For the membrane console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet.
For the touchscreen console, GEN on the rear of the touchscreen is for the interconnect
cable to the generator, HS is for connection of an external hand switch, COM 1 & COM 2 are
serial ports for use by external devices, LO (3.5 mm stereo jack) is for customer supplied
speakers (minimum 8 ohms, do not use externally amplified speakers), ETH is a standard
10/100 Ethernet connection, USBA and USBB are USB ports for connection of external
devices, CF is for the compact flash memory card which holds the touchscreen software, and
SW1 is the console upgrade button.
For the mini-console, the short piece of console cable with the attached 15-pin “D” connector
is for connection of the console cable that is connected to J19 on the generator control
board.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Installation 2
Figure 2-4 shows the designations of the connectors on the rear panel of the membrane and touchscreen
consoles.
MEMBRANE CONSOLE
CONSOLE J8
J3 GROUND GENERATOR J4
HAND LCD INTERFACE DATA
SWITCH CONTRAST LINK
CONSOLE
GROUND LO
AUDIO
LINE OUT
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE COM 1 COM 1 &
LO HS
COM 2 SERIAL
GEN CF SW1 COM 2
ETH
USBA
USBB PORTS
GEN HS
SET SCREW GENERATOR HAND
COLLAR INTERFACE SWITCH
FILE: CMP RAD_CONS2.CDR
Figure 2-4: Rear of control console
2 Installation
2.6.2 Hand Switch (Optional)
The optional hand switch, if ordered from APELEM-DMS Group, is supplied pre-wired to a male 9 pin
subminiature “D” connector. This connects to J3 on the membrane console or to HS on the touchscreen
console. A male 9 pin subminiature “D” connector will need to be provided by the installer if the APELEM-
DMS Group supplied hand switch is not used.
Pin assignments are as follows:
PIN NUMBER PIN CONNECTIONS

(J3 membrane console) / HS touchscreen console)
1 X-ray
2 No Connection
3 Prep
4 No Connection
5 Common (ground)
6 NOT USED
7 NOT USED
8 NOT USED
9 NOT USED
2.6.3 Stator Connections
Low-speed Starter
Refer to figure 2-5 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections for the low speed starter.
1. Route the X-ray tube stator cable to the stator terminal block J7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. This
is shown in figure 2-5.
USE OF A SHIELDED STATOR CABLE IS RECOMMENDED. THE SHIELD FOR THE

STATOR CABLE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT BOTH THE TUBE END AND THE
GENERATOR END OF THE CABLE. CONNECT THE GENERATOR END OF THE SHIELD TO
THE GROUND TERMINAL ON J7.
2. Connect the X-ray tube stator and the thermal switch to J7 on the H.V. auxiliary board terminal
block as per the table below.
J7
6 5 4 3 2 1
CMP200_STATOR
Figure 2-5: Stator / thermal switch connections on H.V. auxiliary board (low speed starter)
Installation 2
2.6.3 Stator Connections (Cont)
FUNCTION CONNECT TO
SHIFT J7-6.
MAIN J7-5.
COMMON J7-4.
GROUND J7-3.
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 1) J7-2.
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 2) J7-1.
Dual-speed Starter
Refer to figure 2-6 for the X-ray tube stator connections for the dual-speed starter.
TUBE 1
C M S
TUBE 1
CMP 200_DSS.CDR
Figure 2-6: Stator connections on dual-speed starter chassis
1. Route the X-ray tube stator cable to the stator terminal block on the back of the dual-speed
starter chassis. Refer to figure 2-6.
THE STATOR CABLE FOR THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE SHIELDED. THE SHIELD
FOR THE STATOR CABLE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT BOTH THE TUBE END
AND THE GENERATOR END OF THE CABLE. CONNECT THE GENERATOR END OF THE
SHIELD TO THE GROUND TERMINAL ON THE STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK (FIGURE 2-6).
2 Installation
2.6.3 Stator Connections (Cont)
2. Connect the X-ray tube stator and the thermal switch as per the table below.
FUNCTION CONNECT TO
SHIFT Dual speed starter chassis, TUBE 1, terminal S.
MAIN Dual speed starter chassis, TUBE 1, terminal M.
COMMON Dual speed starter chassis, TUBE 1, terminal C.
GROUND
Dual speed starter chassis, TUBE 1, terminal .
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 1) J7-2 on H.V. auxiliary board.
THERMAL SWITCH (Term 2) J7-1 on H.V. auxiliary board.
3. Secure the X-ray tube stator cable to the generator chassis using suitable tie-wraps or equivalent
fasteners.
2.6.4 Thermal Switch
The X-ray tube thermal switch is connected to J7-1 and J7-2 on the H.V. auxiliary board for both the low
speed starter and the dual-speed starter, as per section 2.6.3.
2.6.5 Power Line Mains
WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS

LOCKED IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-
ENERGIZED BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.
Refer to chapter 1 for generator power and generator power line requirements.
1. Temporarily disconnect the fan by unplugging the fan power-connector at the fan cover.
2. Remove and set aside the hardware securing the fan cover to the generator. Then remove the
fan cover with the fan attached.
3. Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses (if fitted). This must be reinstalled after
the AC mains connections are made, before reinstalling the fan cover.
4. Prepare the AC mains cable as per figure 2-7 and the AC Mains Termination Table, and then
strip the ends of the leads to the required length.
5. Pass the AC mains cable through the cable clamp at the upper rear of the generator cabinet,
adjacent to the main fuses. Tighten the clamps to secure the cable.
6. Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains power wires to
the terminals on the main fuse holder shown in figure 2-8. For 1 phase generators connect the
mains to F1 and F2; for 3 phase units connect the mains to L1, L2, and L3.
• Ferrules should be used on the ends of the AC mains wires. These must be supplied by the
installer.
• For China only, the power cable must be CCC approved.
Installation 2
2.6.5 Power Line Mains (Cont)
7. Re-install the fan cover and reconnect the fan by reversing the previous steps.
THE FAN MUST BE CONNECTED AT ALL TIMES.

FAILURE TO CONNECT THE FAN WILL RESULT IN GENERATOR MALFUNCTION &
ERROR MESSAGES.
8. Do not switch on mains power until requested to do so in a later step.
Figure 2-7: Termination of AC mains cable
AC Mains Termination Table

GROUND L1 L2 L3
All 80 kW
7 (178) 3.25 (83) 3.25 (83) 4.25 (108)
Configurations
50 kW
208 – 230 VAC, 7 (178) 5 (127) 4.75 (121) 5 (127)
3P Configurations
40 kW & 50 kW
400 – 480 VAC, 7 (178) 5.75 (146) 5.5 (140) 5.75 (146)
3P Configurations
208 – 230 VAC
7 (178) 5 (127) 5 (127) N/A
1P Configurations
*Dimensions are in inches (mm)
2 Installation
2.6.5 Power Line Mains (Cont)
Figure 2-8: Generator mains connection
Installation 2
2.6.6 High Tension Cables
The X-ray tube should be mounted in its normal fixture i.e. tube stand or other device.
1 Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition, and coated with vapor proof
compound.
2. Remove the dust caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank.
3. Connect the anode and cathode cables to the HT tank. Ensure that the cables are plugged into
the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-9.
4. Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw-down ring.
GND
-CATHODE-
+ANODE+
CMPTANK.CDR
Figure 2-9: HV connector identification
2.6.7 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground
In addition to the X-ray tube manufacturers recommended tube grounding procedure, a separate ground
wire (10 AWG, 6mm2) must be connected from the X-ray tube housing to one of the ground studs on the
HT tank. Refer to figure 2-9 for the location of these ground studs. These ground locations may have
other ground wires already connected; ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected
when making the X-ray tube ground connection.
Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.
2 Installation
2.6.8 Room Equipment
Refer to chapter 3C for connection of Buckys, interlocks, room lights, the DR imaging system (if
applicable), DAP, collimator lamp and system locks power, and to chapter 3D for installation and
calibration of AEC. It is suggested that these items not be connected until the initial run-up of the
generator is complete, and the tube auto calibration routine has been performed as described near the
end of this chapter.
2.6.9 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay
To connect an external emergency power-off switch, disconnect the jumper from J2-1 to J2-2 on the
generator control board. Then connect the emergency-off switch to J2-1 and J2-2. Refer to MD-0928 in
chapter 9.
For installations where installer-supplied auxiliary power distribution circuits are added to the
generator, 24 VDC is available on the generator interface board to drive the coil of the power distribution
relay. Connect the coil to J2-3 (+) and J2-4 (ground). Refer to MD-0927 in chapter 9. The maximum
current available from this source is 100 mA.
WARNING: THE EMERGENCY POWER OFF SWITCH DOES NOT REMOVE THE AC MAINS INPUT
VOLTAGE. HIGH VOLTAGE STILL EXISTS INSIDE THE GENERATOR IN THE AREA OF THE
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER AND THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD. ENSURE THAT THE AC
MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED OUT AND ALL CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE SERVICING.
2.6.10 Safety Interlocks
The room door interlock switch must be wired to the generator as described in Inputs in chapter 3C
before the generator is powered up. This switch must provide an open contact when the door is open.
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE COMPATIBILITY
The Low Speed Starter is integrated into the H.V. Auxiliary Board within the MAGNUM® and MAGNUM®
DR generators. The phase-shift capacitor is chassis-mounted as shown in figure 1-4.
Before continuing, note the phase-shift capacitor value is compatible with your X-ray tube stator. Please
refer to table 1, in the supplement, X-ray Tube Start Compatibility Tables in this manual. If the value of
the phase-shift capacitor is not compatible with the desired X-ray tube stator type, please contact
APELEM-DMS Group product support for assistance.
Confirm that the boost voltage is set correctly for the selected tube type per the referenced Table 1 before
continuing. The procedure for setting the boost voltage is detailed in 2.7.1. The boost voltage may be
measured from F6 to F7 on the H.V. auxiliary board.
If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact APELEM-DMS Group product support for assistance.
Confirm proper stator operation using a suitable tachometer before making any exposures.
WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD
Installation 2
2.7.1 Setting 120 / 240 VAC Boost Voltage
Follow the steps below to verify and configure the low speed starter boost voltage. This is factory
configured to 240 VAC.
1 Confirm the required boost voltage for the selected tube as described above. The requirement for
the vast majority of tubes in Table 1 of the supplement is 240 V. For tubes that require 120 V
boost, this is noted in the table.
2. The boost voltage is configured via jumpers on the H.V. auxiliary board:
• E16 to E15 selects 240 V boost.
• E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.
Swap the connection at E14 and E16 if the boost voltage needs to be changed. The jumper wire
(E16 - E15 or E14 - E15) will need to be replaced if making this change. Extra jumper wires are
attached to a bag on the lip on the inside of the cable access slot above the HT tank. Select the
shortest wire from this bag that will connect between the desired tabs on the board that has the
proper terminations on the jumpers. Do not discard the existing jumper; place it in the jumper kit
to be available for future configuration changes.
Proceed to the next step if the jumper setting is correct.
NOTE: THE ROTOR BOOST TIME MAY BE ADJUSTED IN THE RANGE OF 1 SECOND TO 4 SECONDS.
THIS SHOULD BE SET PER THE X-RAY TUBE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION, OR AS
REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER ANODE ROTATION AT THE END OF THE PREP CYCLE.
REFER TO ROTOR BOOST, UNDER GENERATOR LIMITS IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE
PROCEDURE TO SET THE ROTOR BOOST TIME.
NOTE: THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOOST MUST NOT EXCEED 5 CONSECUTIVE BOOSTS, AND MUST
BE FOLLOWED BY A MINIMUM 10 SECOND WAIT PERIOD.
3. Confirm the proper boost voltage and proper anode rotation as described above.
2 Installation
2.8.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL-SPEED STARTER
This section applies only to units fitted with the dual-speed starter.
The dual-speed starter must be programmed for the X-ray tube type used at this site. This is done via DIP
switch SW1 on the dual speed starter board.
The following tube functions are set with this switch:

• High-speed start and run voltages.
• Low-speed start and run voltages.
• Brake time and brake voltage (high speed).
• Boost times.
• Boost time increments. Boost time may be increased in 100 ms steps in the range of 100 to 700 ms.
SW1 on the dual-speed starter must be set correctly to match the X-ray tube in use. Failure
to set this correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may damage the X-ray
tube.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE
PROCEEDING.
2.8.1 EPROM type / dual speed starter
1. The dual-speed starter EPROM is different for 400 V units and for 480 V units. If a 400 V unit is
reconfigured for 480 V, or a 480 V unit is reconfigured for 400 V, the dual speed starter EPROM
will need to be changed. A spare EPROM (the complement of the EPROM that is in the dual
speed starter) is in a bag attached to the lip on the inside of the cable access slot above the HT
tank. Refer to chapter 6 for the EPROM replacement procedure, and to the table below for the
applicable EPROM part numbers.
400 VAC CONFIGURATION 480 VAC CONFIGURATION
DSS part number EPROM part # DSS part number EPROM part #
901297-02 733159-00 901298-02 735896-00
901297-12 739311-00 901298-12 739313-00
901297-13 733159-00 901298-13 735896-00
901297-15 733159-00 901298-15 735896-00
901297-16 739311-00 901298-16 735313-00
2. If you are making the conversion as per the previous step, use an indelible marker to change the
part number of the dual-speed starter assembly (901297-XX to 901298-XX, or vice-versa). The
dual-speed starter part number is printed on a label near the top left side of the dual speed starter
chassis. Keeping the dual-speed starter part number current will maintain configuration control of
the product.
2.8.2 Setting tube type
1. Select the desired tube type from Table 2 of X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables Supplement
746026-00. Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and the binary code as per the
third column in the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies only to the housing and
inserts listed, i.e. for the specific manufacturer(s) shown.
2. If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact APELEM-DMS Group product support for
assistance.
Installation 2
2.8.2 Setting tube type (Cont)
3. The dual-speed starter used in MAGNUM® DR X-ray generators will be either part number
901297-02, 12, 13, 15 or 16 (400 VAC units) or 901298-02, 12, 13, 15 or 16 (480 VAC units).
The “-02” dual-speed starter has a 60 μF low-speed capacitor, and a 20 μF high-speed capacitor.
The “-12” dual-speed starter will automatically select either a 36 μF or 37.5 μF low-speed
capacitor for low-speed operation, and will automatically select 6 μF or 7.5 μF for high-speed
operation, based on the setting of SW1.
The “-13” dual-speed starter has a 30 μF low-speed capacitor, and, will automatically select 5 μF
or 6 μF for high-speed operation.
The “-15” dual-speed starter has a jumper-selectable 15.5 μF or 28 μF low-speed capacitor, and
an automatically selected 3 μF or 6 μF high-speed capacitor.
The “-16” dual-speed starter will automatically select either a 31 μF or 37.5 μF low-speed
capacitor for low-speed operation, and will automatically select 6 μF or 12.5 μF for high-speed
operation.
The stated capacitor values are equivalent capacitor values, and are derived from several
combinations of relay-selected series / parallel discrete capacitors, depending on the part
number. Refer to MD-0924 in chapter 9 for details.
4. To determine if the dual-speed starter contained within your generator is compatible with the
desired tube as selected in step 1, note the part number of the dual-speed starter in your
generator. This is printed on a label near the top left side of the dual speed starter chassis. This
part number must appear in the last column of Table 2 in X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Supplement 746026-00.
5. Refer to figure 2-10. Set DIP switch SW1 with the binary code for the selected tube. The binary
code shown in the referenced Table 2 programs the tube type (housing and insert), for example
housing type Varian Sapphire with standard “R” stator and inserts per Table 2 requires SW1-1 to
be set ON, SW1-2 OFF, SW1-3 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the voltages,
brake times, and boost times required.
Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time over the
preselected values (i.e. to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example, binary 000 gives
zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms increase, and binary
111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7 bit 2, and SW1-8
represents bit 3.
EXAMPLE:
Binary 100 = decimal 4 = 400 ms incremental boost time increase:
1 0 0
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
SW1-8 SW1-7 SW1-6
6. The DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-10 is for the example in step 5 with an incremental
increase in boost time of 200 ms.
7. Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM
before making any exposures.
2 Installation
2.8.2 Setting tube type (Cont)
NOTE: FOR TUBES WHERE “LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE “HIGH SPEED
OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE
PROGRAMMED FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION
SECTION IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS.
THE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-10 IS REPRESENTATIVE OF ONE STYLE OF

SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH STYLE MAY VARY.
PLEASE NOTE THE ON / OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR UNIT.
COMPONENT SIDE OF DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW2
OFF
BOOST TIME
TUBE INCREASE
TYPE
0.1 TO 0.7 SEC
PROGRAM SWITCHES 1-5 PROGRAM SWITCHES 6-8
8
SW1
IN ORDER AS SHOWN AS PER 2.8.2

IN TABLE 2-2 STEP 5
1
EXAMPLE ONLY
Figure 2-10: DIP switches on dual-speed starter
Installation 2
2.8.3 Configuring dual speed starter 901297-15 / 901298-15
Dual speed starter part number 901297-15 / 901298-15 is a special configuration in which the low-speed
phase shift capacitors may be set to 15.5 uF or 28 uF. The 15.5 uF setting is intended for use in
installations where low-speed operation of CGR (GE) Statorix tubes is required. The high-speed
capacitance is automatically selected to either 3 uF or 6 uF according to the DIP switch setting.
Refer to figure 2-11. In configuration “A”, (28 uF) two leads are connected to the lower right capacitor.
Thus, the capacitor is in-circuit in this configuration. Configuration “B” (15.5 uF) has one of the leads
removed from the terminals of this capacitor, thus the capacitor is out of the circuit.
• To change from configuration “A” to “B”, disconnect the interconnecting lower lead from the lower left
capacitor in figure 2-11, and connect it to the same terminal on the lower right. This removes the
lower right capacitor from the circuit.
• To change from configuration “B” to “A” in figure 2-11, reconnect the lead between the two capacitors,
as shown. This connects the capacitor into the circuit.
After the phase shift capacitors are correctly configured, set the DIP switches as follows:
• Locate the desired tube in table 2 of supplement 746026, which follows Chapter 2. With dual speed
starter 901297-15 / 901298-15 set to configuration “A”, this starter is compatible with all tubes
requiring a 3 uF or 6 uF high-speed shift capacitor (unless indicated otherwise) and a 28, 30 or 31 uF
low-speed shift capacitor. When set to configuration “B”, it is only compatible with tubes requiring a 3
uF or 6 uF high-speed shift capacitor (unless indicated otherwise) and a 15.5 uF low-speed shift
capacitor.
• Note the DIP switch setting for the desired tube as per table 2.
• Set the DIP switches as per 2.8.2.
CONFIGURATION “A” CONFIGURATION “B”

(28 uF for TOSHIBA STATOR) (15.5 uF for LOW-SPEED CGR STATOR)
CAPACITOR IN-CIRCUIT CAPACITOR OUT-OF-CIRCUIT
DUAL SPEED DUAL SPEED

STARTER STARTER
BOARD BOARD
CMP200_FIG2-11A.CDR
Figure 2-11: Selection of phase shift capacitance
2 Installation
2.9.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Before continuing, verify the DIP switch settings on the generator control board. These switches have
been factory set but may have been readjusted, particularly if this generator is a re-install.
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD:

• Verify the settings on S3. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch.
GENERATOR POWER MAXIMUM mA S3-8 S3-7 S3-6 S3-5

32 kW 400 mA OFF OFF OFF ON
40 kW 500 mA OFF OFF ON OFF
50 kW 630 mA OFF OFF ON ON
65 kW 800 mA OFF ON OFF ON
80 kW 1000 mA OFF ON ON OFF
S3-1 ON > LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS * OFF > DEFAULTS DISABLED *
DIP switches S3-2, S3-3, and S3-4 are not used.
* Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in chapter 6 for details regarding this function.
2.10.0 INITIAL RUN-UP
This section describes the procedure for auxiliary transformer line voltage tap selection, and for initial
power-on of the generator after it has first been installed.
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER:
• IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE
SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER
POINT GROUND-REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA-CONFIGURED SECONDARY, AS
THERE IS NO GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
• IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C.
INPUT TO THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND-REFERENCED.
2.10.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection
For 208 / 230 V generators, the line voltage taps on the auxiliary transformer must be checked before
powering up the generator.
For 400 / 480 V generators, the auxiliary transformer line voltage tap is factory set to match the line
voltage that was specified at the time of the order. If these units are to be operated from other than the
rated line voltage (i.e. if a 400 V generator is to be operated from 480 V mains), the line voltage tap on
the auxiliary transformer must be changed as described below.
For 208 / 230 VAC generators:

1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation per
Generator Power Requirements in chapter 1.
2. Locate the auxiliary transformer inside the generator cabinet. Refer to chapter 1.
Installation 2
2.10.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection (Cont)
3. Note the line-voltage tap position on this transformer as determined by the location of the wire on
the 208V or the 240V tap on the transformer primary. This is normally set to the 240V tap. Refer
to figure 2-12.
4. Based on the nominal line voltage, set the transformer primary voltage tap as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the current line-voltage tap, and for the required line-voltage
tap.
• Connect to the 208 V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
• Connect to the 240 V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.
Figure 2-12: Auxiliary transformer, terminal view
For 400 / 480 VAC generators:

The 400 / 480 V tap setting only needs to be changed if a 400 V generator is to be operated from 480 V
mains, or if a 480 V generator is to be operated from 400 V.
1. Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation per
GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS in chapter 1.
2. Locate the auxiliary transformer inside the generator cabinet. Refer to chapter 1.
3. Note the line-voltage tap position on this transformer as determined by the location of the wire on
the 400V or the 480V tap on the transformer primary. This is set to the 400 or 480V tap to match
the line voltage specified at the time of the order. Refer to figure 2-12.
2 Installation
2.10.1 Auxiliary Transformer Line Voltage Tap Selection (Cont)
4. Based on the nominal line voltage, set the transformer primary voltage tap as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the current line-voltage tap, and for the required line-voltage
tap.
• Connect to the 400 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 400 VAC.
• Connect to the 480 V tap if the line voltage is nominally 480 VAC.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.
2.10.2 Initial Voltage Measurements
1. If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and / or the
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH THE GENERATOR ON AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO
THE GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON).
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT

WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN
WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MAY PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM
OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE GENERATOR HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. CHECK
THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY PARTS
IN THE GENERATOR.
2. Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single-phase units
will only use one set of voltage measurements.
L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC.

3. Are the line-to-line and line-to-ground voltages within specification for the unit? For single phase
230 V units, the line to ground voltage should be 99 – 127 V. For 3 phase units, the phase to
ground voltage should be 114 – 146 V for 208 / 230 V units, 230 V ± 10 % for 400 V units, and
277 V ± 10 % for 480 V units.
___ Check
4. Confirm that the auxiliary transformer line voltage taps are set to the appropriate position as per
the measured line voltage.
___ Check
5. If a 400 V unit with the optional dual-speed starter is reconfigured for 480 V, or a 480 V unit is
reconfigured for 400 V, the dual speed starter EPROM will need to be changed as described in
the section EPROM type / dual speed starter. Confirm that this has been done.
___ Check
Installation 2
2.11.0 TUBE mA AUTO CALIBRATION
It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the X-ray tube and rotor / high-
tension cables connected. The generator should be able to complete an X-ray tube seasoning and
calibration cycle without other equipment connected to the generator (other than the basic interlocks as
noted below). This will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of the system is connected and
tested.
Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the room door interlock must be closed and the
thermal switch must be closed. The interlocks cannot be deprogrammed during tube mA auto calibration.
It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto
calibration, particularly if the tube has not been used for some time. Refer to chapter 6.
Before beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly
selected, and the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
2.12.0 FINAL CHECKS
The room interface connections may now be completed. These items are described in 2.6.8.
• When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
• Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary.
• Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.
• For units with the touchscreen console, perform touchscreen calibration. Refer to chapter 3C for the
proper calibration procedure.
NOTE: THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE
GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR
ARE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.
2 Installation
(This page intentionally left blank)
Interfacing, Programming, & Calibration 3
CHAPTER 3
INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING, AND

CALIBRATION
3.0.0 INTRODUCTION
3.1.0 Purpose
This chapter describes the interfacing of the MAGNUM C and MAGNUM C DR X-ray generators to
Bucky’s, interlocks, collimator lamp, etc, and to the AEC chambers (if the AEC option is fitted).
Generator programming and AEC calibration is also covered in this chapter.
This chapter contains the following sections.
Section Title
3A Not Used
3B Not Used
3C Interfacing and Programming
3D AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) calibration
3 Interfacing, Programming, & Calibration
(This page intentionally left blank.)
Interfacing and Programming 3C
CHAPTER 3C
INTERFACING AND PROGRAMMING

CONTENTS:
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 3C-3

3C.2.0 WIRING TO INPUTS & OUTPUTS ................................................................................................................ 3C-3
3C.2.1 Inputs.......................................................................................................................................................... 3C-3
3C.2.2 Outputs....................................................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.2.3 Inputs & Outputs (simplified schematic)..................................................................................................... 3C-6
3C.2.4 AEC Interconnect ....................................................................................................................................... 3C-7
3C.2.5 DR imaging system .................................................................................................................................... 3C-7
3C.3.0 GENERATOR PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................... 3C-7
3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode .............................................................................................................. 3C-7
3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU........................................................................................................................ 3C-8
3C.5.0 UTILITY MENU ............................................................................................................................................ 3C-10
3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date ............................................................................................................................. 3C-10
3C.5.2 Error Log .................................................................................................................................................. 3C-12
3C.5.3 Statistics ................................................................................................................................................... 3C-13
3C.5.4 Console .................................................................................................................................................... 3C-14
3C.6.0 APR EDITOR ............................................................................................................................................... 3C-18
3C.7.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.7.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup ................................................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.7.2 Generator Limits....................................................................................................................................... 3C-29
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 3C-31
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.7.5 AEC Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 3C-46
3C.7.6 AEC Calibration........................................................................................................................................ 3C-49
3C.7.7 Tube Calibration....................................................................................................................................... 3C-49
3C.8.0 VALIDATE APR ........................................................................................................................................... 3C-50
3C.9.0 DAP PRINTER SETUP ................................................................................................................................ 3C-54
3C.10.0 DAP INTERFACING................................................................................................................................. 3C-54
3C.10.1 DAP Compatibility................................................................................................................................. 3C-54
3C.10.2 DAP Installation .................................................................................................................................... 3C-55
3C.11.0 DAP SETUP ............................................................................................................................................. 3C-55
3C.11.1 DAP SETUP Menu ............................................................................................................................... 3C-55
3C.11.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items ..................................................................................................................... 3C-57
3C.12.0 DAP CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................................. 3C-60
3C12.1 Equipment Required ................................................................................................................................ 3C-60
3C.12.2 DAP Calibration Overview .................................................................................................................... 3C-60
3C.12.3 DAP Calibration Procedure .................................................................................................................. 3C-61
3C.12.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet ................................................................................................................. 3C-64
MAGNUM C X-Ray Generator Service Manual Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H Page 3C-1
3C.13.0 DATA LINK (CONNECT TO GENWARE®) .................................................................................................... 3C-66

3C.14.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION BACKUP AND RESTORE................................................................. 3C-66
3C.15.0 LICENSE KEY SETUP ............................................................................................................................. 3C-67
3C.16.0 MONOCHROME DISPLAY...................................................................................................................... 3C-68
3C.17.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES .................................................................................................... 3C-69
3C.17.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu ................................................................................................................ 3C-70
3C.17.2 APR Editor............................................................................................................................................ 3C-72
3C.17.3 APR Backup / Restore ......................................................................................................................... 3C-75
3C.17.4 Date / Time Setup................................................................................................................................. 3C-78
3C.17.5 Receptor Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 3C-79
3C.17.6 Touchscreen Setup .............................................................................................................................. 3C-81
3C.17.7 Touchscreen Calibration ...................................................................................................................... 3C-85
3C.17.8 Data Link .............................................................................................................................................. 3C-85
3C.17.9 Configuration Backup / Restore ........................................................................................................... 3C-86
3C.17.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore............................................................................ 3C-88
3C.17.11 Generator Configuration Backup and Restore ..................................................................................... 3C-96
Page 3C-2 Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H MAGNUM C X-Ray Generator Service Manual
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the interfacing of the MAGNUM C® and MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators to
Bucky(s), interlocks, room lights, a DR imaging system (if applicable), DAP, collimator lamp and tube stand
locks, and also describes the generator programming.
3C.2.0 WIRING TO INPUTS & OUTPUTS
NOTE: THE INSTALLER MUST PROVIDE THE NECESSARY INTERFACING CABLES FOR WIRING TO
THE GENERATOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION.
WARNING: LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR AT ALL TIMES THAT THE MAIN
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. FOR SAFETY, THE MAIN DISCONNECT SHOULD BE
SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT WHILE CONNECTING ROOM EQUIPMENT.
3C.2.1 Inputs
The Bucky inputs, interlock 1 and interlock 2 / tomo inputs, and room door interlock inputs are opto coupled.
This means that a relay contact, transistor, or other low-impedance switching device (≤ 100 Ω, 10 mA current
rating) must be connected across each of these inputs. Table 3C-1 defines the pin outs, polarity at the
terminals and the logic condition required for that input. If using a directional switching device, such as a
transistor, the polarity of the voltage seen by the switching device must be observed. This is shown in the table
below.
Refer also to figure 3C-1. This is a pictorial drawing of the J2, J4, and J11 inputs and outputs on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
Refer to 3C.2.4 for details on AEC connections.
WARNING: DO NOT DEFEAT THE ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK, OR THE INTERLOCK 1 AND 2 INPUTS
UNLESS THE CORRESPONDING DEVICE IS NOT PRESENT. CONSULT THE
APPLICABLE REGULATIONS BEFORE DISABLING ANY EXPOSURE INTERLOCKS. DO
NOT VIOLATE ANY REGULATIONS FOR X-RAY SAFETY.
NEVER BYPASS THE X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH INTERLOCK.
OBSERVE IONIZING RADIATION PERSONAL PROTECTION AT ALL TIMES.
NOTE: THE BUCKY 1 AND TOMO / BUCKY 2 OUTPUTS MAY BE INSTALLER-

PROGRAMMED. BUCKY 1 WILL NORMALLY BE PROGRAMMED TO
CORRESPOND TO THE TABLE BUCKY, AND BUCKY 2 WILL NORMALLY
BE PROGRAMMED FOR THE WALL BUCKY OR FOR TOMO.
3C.2.1 Inputs (Cont)
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD DEFINITION

J2-5 (-) B2: Bucky 1 ready. A contact closure from pin 5 to 6 indicates
J2-6 (+) B1: BUCKY 1 READY. *
J4-5 (-) B2: Bucky 2 ready. A contact closure from pin 5 to 6 indicates
J4-6 (+) B1: BUCKY 2 READY. *
J4-9 (-) Door interlock. A contact closure from pin 9 to 10 indicates that the
J4-10 (+) room door is closed. *
J2-1 (-) Interlock 2. A contact closure from pin 1 to 2 indicates that interlock 2
J2-2 (+) is closed. *
This is the tomo exposure input for any image receptor that is
programmed for tomo operation. The tomo start / stop command is
generated by the tomo system. The generator will only terminate the
tomo exposure if the tomo backup time is exceeded. *
J2-3 (-) Interlock 1. A contact closure from pin 3 to 4 indicates that interlock 1
J2-4 (+) is closed. *
Table 3C-1: Generator inputs
* These inputs are meant for dry contacts only. Do not apply any voltage source to these inputs.
3C.2.2 Outputs
Table 3C-2 shows the Bucky and auxiliary power outputs from the generator. Refer also to figure 3C-1.
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD DEFINITION
J2-10 B4: Bucky 1 return.
J2-9 B6: Ground (Bucky 1).
J2-8 B8: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Bucky 1). See note below.
J2-7 B3: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Bucky 1 start). See note below.
J4-4 B4: Tomo / Bucky 2 return.
J4-3 B6: Ground (Tomo / Bucky 2).
J4-2 B8: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Tomo / Bucky 2). See note
below.
J4-1 B3: 24 VDC, 110 / 220 VAC out (Tomo / Bucky 2 start). See note
below.
J11-3 Room lights. The generator supplies a dry contact closure when
J11-4 the room light is to be activated.
J11-5 24 VAC @ 150 watts output for customer use.
J11-6
J11-1 (-) 24 VDC @ 45 watts output for customer use (unswitched).
J11-2 (+)
Table 3C-2: Generator outputs
3C.2.2 Outputs (Cont)
NOTE: The generator is factory configured to supply 110 VAC to drive the Buckys. The Bucky outputs may be
reconfigured to supply 24 VDC or 220 VAC if required, as described in chapter 8. Please confirm
compatibility with the Buckys used in this installation before proceeding. For tomo operation, the
applicable Bucky outputs must be programmed as necessary.
The BUCKY 1 START and TOMO / BUCKY 2 START relays K1 and K3 on the H.V. auxiliary board have
provisions for R-C snubber circuits to be connected across these relays. For older Buckys that typically
have relay inputs, the R-C snubber circuits usually need to be connected. These snubbers attenuate the
dV/dT transients that are generated when the corresponding relay in the Bucky opens.
For newer Buckys with opto-coupler inputs, the R-C snubber circuits across relays K1 and K3 on the
H.V. auxiliary board should remain disconnected, as the leakage current through the R-C snubber can be
sufficient to energize the opto-couplers in the Bucky(s) when the corresponding relays on the H.V
auxiliary board are open.
FOR OLDER BUCKYS WITH RELAY INPUTS:

• Refer to the table below and to MD-0930 in chapter 9. The required resistors (R2, R15) must be
installed to complete the R-C snubber circuit.
FOR NEWER BUCKYS WITH OPTO-COUPLER INPUTS:

• No action required. Resistors R2 and R15 are NOT factory installed, therefore the R-C snubber is
open-circuit. It is the responsibility of the installer to provide the proper interfacing circuits to the
opto coupler(s) in these types of installations.
The resistors that must be installed to complete the R-C snubber circuits across K1 and K3 on the H.V.
auxiliary board are shown below. Kits with these resistors are available from CPI Product Support. The kit part
number is 90301600.
RELAY RESISTOR NOTE
K1 R2 (10 ohm 1/2 W carbon composition) R2 is not factory-installed.
K3 R15 (10 ohm 1/2 W carbon composition) R15 is not factory-installed.
3C.2.3 Inputs & Outputs (simplified schematic)

J2
10 BUCKY RETURN ** 24 VDC
9 110 / 220 VAC
BUCKY 1
OUTPUTS 8 +12 VDC
BUCKY 1 START R2 *** C3
7 K1
+24 VDC BUCKY 1 START
K1 COMMAND
BUCKY 1 6
READY * 5 BUCKY 1 READY +24 VDC
INTERLOCK 1
+24 VDC
INTERLOCK 2
INTERLOCK 4
#1 * 3
INTERLOCK #2 / 2
TOMO EXPOSURE
INPUT * 1
J4
4 BUCKY RETURN ** 24 VDC
3 110 / 220 VAC
TOMO / BUCKY 2
OUTPUTS 2 +12 VDC
BUCKY 2 START R15 *** C10
1 K3
+24 VDC BUCKY 2 START
K3 COMMAND
BUCKY 2 6
READY * 5 BUCKY 2 READY +24 VDC
DOOR INTERLOCK
DOOR 10
INTERLOCK * 9
J11 F11
24 VAC OUT FROM 24 VAC
6
FOR COLLIMATOR SOURCE
5 +12 VDC
LAMP
3 K7
ROOM ROOM LIGHT
LIGHTS 4 “ON” COMMAND
F12
24 VDC OUT 2 + FROM 24 VDC
SOURCE
FOR TUBE
STAND LOCKS 1
* REFER TO TABLE 3C-1 FOR REQUIRED INPUT LOGIC LEVELS

** THE BUCKY OUTPUTS MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR +24 VDC, 110 VAC,
OR 220 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 8 FOR DETAILS.
*** REFER TO “OUTPUTS” IN THIS CHAPTER FOR DETAILS.
Figure 3C-1: J2, J4, and J11 inputs and outputs (H.V. auxiliary board)
3C.2.4 AEC Interconnect
Refer to chapter 3D for an overview of AEC theory, for AEC chamber connections, and for the AEC calibration
procedure.
3C.2.5 DR imaging system
MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators are factory-configured to interface with one or more DR imaging systems.
Refer to the compatibility statement in chapter 1 to determine which DR imaging system(s) this model of
generator is compatible with. The DR imaging system is connected to 37-pin “D” connector J25 on the
generator control board. The corresponding digital imaging supplement will be included in the front of this
manual. Refer to that supplement for the installation and setup procedure of the DR imaging system.
3C.3.0 GENERATOR PROGRAMMING
If you are using a membrane console, the generator may be programmed and calibrated via the control
console or via GenWare® MP (PC). When using the console for programming and calibration, all programming
/ calibration menus are displayed on the LCD display window on the console. The “soft key” buttons on the
console are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select and enter values in this section.
When using the touchscreen console, the generator must be programmed and calibrated via
GenWare® MP (touchscreen). This requires the GenWare® utility software, which can be accessed via
the GenWare® button in the System Utilities menu. Alternately, GenWare® MP (PC) may be used to
program the generator if desired.
3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode
To enter into the programming mode if using the membrane console, follow the steps below.
MENU
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
BACK FORWARD
Figure 3C-2: Programming / calibration mode reference
3C Interfacing and Programming .
3C.3.1 Entering Into Programming Mode (Cont)
Use these steps to access the GENERATOR SETUP menu (membrane console).
Step Action (membrane console) Action (GenWare®)
1. Start with the generator switched OFF.
2. While pressing and holding the MENU button,
press the power ON button on the console.
The MENU button must be pressed until the
console beeps.
3. Enter the password by pressing the button
sequence: [1] - [8] - [4] - [5].
4. The GENERATOR SETUP menu will be
displayed next.
3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU
The GENERATOR SETUP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
DIAGNOSTICS GEN CONFIGURATION
VALIDATE APR DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
3C.4.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU (Cont)
Overview of the functions available within each of the options in the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
MENU SUBMENUS EQUIVALENT FUNCTION
(MEMBRANE (MEMBRANE CONSOLE) (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
UTILITY • SET TIME & DATE • Date and Time Control Window
• ERROR LOG • Error Log utility.
• STATISTICS • Generator Statistics utility.
• CONSOLE • The CONSOLE function sets console-specific
parameters; therefore, it is not available in
GenWare®.
APR EDITOR • Enables / disables • This is a console-specific parameter; therefore, it is
changes to APR not available in GenWare®.
techniques.
DIAGNOSTICS • For factory use only. • This is a console-specific parameter; therefore, it is
not available in GenWare®.
GEN • TUBE SELECTION • Tube Setup utility.
CONFIGURATION
• GENERATOR LIMITS • Generator Limits Setup utility.
• RECEPTOR SETUP • Receptor Setup utility.
• I/O CONFIGURATION • Receptor Setup utility.
• AEC SETUP • AEC Setup and Calibration utility.
• AEC CALIBRATION • AEC Setup and Calibration utility.
• TUBE CALIBRATION • Tube Calibration utility.
• DAP SETUP • DAP Setup utility.
VALIDATE APR • Validates each APR • This function is not available in GenWare®.
entry to ensure that
the APR’s do not
exceed the generator
or tube limits.
DATA LINK • CONNECT TO • Data Link. Allows communication with an external
GENWARE® computer only.
• FIRMWARE UPDATE
The function CONNECT TO GENWARE® is described in the section DATA LINK
(Connect to GenWare®) later in this chapter. FIRMWARE UPDATE is described
under Console Firmware in chapter 6 of this manual.
EXIT SETUP • Returns to the normal operating mode (the non setup / programming mode). This
does not apply to GenWare®.
3C.5.0 UTILITY MENU
The UTILITY menu presents the user with the options shown below.
* UTILITY *
SET TIME & DATE
ERROR LOG
STATISTICS
CONSOLE
EXIT
3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date
This procedure allows the time and date to be set, or to be changed.
The SET TIME & DATE menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* SET TIME & DATE *
YEAR: 2002 HOUR: 18
MONTH: 3 MIN: 29
DAY: 30 +
-
EXIT
Figure 3C-3: Date and Time Control Window
3C.5.1 Setting Time And Date (Cont)
Use these steps to set the time and date.

1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select
the UTILITY menu.
Select the button on the GenWare®
toolbar to access the Date & Time Control
Window.
2. From the UTILITY menu, select the SET TIME The date and time may be set manually as
& DATE menu. described in steps 3 to 7 or the Touch Screen /
Computer clock may be used to set the
generator date and time as described in step 8.
3. Select YEAR. Use the + or – buttons to set the Select the year via the Year dialog box.
year.
4. Select MONTH. Use the + or – buttons to set Select the month via the Month dialog box.
the month.
5. Select DAY. Use the + or – buttons to set the Select the date via the Day dialog box.
date.
6. Select HOUR. Use the + or – buttons to set the Select the hour (in 24 hour format) via the Hour
hour (in 24 hour format). dialog box.
7. Select MIN. Use the + or – buttons to set the Select the minutes via the Minute dialog box.
minutes.
8. To synchronize GenWare® to the clock in your
computer (touchscreen), press the
Synchronize button in the lower left corner of
the Date & Time Control Window.
Doing so will transfer the computer’s
(touchscreen computer’s) time and date settings
to the time and date dialog boxes in the upper
half of the Date and Time Control Window.
Pressing Apply will apply those settings to the
generator’s clock.
NOTE: The time does not increment when in the SET TIME & DATE mode.
9. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu. Press Close to exit the Date & Time Control
Window.
3C.5.2 Error Log
This utility allows display of the error messages stored in the generator’s error log. The error log storage limit is
200 messages, at which point the generator will replace the oldest with the most recent.
The ERROR LOG menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* ERROR LOG *
ERROR # 1 OF 18
DATE: 8-19-2002 TIME: 13:09
ERROR CODE: 200 +
ERROR MESSAGE: ANODE HEAT WARN -
KVp: 80 mA: 100 ms: 200

EXIT
Figure 3C-4: Error Log utility
Use these steps to review the error log.

1. From the UTILITY menu, select ERROR LOG.
Select the Error Log button on the

GenWare® toolbar to access the error log utility
2. Select ERROR # and use the + or - buttons to Press the < or > buttons on the Error Log
scroll through the error log. window to scroll through the error log. The error
The error code, error message, date and time of message will be displayed to the right of the < >
the error will be displayed in the LCD window, buttons on the Error Log window. The error
and the associated parameters will be displayed code, date and time of the error, etc. will be
on the console displays displayed under Error Details on the left side of
the Error Log window, and the associated
parameters will be displayed under
Radiographic Parameters.
3C.5.2 Error Log (Cont)
3. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu. Select Close to exit the error log utility.
3C.5.3 Statistics
This utility shows the tube exposure count and the accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows
resetting of the tube 1 exposure counter.
The STATISTICS menu for the membrane console is shown below.

* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP: 500 RESET TUBE 1 EXP
TOTAL EXP: 1100
EXIT
Figure 3C-5: Generator Statistics utility
3C.5.3 Statistics (Cont)
Use these steps to view the generator statistics.

1. From the UTILITY menu, select STATISTICS.
Select the statistics button on the

GenWare® toolbar to access the Generator
Statistics window.
2. The STATISTICS menu displays exposure The Generator Statistics window displays
data, and allows the exposure counter to be exposure data, and allows the exposure counter
reset as described below: to be reset as described below:
• The TUBE 1 EXP counter displays the tube • The Tube 1 Rad Exposures counter
1 exposure count made since this counter display the tube 1 exposure count made
was last reset. since this counter was last reset.
• TOTAL EXP displays the total rad exposure • Total Number of Radiographic Exposures
count. This is not resettable * displays the total rad exposure count. This
• Select RESET TUBE 1 EXP to reset the is not resettable *.
tube 1 exposure counter. • Select Reset Tube 1 to reset the tube 1
exposure counter.
* The subject exposure counter is reset when the factory defaults are reset. Therefore, the “total
exposure” count should be recorded before resetting the factory defaults.
3. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu. Select Close to exit the generator statistics
utility.
3C.5.4 Console
The CONSOLE CONFIG menus allow setting of specific console operating features to suit operator
preferences, and also allow resetting of the console parameters to the factory defaults.
CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1

* CONSOLE CONFIG*
SLOW KEY REPEAT: 200MS LCD SCREEN
MED. KEY REPEAT: 150MS APR MODE: NO
FAST KEY REPEAT: 75MS +
SPEAKER VOLUME: 15 -
EXIT >>
3C.5.4 Console (Cont)

* CONSOLE CONFIG*
LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS?: NO
LOGO ON?: NO PASSWORD
LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
CM THICKNESS ON?: NO
<< >>

* CONSOLE CONFIG*
DAP UNITS: mGycm2
PED. SIZE: YES
<< RETURN
Since the CONSOLE CONFIG setup affects the membrane console only (setting of specific console operating
features to suit operator preferences), no equivalent function is available in GenWare®.
Definition of console parameters as used in this section.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
SLOW KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is pressed for
REPEAT the first 5 counts.
MED. KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is pressed for
REPEAT the next 5 counts.
FAST KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected key is pressed
REPEAT after 10 counts.
SPEAKER Sets the speaker volume for the control console in the range 1 to 15.
VOLUME
LCD SCREEN Toggles between normal and reverse video for the LCD display.
(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
APR MODE NO allows the operator to select an APR view, and still have the ability to manually
select receptors, focus, technique, film screen, AEC fields, etc.
YES allows the operator to select all of the above EXCEPT the technique selection
(AEC, mAs, mA/ms) i.e. this disables the ability to select AEC, mAs, mA/ms in APR
mode. (AEC, mAs, mA/ms changes can only be made by selecting an APR technique
that has been programmed to the desired technique).
LOAD CONSOLE YES: Initializes the console CPU’s NVRAM to the factory default settings when the
DEFAULTS? generator is switched ON. This restores the factory defaults for the APR and the
CONSOLE settings.
NO: The NVRAM is not reset when the generator is switched on.
The normal setting for this function is NO. Do not set to YES unless you intend
to restore the console factory defaults. Doing so will cause all custom console
and APR settings to be lost.
LOGO ON? YES: The predefined logo is displayed briefly after the generator is switched on.
NO: The logo is not displayed.
LANGUAGE Selects the language for status and error messages as well as for the default APR
text.
CM THICKNESS YES: CM THICKNESS mode is enabled.
ON? NO: CM THICKNESS mode is disabled.
If CM THICKNESS is enabled, the AEC BACKUP mode (under RECEPTOR SETUP)
must be set to mAs for each image receptor. If this is not done, CM thickness will not
be available in AEC mode.
PASSWORD Allows the programming mode password to be changed.
DAP UNITS μGym2: The DAP value will display as.

• Standard resolution DAP chamber: 123456.7 μGym2.
• High resolution DAP chamber: 123456.78 μGym2.
2
mGycm : The DAP value will display as.
• Standard resolution DAP chamber: 1234567 mGycm2.
• High resolution DAP chamber: 1234567.8 mGycm2.
High resolution DAP measurements are only available if a high
resolution DAP chamber is used and if it is properly selected as
described in 3C.11.2.
PED. SIZE YES: The pediatric patient size can be selected in APR mode within the normal
operating mode and the APR validator will validate the data associated with the
pediatric patient size.
NO: The pediatric patient size cannot be selected in APR mode. Also, the APR
validator will disregard the pediatric patient size.
This function does not apply to GenWare®.
Use these steps to set the console parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action (membrane console)
1. From the UTILITY menu select CONSOLE. This accesses CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1.
2. Select SLOW KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “slow key repeat” time.
3. Select MED. KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “med. key repeat” time.
4. Select FAST KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “fast key repeat” time.
5. Select SPEAKER VOLUME. Use the + or – buttons to set the speaker loudness.
6. Select LCD SCREEN. Toggle the button to select normal or reverse video.
7. Select APR MODE. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
8. Press >>.
9. Do not perform this step unless you intend to restore the console factory defaults.
To restore the console factory default settings, select LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS? and then
toggle the adjacent selection button to select YES.
In order for the changes to take effect, the generator must be switched OFF and then ON again.
The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select
YES to both prompts to reset both the console and APR defaults. Selecting NO will not update the
defaults. Do not load the defaults for the console settings if you are changing the language. See
LANGUAGE, below.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator
is switched on.
10. Select LOGO ON?. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
11. Select LANGUAGE. Toggle the selection button to select the desired language for status and
error messages as well as for the default APR text.
The console defaults (APR MEMORY only) must be loaded in order for the APR language
changes to take effect.
• Do not load the factory defaults for CONSOLE SETTINGS if you are changing the language,
as this will reset the language back to English.
• Loading the factory defaults for APR MEMORY will change the APR text to that of the
selected language with the factory-default APR text. If the APR text has been customized
using GenWare®, all customization will be lost if the factory defaults for APR MEMORY are
loaded.
12. Select CM THICKNESS ON?. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
13. Select PASSWORD. Enter and then re-enter a new password as prompted.
BE SURE TO RECORD THE NEW PASSWORD BEFORE CHANGING THE DEFAULT
PASSWORD. IF THE NEW PASSWORD IS SUBSEQUENTLY LOST, PLEASE CONSULT THE
FACTORY.
14. Press >>.
15. Select DAP UNITS. Toggle the selection button to select μGym2 or mGycm2.
16. Select PED. SIZE. Toggle the selection button to select YES or NO.
17. Select << to return to the previous page in the CONSOLE CONFIG menus.
18. Select RETURN to return to CONSOLE CONFIG screen 1.
19. Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
20. Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
3C.6.0 APR EDITOR
The APR EDITOR enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to APR
techniques.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: DISABLED
DIAGNOSTICS GEN CONFIGURATION
VALIDATE APR DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
No equivalent function exists in GenWare®, as the APR EDITOR affects the console operation only.
Definition of the APR EDITOR function.

(MEMBRANE
CONSOLE)
APR EDITOR Enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to APR
techniques.
ENABLED: Allows the operator to change the default APR technique(s), and
then save the changes to memory. The APR will subsequently
default to the changed technique.
DISABLED: Allows temporary editing of APR technique(s), but does not allow the
changes to be saved to memory. The APR will always default to the
original technique when the generator is switched OFF and then ON
again.
The generator stores the last APR EDITOR setting before being switched off.
If the APR editor was previously ENABLED, APR changes may subsequently
be made and then saved in normal operating mode without the need to
manually set the APR editor to ENABLED. To disable APR technique changes,
the APR editor must be set to DISABLED.
NOTE: APR text may be altered by using a computer running GenWare®. Further documentation
regarding this function is included with GenWare® in the form of an MS Word document.
The default location for the Word file is C:\CPI
Canada\GenWare32\console\manual\740849*.DOC.

Use these steps to set the APR EDITOR. Refer to the definition in the previous table.
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select APR EDITOR.
2. Toggle the button to select ENABLED or DISABLED.
3C.7.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu presents the user with the selections shown below. These are described in
detail in this section.
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP TUBE CALIBRATION
I/O CONFIGURATION DAP SETUP
EXIT
3C.7.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup
The TUBE SELECTION function allows the desired tube type to be selected, and it also allows setting of the
default limits for the selected tube.
The CMP 200® consoles have a preloaded library of compatible X-ray tubes. In addition to the preloaded tube
files, various user-selectable tubes can be uploaded to the console via the GenWare® console utilities.
• For the membrane console, if no user-selectable tube files have been uploaded, the first page of the tube
selection screens will be titled DEFAULT TUBE 1 SEL. This page will list the first eight preloaded tubes.
Additional preloaded tube types will be listed on subsequent pages.
• For the membrane console, if user-selectable tube files have been uploaded, the first page of the tube
selection screens will be titled USER TUBE 1 SELECT. This page will contain a maximum of eight tubes,
which is the maximum number of user-selectable tube files that can be uploaded to the console. Preloaded
tube types will be listed on subsequent pages.
• If user-selectable tube file(s) are uploaded to the console and if these file(s) are of a newer revision than
existing preloaded tube files, the latest user-uploaded files will not overwrite similar (possibly older) files on
the DEFAULT TUBE 1 SEL pages.
• The actual tube file layout and the number of TUBE SELECTION screens may vary from the illustrations
below.
TUBE SELECTION screen 1 (this applies only if user-selectable tubes have been
downloaded)
* USER TUBE 1 SELECT *
THIS PAGE WILL DISPLAY ONE TO EIGHT USER-SELECTABLE

TUBES IF APPLICABLE
(IF DOWNLOADED FROM GenWare®)
EXIT >>
3C.7.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup (Cont)
TUBE SELECTION screen 1 if no user-selectable tubes have been downloaded.

This will be screen 2 if user-selectable tubes have been downloaded.
* DEFAULT TUBE 1 SEL *
A192B 0.6/1.2 G256 0.6/1.0
A256 0.6/1.0 G292 0.6/1.2
A292 0.6/1.2 G1082 0.3/1.0
A272 0.3/0.6 RAD8 1.0/2.0
EXIT >>
TUBE SELECTION screen 2 (no user-selectable tubes) or screen 3 with

user-selectable tubes
RAD13 1.0/2.0 RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2 RAD60 0.6/1.2
RAD21 0.6/1.2 RAD68 1.0/2.0
RAD44 1.0/2.0 RAD74 0.6/1.5
<< >>

RAD92 0.6/1.2 E7255X 0.6/1.2
E7239X 1.0/2.0 MX75 1.0/2.0
E7242X 0.6/1.5 MX100 0.6/1.25
E7252X 0.6/1.2 RO1750 0.6/1.3
<< >>

PX1312 0.6/1.2 X50AH 1.2/2.0
PX1429 0.6/1.2 RTM78HS 0.6/1.2
PX1436 0.6/1.2 RTM90HS 0.6/1.0
X40 1.0/2.0 RTM90HS 0.6/1.2
<< >>

RTM90HS 0.6/1.5
RTM92HS 1.0/2.0
RTM101HS .6/1.2
RTM101HS .6/1.3
<< RETURN
The next three menus show the default tube limits. These menus appear after a
tube has been selected as per the following steps.
TUBE DEFAULTS screen 1
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
TUBE SPEED: LOW MAX SF KW HS: 39.6
MAX SF KW LS: 21.3 MAX LF KW HS: 75.0
MAX LF KW LS: 58.9 +
MAX KV: 125 -
EXIT >>

*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
SF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL BOOST: 200MS
LF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
SF MAX: 5.2A +
LF MAX: 5.5A -
<< >>

*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
MAX SF MA: 320
ANODE HU WARNING: 80%
ANODE HU LIMIT: 90% +
-
<< RETURN
Figure 3C-6: Tube Setup window, Tube Library tab
Figure 3C-7: Tube Setup window, Tube Settings tab
Figure 3C-8: Tube Setup window, kW Ratings at 100 ms tab
Figure 3C-9: Tube Setup window, Filament Parameters tab
Definitions of TUBE SELECTION menu items.

FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
(MEMBRANE (GenWare®)
CONSOLE)
TUBE SPEED Tube Speed Selects the dual speed starter mode (dual speed starter option
only).
LOW: Low speed mode only is enabled.
HIGH: High speed mode only is enabled.
DUAL: Low and high-speed modes are both enabled.
The generator will determine when to switch
modes, based on exposure parameters and tube
rating.
MAX SF KW LS Low Speed: Max Sets the maximum small focus low speed kW limit (@ 100 ms
SF Power (kW) *).
MAX LF KW LS Low Speed: Max Sets the maximum large focus low speed kW limit (@ 100 ms *).
LF Power (kW)
MAX KV Max Tube Voltage Sets the maximum kV allowed.
(kV)
MAX SF KW HS High Speed: Max Sets the maximum small focus high speed kW limit (@ 100 ms
SF Power (kW) *).
MAX LF KW HS High Speed: Max Sets the maximum large focus high speed kW limit (@ 100 ms
LF Power (kW) *).
SF STANDBY Small Focus: Sets the small focus standby filament current. The required
Standby Current value should be obtained from the X-ray tube data sheets.
(A)

CONSOLE)
LF STANDBY Large Focus: As above but for large focus.
Standby Current
(A)
SF MAX Small Focus: Max Sets the small focus maximum filament current.
Current (A)
LF MAX Large Focus: Max As above but for large focus.
Current (A)
FIL BOOST Filament Boost Sets the filament rapid boost duration in order to quickly raise
Time (ms) the filament temperature.
FIL PREHEAT Filament Preheat The time that the filament is held at the required emission level
Time (ms) before an exposure is permitted.
MAX SF MA Max SF Current Sets the maximum mA in small focus. This should be set as low
(mA) as possible to prevent focal spot track wear and focal spot
blooming.
ANODE HU Anode Warning Sets the limit at which the anode heat-warning message is
WARNING (%) displayed.
ANODE HU LIMIT Anode Limit (%) Sets the limit at which exposures will be inhibited. If the anode
heating is currently under the limit, the next exposure will be
inhibited if the generator calculates that the exposure will
exceed the anode HU limit.
* The stated maximum kW limits apply at the 100 ms point on the X-ray tube load ratings curve. Increasing or
decreasing the kW limits will shift the entire curve up or down proportionately to the percentage kW change.
Use these steps to select the desired tube type.

1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select
GEN CONFIGURATION.
Select the button from the GenWare®
toolbar to access the Tube Setup utility.
2. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select Select the Tube Library tab.
TUBE SELECTION.

3. Choose the desired tube type by pressing the Choose the desired tube type from the tube
button adjacent to the desired selection. library.
Use the >> and << buttons to navigate through Press Upload Tube to Generator to upload the
the tube selection menus if the desired tube is selected tube to the generator.
not displayed on the current page. To select an alternate tube library, press
Note that if a user-selectable tube is listed on Change Library Path:
the USER TUBE 1 SELECT page, it will not GenWare® via a PC: A Browse For Folder
overwrite an existing (possibly older) tube file on window will open. Browse to the drive / folder
one of the DEFAULT TUBE 1 SEL pages. In that contains the desired tube library, select the
case of duplication, the tube file on the USER desired item and then select OK. The new tube
TUBE 1 SELECT page should normally be library will replace the default tube library in the
used. Tube Setup window. The desired tube may then
Additional tube types may be downloaded using be selected.
the console utility in GenWare®, up to a limit of
eight user-selectable tubes. Touchscreen GenWare®: A pop up window
will open that points to the USB flash drive.
Select the desired tube library on the USB drive
and then select Open. The new tube library will
replace the default tube library in the Tube
Setup window. The desired tube may then be
selected.
For Touchscreen GenWare®, the desired
tube library must be pre-loaded onto a USB
flash drive.
4. Once the desired tube has been selected,
parameters for that tube are displayed showing
the default values. DO NOT adjust the default
values at this time.
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THE STARTER IN YOUR GENERATOR.
When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed (membrane console). Please consult the X-
ray tube data sheet(s) before making any changes.
The dual speed starter operates at 60 or 180 Hz (50 or 150 Hz for some tube types) independent of line
frequency.
The low speed starter operates at 50 Hz for 50 Hz mains, or 60 Hz for 60 Hz mains. The generator samples
the line frequency via a zero-crossing detector on the generator control board. Therefore, for units fitted with a
low speed starter, the generator automatically derates the 60 Hz tube ratings for 50 Hz operation if required.
PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS CLEARLY
UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING THE DEFAULT VALUES.
NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY
TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET, TABLE 3C-3. A BLANK FORM THAT
SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED AT THE END OF THIS SECTION. THIS ALLOWS
RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
Use these steps to set the tube limits and the associated parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous
table.
1. Select the Tube Settings tab.
2. Select TUBE SPEED. Toggle the button to Select Dual, Low, or High via the Tube Speed
select DUAL, LOW, or HIGH. dialog box.
3. Select the kW Ratings at 100 ms tab.
4. Select MAX SF KW LS. Use the + or – buttons Set the low speed, small focus kW limit via the
to set the low speed, small focus kW limit. Max SF Power (kW) dialog box, under Low
Speed.
5. Select MAX LF KW LS. Use the + or – buttons Set the low speed, large focus kW limit via the
to set the low speed, large focus kW limit. Max LF Power (kW) dialog box, under Low
Speed.
6. Select MAX SF KW HS. Use the + or – buttons Set the high speed, small focus kW limit via the
to set the high speed, small focus kW limit. Max SF Power (kW) dialog box, under High
Speed.
7. Select MAX LF KW HS. Use the + or – buttons Set the high speed, large focus kW limit via the
to set the high speed, large focus kW limit. Max LF Power (kW) dialog box, under High
Speed.
8. Select the Tube Settings tab.
9. Select MAX KV. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the maximum allowable kV via the Max
the maximum allowable kV. Tube Voltage (kV) dialog box.
10. Press >>. Select the Filament Parameters tab.
11. Select SF STANDBY. Use the + or – buttons to Set the small focus filament standby current via
set the small focus filament standby current. the Standby Current (A) dialog box, under
Small Focus.
12. Select LF STANDBY. Use the + or – buttons to Set the large focus filament standby current via
set the large focus filament standby current. the Standby Current (A) dialog box, under
Large Focus.
13. Select SF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the small focus maximum filament current
the small focus maximum filament current. via the Max Current (A) dialog box, under
Small Focus.
14. Select LF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the large focus maximum filament current
the large focus maximum filament current. via the Max Current (A) dialog box, under
Large Focus.
15. Select FIL BOOST. Use the + or – buttons to Set the filament rapid boost duration via the
set the filament rapid boost duration. Filament Boost Time (ms) dialog box.
16. Select FIL PREHEAT. Use the + or – buttons to Set the filament preheat time via the Filament
set the filament preheat time. Preheat Time (ms) dialog box.
17. Press >>. Select the Tube Settings tab.
18. Select MAX SF MA. Use the + or – buttons to Set the maximum small focus mA via the Max
set the maximum small focus mA. SF Current (mA) dialog box.
19. Select ANODE HU WARNING. Use the + or – Set the desired anode HU warning % via the
buttons to set desired anode HU warning %. Anode Warning (%) dialog box.

20. Select ANODE HU LIMIT. Use the + or – Set the desired anode HU limit % via the Anode
buttons to set desired anode HU limit %. Limit (%) dialog box.
21. Press RETURN or alternatively << to exit to the
Tube 1 Selection screen.
22. Press EXIT as required to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should be in the range of
700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure that there is no change in the signal level 5 ms. after the
start of an exposure, and that the mA starts at the selected level.
Standby current must be below the emission point.
If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube manufacturer’s
specifications.
TUBE SELECTION TUBE 1

DEFAULT SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX KV
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
GENERATOR LIMITS DEFAULT SELECTED

MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
ROTOR BOOST
Table 3C-3: X-ray tube and generator parameter worksheet
3C.7.2 Generator Limits
The GENERATOR LIMITS function allows setting of the generator output limits defined below.
The GENERATOR LIMITS menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR LIMITS*
MAX KW: 32 ROTOR BOOST: 1800 MS
MAX MA: 320
MAX MAS 500 +
MIN MA: 10 -
EXIT
Figure 3C-10: Generator Limits Setup window
Definitions of GENERATOR LIMITS menu items.

CONSOLE)
MAX KW Max Generator Sets the maximum generator kW limit.
Power (kW)
MAX MA Max Generator Sets the maximum generator mA limit.
Current (mA)
MAX MAS Max Generator Sets the maximum generator mAs limit.
Current-Time
(mAs)
MIN MA Min Generator Sets the minimum generator mA limit.
Current (mA)
3C.7.2 Generator Limits (Cont)

CONSOLE)
ROTOR BOOST Rotor Boost Time Sets the low speed starter boost time, in milliseconds. The
(ms) range is 900 ms (1 sec) to 3900 ms (4 sec), adjustable in 100
millisecond increments.
BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE DATA SHEETS TO
ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDED LIMITS. THE ORIGINAL GENERATOR LIMITS SHOULD BE RECORDED IN A COPY OF
TABLE 3C-3 BEFORE CONTINUING.
Use these steps to set the generator limits. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select
GENERATOR LIMITS.
Select the button to access the
Generator Limits Setup utility.
2. Select MAX KW. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the maximum kW via the Max Generator
the maximum kW. Power (kW) dialog box.
3. Select MAX MA. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the maximum mA via the Max Generator
the maximum mA. Current (mA) dialog box.
4. Select MIN MA. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the minimum mA via the Min Generator
the minimum mA. Current (mA) dialog box.
5. Select MAX MAS. Use the + or – buttons to set Set the maximum mAs via the Max Generator
the maximum mAs. Current-Time (mAs) dialog box.
6. Select ROTOR BOOST. Use the + or – buttons Set the desired rotor boost time via the Rotor
to set the low speed starter boost time. Boost Time (ms) dialog box.
7. Select Apply to save the new values to the
generator.
8. Press EXIT to return to the GEN Select Close to exit the generator limits setup
CONFIGURATION menu. utility.
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup
The RECEPTOR SETUP function allows each of the image receptors to be programmed as defined in the
table following the example menu screens.
The RECEPTOR SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
MENU 1
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *
TUBE: 1 TOMO BUT: 2500 MS
RECEPTOR SYM: [sym] INTERFACE OPTS: 0
MEMORY: DEF +
TOMO: NO -
EXIT >>
Note: The INTERFACE OPTS function is available only on CMP200® DR generators.
MENU 2
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN DEFAULTS
AEC BACKUP: FIXED AEC CHANNEL: 1
AEC BACKUP MAS: 100 +
AEC BACKUP MS: 1000 -
<< >>
MENU 3
RAD HANG: 10 SEC FUNCTIONAL OPTS: 0
+
-
<< RETURN
3C.7.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)
NOTE: THE DEFAULTS SELECTION IN MENU 2 IS ONLY AVAILABLE IF MEMORY IN MENU 1 WAS
SET TO DEF.
RECEPTOR MENUS 4 AND 5 (FOLLOWING) ARE ONLY ACCESSIBLE IF DEFAULTS IS
ENABLED.
MENU 4
TECHNIQUE: AEC LEFT FIELD: YES
FOCUS: SMALL CENTER FIELD: YES
FILM SCREEN: 1 RIGHT FIELD: YES
<< >>
MENU 5
KV: 75 DENSITY: 0
MA: 320
MS: 50 +
-
<<
Figure 3C-11: Receptor Setup window, Receptor Properties tab
Figure 3C-12: Receptor Setup window, AEC tab
Figure 3C-13: Receptor Setup window, Receptor Defaults tab
Definitions of RECEPTOR SETUP menu items.

CONSOLE)
TUBE Receptor Enable This function allows the receptor to be disabled.
checkbox Membrane console:
NONE: Disables the currently selected receptor.
1: Enables the currently selected receptor.
GenWare®:
Receptor Enables / disables the currently selected
Enable receptor.

CONSOLE)
RECEPTOR SYM This is a console Allows one of the predefined receptor symbols [sym] to be
function only; does assigned to the selected receptor.
not apply to
GenWare®.
MEMORY Memory Defines the techniques that will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected.
YES / on: The selected receptor will remember it’s last
techniques such that those techniques are
displayed when that receptor is re-selected.
NO / off: The selected receptor will not remember the
last techniques used on that receptor. The
techniques used will be the same as last used
on the previous receptor.
DEF / The techniques used for that receptor will be
default: as programmed. See receptor setup menus 3
and 4 (membrane console) or the Receptor
Defaults tab (GenWare®).
TOMO Tomo Enables or disables tomographic operation.
TOMO BUT Tomo Back-Up Time Sets the tomo backup time.
(ms)
INTERFACE Interface Options: Selects pre-defined digital interface options.
OPTS: Refer to the digital imaging supplement in the front of this
manual for the appropriate selection for this configuration.
FUNCTIONAL Functional Options: Selects pre-defined digital functional options.
OPTS: Refer to the digital imaging supplement in the front of this
manual for the appropriate selection for this configuration.
SF/LF SWITCH This function is not Enables or disables the ability of the generator to
available in automatically select the large or small focus.
GenWare® AUTO: Small or large focus will automatically be
selected by the generator. The small to large
(and vice-versa) switching will occur at the
MAX SF MA set point.
MAN: The operator must manually select small or
large focus.

CONSOLE)
AEC BACKUP AEC Back-up Mode Defines the AEC backup mode to be used.
FIXED: The generator will determine the maximum
AEC backup time, not to exceed preset AEC
backup mAs/ms values or system limits. The
characters AEC will be displayed on the LCD
display during AEC operation.
MAS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup
mAs, not to exceed preset AEC backup
mAs/ms values or system limits. The mAs
value will be displayed on the LCD display
during AEC operation.
MS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup
ms, not to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms
values or system limits. The ms value will be
displayed on the LCD display during AEC
operation.
AEC BACKUP AEC Backup mAs Sets the maximum AEC backup mAs, to a limit of 600 mAs.
MAS
AEC BACKUP MS AEC Backup ms Sets the maximum AEC back-up ms.
AEC CHANNEL AEC Channel Defines which AEC channel will be used by the selected
receptor. This must be set to a valid AEC channel number, or
to 0 as noted below. For example, if using an AEC board with
only 3 input channels (channels 1 to 3), then selecting AEC
channel 4 will cause an error. Selecting 0 disables AEC
operation on that receptor.
RAD HANG Rad Hangover (s): Sets the time that the rotor will continue to spin after a rad
exposure has terminated.
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IF DEFAULTS WAS ENABLED AS
PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED.
TECHNIQUE Technique Defines which technique will be defaulted to when a receptor
is selected.
Membrane console:
MA: Defaults to mA/ms mode.
MAS: Defaults to mAs mode.
AEC Defaults to AEC mode.
GenWare®:
ms: Defaults to mA/ms mode.
mAs: Defaults to mAs mode.
AEC Defaults to AEC mode.

CONSOLE)
FOCUS Focus Defines which focus will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected. Options are SMALL or LARGE.
FILM SCREEN Film Screen Defines which film screen will be defaulted to when a
receptor is selected and AEC enabled. Options are film
screen 1, 2, or 3 (membrane console) or I, II, or III
GenWare®.
LEFT FIELD Fields Defines which field(s) will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected.
CENTER FIELD
Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD
YES: The selected field will be selected.
NO: The selected field will not be selected.
GenWare®:
Refer to the graphic under Fields:
A blue field select rectangle = field not selected, a green field
select rectangle = field selected.
KV Voltage (kV) Selects the default kV.
MA Current (mA) Selects the default mA.
MS Time (ms) Selects the default ms.
DENSITY Density Selects the default density.
If the image receptor defaults are changed, please record the original defaults in a copy of the
following table:
IMAGE RECEPTOR DEFAULT SETTINGS

FUNCTION RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM
SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER
FIELD
RIGHT
FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN *RECEPTOR SETUP DEFAULTS*
MENUS 4 AND 5. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR SETUP PARAMETERS
NOT TO BE SAVED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE FIRST RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING BE
COMPLETED, THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENUS BE EXITED TO THE GEN CONFIGURATION
MENU, THEN THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENU BE RESELECTED TO PROGRAM THE NEXT
RECEPTOR. THE ABOVE SHOULD BE REPEATED UNTIL ALL RECEPTORS ARE
PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT THE UPDATED PARAMETERS ARE SAVED.
Use these steps to set up the receptor parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.

RECEPTOR SETUP.
toolbar to access the Receptor Setup utility.
2. Select the Receptor Properties tab.
3. Select the first receptor to be programmed. Select the first receptor to be programmed.
4. Select TUBE. Toggle the button to select NONE Check the Receptor Enable checkbox to
or 1. enable the selected receptor.
5. Select RECEPTOR SYM. Use the + or –
buttons to select the desired receptor symbol.
6. Select MEMORY. Toggle the button to select Under Memory, select off, on, or default.
NO, YES, or DEF.
7. Select TOMO. Toggle the button to select YES Check the Tomo checkbox to enable
or NO. tomographic operation.
8. Select TOMO BUT. Use the + or – buttons to Select the desired tomo backup time via the
select the desired tomo backup time. Tomo Back-up Time (ms) dialog box.
9. Select INTERFACE OPTS: Use the + or – Select the desired interface option via the
buttons to select the desired interface option. Interface Options dialog box.
10. Select the desired functional option via the
Functional Options dialog box.
11. Press >>.
12. Select SF/LF SWITCH. Toggle the button to This function is not available in GenWare®
select AUTO or MAN.
13. Select the AEC tab.
14. Select AEC BACKUP. Toggle the button to Under AEC Back-up Mode, select Fixed, mAs,
select FIXED, MAS, or MS. or ms.
15. Select AEC BACKUP MAS. Use the + or – Select the maximum backup mAs via the AEC
buttons to select the maximum backup mAs. Backup mAs dialog box.
16. Select AEC BACKUP MS. Use the + or – Select the maximum backup ms via the AEC
buttons to select the maximum backup ms. Backup ms dialog box.

17. Select AEC CHANNEL. Use the + or – buttons Select the AEC channel to be assigned to the
to assign the desired AEC channel to the selected receptor, or disable AEC operation on
selected receptor, or to disable AEC operation that receptor via the AEC Channel dialog box.
on that receptor.
18. Press >>. Select the Receptor Properties tab.
19. Select RAD HANG. Use the + or – buttons to Select the desired rad hangover time via the
select the desired rad hangover time. Rad Hangover (s) dialog box.
20. Select FUNCTIONAL OPTS: Use the + or –
buttons to select the desired functional option.
The following steps only apply if MEMORY in step 6 was set to DEF / default.
21. Select DEFAULTS. This is on page 2 of the Select the Receptor Defaults tab.
RECEPTOR SETUP menus.
22. Select TECHNIQUE. Toggle the button to select Under Technique, select ms, mAs, or AEC.
MA, MAS, or AEC.
23. Select FOCUS. Toggle the button to select Under Focus, select Small or Large. Micro
SMALL or LARGE. focus is not available at this time.
24. Select FILM SCREEN. Toggle the button to Under Film Screen, select I, II, or III.
select 1, 2, or 3.
25. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to select Select the left field on the graphic under Fields
YES or NO. to select / deselect that field. Blue indicates that
the field is not selected; green indicates that the
field is selected.
26. Repeat the previous step for the CENTER and Repeat the previous step for the center and
RIGHT fields. right fields.
27. Press >>.
28. Select KV, MA, MS, and DENSITY. Use the + Select the default kV, mA, ms, and density via
or – buttons to select the default kV, mA, ms, the Voltage (kV), Current (mA), Time (ms),
and density, respectively. and Density (s) dialog boxes, respectively.
29. Press << and EXIT as required to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
30. Repeat steps 1 to 29 for the remaining
receptors. It is necessary to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu after programming
each receptor to ensure that the updated
parameters are saved to memory.
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration
The I/O CONFIGURATION function allows programming the states of the exposure for the inputs and the
outputs on the room interface board.
The I/O CONFIGURATION menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* INPUTS [sym] *
TUBE THERMAL SW. ____ STANDBY STATE
DOOR ITLK: ____
EXIT >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
INTERLOCK 1: ____ STANDBY STATE
INTERLOCK 2: ____
BUCKY 1 RDY: ____
BUCKY 2 RDY: ____
<< ⇑ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
BUCKY 1 START: ____ STANDBY STATE
BUCKY 2 START: ____
ROOM LIGHT: ____
<< ⇑ >>
3C.7.4 I/O Configuration (Cont)
Figure 3C-14: Receptor Setup window, Inputs tab
Figure 3C-15: Receptor Setup window, Outputs tab
Definitions of I/O CONFIGURATION menu items.

CONSOLE)
TUBE THERMAL Tube Thermal Programs the thermal switch input at J7-1 and J7-2 on the H.V.
SW Switch auxiliary board.
DOOR ITLK Room Door Programs the door interlock input at J4-9 and J4-10 on the H.V.
Interlock auxiliary board.
INTERLOCK 1 Interlock 1 Programs the interlock #1 input at J2-3 and J2-4 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.

CONSOLE)
INTERLOCK 2 Interlock 2 Programs the interlock #2 input at J2-1 and J2-2 on the H.V.
auxiliary board. This is the tomo exposure input for any receptor
that is assigned to tomo operation.
BUCKY 1 RDY Bucky 1 Ready Programs the Bucky 1 input at J2-5 and J2-6 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
BUCKY 2 RDY Bucky 2 Ready Programs the Bucky 2 input at J4-5 and J4-6 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
BKY 1 START Bucky 1 Start Programs the Bucky 1 “start” output at J2-7 on the H.V. auxiliary
board.
BKY 2 START Bucky 2 Start Programs the Bucky 2 “start” output at J4-1 on the H.V. auxiliary
board. This is normally programmed as the tomo output.
ROOM LIGHT Room Light Programs the room light output at J11-3 and J11-4 on the H.V.
auxiliary board.
The inputs and outputs defined in the previous table are programmable as follows:
• Inputs may be programmed such that the selected input is active or inactive during various states of the
generator. Inactive inputs are ignored; unused inputs should normally be programmed to be inactive.
• Outputs may be programmed such that the relay connected to the selected output is energized or de-
energized during various states of the generator. Unused outputs should normally be programmed to be
de-energized.
• The inputs and outputs must be programmed separately for each receptor. Each receptor may have its
own unique programming.
MEMBRANE CONSOLE
The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The word STATE is
preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to the current level for the selected state. Moving to the next
state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:
• STANDBY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator is in standby or idle mode.
• PREP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator enters PREP mode.
• GEN RDY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator has completed PREP mode and is
ready to expose.
• RAD EXP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a radiographic exposure.
Pressing the button next to the selected input or output on the left of the display selects that function. The level
of the selected state is changed by pressing the selection button again (low = off / inactive, high = on / active).
For inputs, setting the level “low” means that the input is ignored during that state. Setting the level
“high” requires that the corresponding input is satisfied before the generator will advance to that state. For
example, if the door interlock (DOOR ITLK) is set to logic “low” for all states, then an X-ray exposure may be
made without a door interlock closure.
Setting an output level “low” causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized during the
selected state. Setting the level “high” will cause the associated relay to be energized during the selected
state. For example, the Bucky 1 “start” output will be disabled if BKY 1 START is set to “low” for all states.
The example below shows a TYPICAL input configuration.
1 2 3 4
TUBE THERMAL SW.
1 = STANDBY STATE (shown low/inactive)
2 = PREP STATE (shown high/active)
3 = GEN RDY STATE (shown high/active)
4 = RAD EXP STATE (shown high/active)
CMP200_I-O.CDR
Figure 3C-16: Example of input states
GenWare®
On the Inputs and Outputs tabs, the generator states are shown above the vertical grey / white bars. For
inputs, grey indicates states where the input cannot be programmed. Only states that are shown in white can
be changed. Outputs are programmable for each of the four generator states.
The logic level of the selected state is changed by clicking in the desired state column, to the right of the
selected input or output (unchecked = off / inactive, checked = on / active).
For inputs, an unchecked state means that the input is ignored during that state. A checked state
(marked with an X) requires that the corresponding input be satisfied before the generator will advance to that
state.
For outputs, an unchecked state causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. A checked state (marked with an X) will cause the associated relay to be energized
during the selected state.
Use these steps for programming the I/O functions. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.

1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select From the Receptor Setup window, select the
I/O CONFIGURATION. Inputs tab.
2. Select the first receptor to be programmed. Select the first receptor to be programmed. Use
the Receptor buttons on the Receptor window.

3. Press the STATE button to select the first state For the Tube Thermal Switch input, identify the
that can be programmed for the TUBE first state that can be programmed. This is the
THERMAL SW. input. This is the STANDBY Standby state.
state. Enable or disable the Tube Thermal Switch
Toggle the TUBE THERMAL SW. button to input during the standby state by checking (with
select the desired logic level (low or high) to an X), or unchecking the Standby column to the
disable or enable that input during the standby right of Tube Thermal Switch.
state.
4. Repeat the previous step for each state. Repeat the previous step for each state.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each input. Use the >> Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each input.
button to advance to INPUTS menu 2.
6. Press >> to select the OUTPUTS menu. Select the Outputs tab.
7. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program each output. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to program each output.
An unchecked state causes the relay connected
to that output to be de-energized during the
selected state. A checked state (with an X) will
result in the relay being energized during the
selected state.
8. When finished the I/O programming for the Select Apply to save the programming for the
current receptor, exit to the GEN current receptor.
CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, and then Select the next receptor to be programmed. Use
select the next receptor to be programmed. the Receptor buttons on the Receptor Setup
window.
10. Program all inputs and outputs for the selected receptor.
11. When finished programming all receptors, exit Select Close to exit the receptor setup utility.
to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
The input and output programming should be recorded in a copy of the table below. This will provide a record
of the I/O configuration for future reference.
FUNCTIONS STANDBY PREP GEN RDY RAD EXP
INPUTS
TUBE THERMAL SW.
DOOR ITLK.
INTERLOCK 1
INTERLOCK 2
BUCKY 1 RDY
BUCKY 2 RDY
OUTPUTS
BKY 1 START
BKY 2 START
ROOM LIGHT
3C.7.5 AEC Setup
The AEC SETUP menus allow programming of AEC parameters for each AEC channel.
The AEC SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
MENU 1
* AEC SETUP*
CHANNEL: 1 CHAMBER TYPE: ION
LEFT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 1 : YES
CENTER FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 2 : YES
RIGHT FIELD: YES FILM SCREEN 3 : YES
EXIT >>
MENU 2. Do not adjust these values at this time.

* AEC SETUP*
R FIELD COMP: 0
C FIELD COMP: 0
L FIELD COMP: 0 +
-
<<
Figure 3C-17: AEC Setup & Calibration window, AEC Setup tab
3C.7.5 AEC Setup (Cont)
Note the following regarding GenWare® figure 3C-17:

• The AEC Channel display in the top right corner of the AEC Setup & Calibration window shows
the selected AEC channel.
• The Progr. Receptors display below the AEC channel display shows which receptors are
programmed for the selected AEC channel.
Definitions of AEC SETUP menu items applicable to the initial AEC setup.
CONSOLE)
CHANNEL Channel Number Selects the AEC channel to be programmed.
LEFT FIELD A graphic Enables or disables the ability to select the left, center, or right
depicting the AEC AEC fields.
CENTER FIELD
chamber fields. Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD
YES: The selected field is enabled.
NO: The selected field is disabled.
GenWare®:
Refer to the graphic under Fields:
A blue field select rectangle = field not selected, a green field
select rectangle = field selected.
CHAMBER TYPE Chamber Type Selects the AEC chamber type.
Membrane console:
ION: Ion chamber.
S/S: Solid-state chamber.
APL: Apelem.
GenWare®:
Ion: Ion chamber.
Solid Solid-state chamber.
State:
Apelem: Apelem.
FILM SCREEN 1 Film Screen Enables or disables the ability to select film screen 1, film
Active screen 2, or film screen 3.
FILM SCREEN 2
Membrane console:
FILM SCREEN 3
YES: The selected film screen is enabled.
NO: The selected film screen is disabled.
GenWare®:
Checking 1, 2, or 3 under Film Screen Active enables that film
screen.

CONSOLE)
R FIELD COMP R. Field Comp Allows left, center, and right field balance. This applies to solid-
state AEC chambers only. The calibration procedure is
C FIELD COMP C. Field Comp described in the section AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY
L FIELD COMP L. Field Comp in chapter 3D.
Use these steps to perform the initial AEC setup. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
AEC SETUP.
toolbar to access the AEC Setup and
Calibration utility.
2. Select the AEC Setup tab.
3. From AEC SETUP menu 1, select the AEC Under Channel Number, select the AEC
channel to be programmed. Pressing the channel that is to be programmed.
CHANNEL button will scroll through the
available AEC channels.
4. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to select Select the left field on the graphic under Fields
YES or NO. to enable / disable that field. Blue indicates that
the selected field is disabled; green indicates
that the selected field is enabled.
5. Repeat the above for the CENTER and RIGHT Repeat the above for the center and right fields.
fields.
6. Select CHAMBER TYPE. Use the + or – Under Chamber Type, select the desired AEC
buttons to select the desired AEC chamber chamber type.
type.
Select ION if using solid state AEC board assembly 737992.
7. Select the Film Screen options tab.
8. Select FILM SCREEN 1. Toggle the button to Under Film Screen Active, select film screen 1.
select YES or NO. An X in the check box indicates that film screen
1 is enabled.
9. Repeat the above for FILM SCREEN 2 and Repeat the above for film screen 2 and film
FILM SCREEN 3. screen 3.
10. Press >>. Select the AEC setup tab.
11. Select R FIELD COMP. Use the + or – buttons Under Field Compensation, set the R. Field
to enter the value 0%. This may be optimized in Comp value to 0. This may be optimized in a
a later step if using a solid-state AEC chamber. later step if using a solid-state AEC chamber.
12. Repeat the above for C FIELD COMP and L Repeat the above for C. Field Comp and L.
FIELD COMP Field Comp.
13. Repeat the applicable steps in this section for Repeat the applicable steps in this section for
the remaining AEC channels. the remaining AEC channels.
14. Select Apply to save programming changes to
the generator.

15. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the Select Close to exit the AEC setup and
GEN CONFIGURATION menu. calibration utility.
3C.7.6 AEC Calibration
Refer to chapter 3D.
3C.7.7 Tube Calibration
Before beginning tube auto calibration, the tube used in this installation must be properly selected, and the
generator limits should be programmed, as described earlier in this chapter.
It is recommended that the tube be conditioned (seasoned) during tube auto calibration, particularly if
the tube has not been used for some time. Refer to chapter 6.
WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
CAUTION: ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.
Use these steps to perform the tube auto calibration.

1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select
GEN CONFIGURATION.
Select the button on the GenWare
toolbar to access the Tube Calibration utility.
2. Select TUBE CALIBRATION.
3. Select FOCAL SPOT. Toggle the button to Under Focus, select the desired focal spot to
select the desired focal spot to calibrate calibrate (small or large).
(SMALL or LARGE). Start with small.
Start with SMALL.
4. Press and hold the X-RAY button (or use the Press and hold the X-RAY button (or use the
optional hand switch) to begin the calibration optional hand switch) to begin the calibration
procedure. procedure.
5. When finished calibrating the small focus, press Repeat the calibration on the large focal spot.
RETURN and then repeat calibration on the
large focal spot.
6. When auto-calibration is completed, press EXIT
to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
7. Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the setup and
calibration mode and return to the normal
operation mode.
3C.7.7 Tube Calibration (Cont)
NOTE: SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL BE
DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE RANGE
IN WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF THE
GENERATOR.
3C.8.0 VALIDATE APR
The APR validator checks each APR entry to confirm that none of the requested parameters exceed the
generator or tube limits. The APR validator will also check that the requested functions(s) within each APR are
enabled. Invalid APR’s may result due to GenWare® downloads - as APR’s are not validated within
GenWare® - or previously valid APR’s may become invalid if generator limits or setup parameters are
subsequently changed.
Invalid parameters and techniques may be corrected after the APR validator has completed its
validation checks.
NOTE: The APR validator is not available if CM thickness mode is enabled. If the APR validator is
selected with CM thickness mode turned on, a message will be displayed indicating that CM
thickness mode is currently not supported by the APR validator.

Use these steps to perform the APR validation.
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select VALIDATE APR. This accesses the main APR
VALIDATOR screen, shown below.
2. Pressing EXIT at any time that this button is available will return to the GENERATOR SETUP
menu.
Main APR validator screen

P: 0% T: F:
*APR VALIDATOR*
EXIT START
3C.8.0 VALIDATE APR (Cont)

3. Press START to start the APR validator. The APR validation process will start.
While the APR validator is running:
• The name of each anatomical view being validated and the associated patient size will flash at
the bottom of the APR validator screen along with its programmed parameters and
techniques.
• The console LED’s will light to indicate which image receptors and techniques are associated
with the APR that is currently being validated.
• Failed APR’s will be listed near the top of the APR validator screen. A maximum of four failed
APR’s will be displayed at one time.
4. Pressing STOP while the APR validator is running will stop the APR validation.
5. While the APR validator is running or after it is finished or was stopped:
• P indicates percent completion. This will continuously update while the APR validator is
running. The APR validation is finished when this indicates 100%.
If the APR validator is stopped before it has finished, this will display the percent completion at
the time the APR validator was stopped.
• T shows the number of APR’s that have been validated. This will continuously update while
the APR validator is running. If the APR validator is stopped before it has finished, this will
display the number of APR’s that were validated at the time the APR validator was stopped.
• F shows the number of APR’s that failed. This will continuously update while the APR
validator is running. If the APR validator is stopped before it has finished, this will display the
number of APR’s that failed at the time the APR validator was stopped.
When the APR validator has finished running

P: 100% T: 376 F: 46 [ 0 – 46 ]
*APR VALIDATOR*
HIP LATERAL 202 GEN. KW LIMIT
VIEW #1 49 NOT ENABLED

17ms
kVp: 77 mAs: 5.6

EXIT

6. The view above shows the APR validator screen when the APR validator has finished running.
• The percent completion is shown as 100%.
• 376 APR’s have been validated.
• 46 APR’s have failed.
7. The console will first validate all APR’s that use the large focus (receptor 1), then small focus
(receptor 1). Next will be large focus (receptor 2), then small focus (receptor 2), etc until all APR’s
associated with all image receptors are exhausted.

8. The display at the top right of the LCD display (0 – 46 in the example) denotes the following:
• The first number (0) indicates the number of APR items above the visible list on the current
display. In the example above there are 0 items above the visible list, meaning that the list of
failed APR’s is at the top of the page.
• The second number (46) refers to the number of failed APR’s that are below the top of the
page. In the example above 46 items are below the top of the list. Four failed APR’s are
shown, therefore there are another 42 listings that are not shown.
Scrolling up or down as described in the next step will show the failed APR’s that are not
displayed in the current list.
9. To scroll up and down the list of failed APR’s, if there are more than four items listed:
• To scroll up in the list, press the soft key button [7].
• To scroll down in the list, press the soft key button [8].
Refer to the figure Programming / calibration mode reference near the front of this chapter for
the location of the referenced buttons.
10. To edit a failed APR:
• Select the APR to be edited using the adjacent soft key button [1] to [4] per the figure
Programming / calibration mode reference near the front of this chapter. The selected APR
will be highlighted in PREVIEW MODE as per the figure below.
• The parameters and techniques that are currently requested by the selected APR will be
shown (63 kV, 320 mA, 1280 mAs, 100 ms in the example below). The anatomical region that
is the parent of the selected anatomical view is displayed at the top left of the LCD display.
• Select EDIT to edit the selected APR.
To edit a failed APR

UPPER EXT EDIT [ 0 – 46 ]
*APR VALIDATOR*

100ms
kVp: 63 mA: 320 mAs: 1280

EXIT PREVIEW MODE

11. In EDIT mode (the console will be in EDIT mode after the EDIT button is pressed).
• The console will attempt to change the value(s) that caused the APR validation to fail. For
example, if the generator is set to maximum mA = 200 mA and the selected APR is requesting
360 mA, the console will then reduce the maximum mA to under 200 mA.
• Another example of a failed APR is an anatomical view that is programmed for AEC. If the
APR is programmed to select an image receptor that has AEC channel 0 assigned to it (no
AEC), then the APR validator will display the error message 49 NOT ENABLED. In this case,
either the selected receptor must be programmed for AEC or the APR must be reprogrammed
such that it does not select AEC.
• Select SAVE if the revised parameters and techniques are acceptable. The message
SAVING APR DATA… will be briefly displayed. Do not turn the power off while the data is
being saved, as doing so will corrupt the entire APR database.
• APR’s that have been fixed will be removed from the list of failed APR’s.
• The console will validate the remaining patient sizes within the same anatomical view after
each save. These will also be removed from the list of failed APR’s if applicable.
• To exit the EDIT mode without making any changes, press one of the soft key buttons [1] to
[4] that is associated with a failed APR.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 to edit the remaining APR’s.
3C.9.0 DAP PRINTER SETUP
1. Connect the DAP printer to the DATA LINK connector J4 on the rear of the console. Refer to the figure
“Rear of control console” in chapter 2 of the CMP 200® service manual for the connector location.
2. Follow the procedure in 3C.11.2 to set up and test the DAP printer.
NOTE: THE GENERATOR MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE SPECIFIC PRINTER (SEIKO
INSTRUMENTS DPU-414 OR SLP-200 PRINTER). THE GENERATOR WILL BE COMPATIBLE
ONLY WITH THE SELECTED PRINTER, THEREFORE ONLY THAT PRINTER MODEL MUST BE
USED IN THIS INSTALLATION.
NOTE: THE PAPER OR LABELS USED IN THE PRINTER MUST MEET ALL APPLICABLE
REGULATIONS. MEDICAL GRADE PAPER OR LABELS, APPROVED FOR MEDICAL
RECORDS, MUST NORMALLY BE USED.
3C.10.0 DAP INTERFACING
3C.10.1 DAP Compatibility
The MAGNUM C® series generator, when equipped with the DAP option, is compatible with the DAP devices
listed in the table in section 3C.11.2. The correct DAP device must be selected in the DAP SETUP menu as
described in 3C.11.2 in order to ensure device compatibility.
The DAP chamber, when fitted with the proper interconnect cable, plugs directly into the generator control
board in the generator. When ordering the DAP chamber from the DAP manufacturer, specify the CPI
compatible interconnect cable, if available. This is a special cable terminated with a 9-pin male “D” connector
that is designed to plug directly into the generator control board. If this cable is not available from the DAP
device manufacturer, consult APELEM-DMS Group product support for the required cable to connect the DAP
chamber to the generator. Refer to the table below for the APELEM-DMS Group cable assembly part numbers.
DAP DEVICE INTERCONNECT CABLE

PTW: PX-T11020. 736145-00.
Gammex-RMI: 841S. 736146-00.
VacuTec: VacuDAP 2004. Contact VacuTEC for this cable assembly.
Scanditronix (IBA): 120-131, 120-131HS. 736148-00.
3C.10.2 DAP Installation
1. Switch OFF the AC line voltage to the generator at the main disconnect switch. Allow sufficient time for
all capacitors in the generator to discharge.
2. Install the DAP chamber as per the manufacturers instructions. The interconnect cable to the
generator must be as per 3C.10.1.
3. Route the DAP interconnect cable through one of the access slots at the upper rear of the generator,
and then route the cables toward the generator control board. Secure the cable to the lip on the inside
of the cable access slot using tie wraps or equivalent fasteners.
4. Plug the DAP cable into J4 on the generator control board. Tighten the screw locks on the connectors
to secure the cables.
5. Set JW14 (near J4) on the generator control board as per the following table
Scanditronix (IBA) All Others
DAP Chamber Jumper pins 1-2 Jumper pins 2-3
6. Proceed with DAP setup and calibration as per the remainder of this procedure.
3C.11.0 DAP SETUP
3C.11.1 DAP SETUP Menu
The DAP SETUP menus allow setup and calibration of the DAP device.
The DAP SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
MENU 1: DAP SETUP

DAP
* DAP SETUP *
DAP: ON TEST VALUE 1: 300
DEVICE TYPE 1: 7 +
CAL. VALUE 1: 1.00 -
2
0.0mGycm
<< >>
3C.11.1 DAP SETUP Menu (Cont)
MENU 2: DAP SETUP

DAP
* DAP SETUP *
ACC ALARM (mGycm2) 2000 +

DAP PRINTER: DPU414 -
2
0.0mGycm
<<
MENU 3: DAP RESET / TEST / PRINT

EXIT
DAP = 0.0mGycm2
+
PRINT -
RESET TEST
Figure 3C-18: DAP Setup window
3C.11.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items
Definitions of DAP SETUP menu items.

CONSOLE)
DAP DAP State Enables or disables the DAP device.
checkbox Membrane console:
ON: The DAP function is enabled.
OFF: The DAP function is disabled.
In GenWare®, the DAP function is enabled or disabled via the

DAP State checkbox.
DEVICE TYPE 1 DAP Device Type Selects the DAP device. Types 0 to 3 are standard resolution
1 DAP chambers, and types 4 to 7 are high-resolution DAP
chambers.
0 = PTW PX-T11020.
1 = Gammex RMI 841S.
2 = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004.
3 = Scanditronix (IBA) 120-131.
4 = Not assigned at this time.
7 = Scanditronix (IBA) 120-131HS.
CAL. VALUE 1 Calibration Value Allows the DAP reading to be calibrated by adjusting this
parameter.
TEST VALUE 1 Test Value 1 A numeric value, supplied by the DAP device manufacturer, that
represents the number of pulses generated by the DAP device
during TEST mode. Typical terms used by DAP device
manufacturers for this function are “Test Pulses”, “Test Value”,
or “Test Count”, but other names may be used.
The generator counts the number of pulses generated by the
DAP device during TEST mode, and reports a DAP failure error
message if the actual number of test pulses are not the same as
the manufacturer-supplied test count, within an allowable margin
of error.
ACC ALARM DAP Accum Sets the alarm level for accumulated DAP. The console will
(mGycm2) Alarm (mGycm2) present an audible alarm and a visual warning via the LCD
display when the accumulated dose exceeds this limit.
This displays units of mGycm2 regardless of the DAP UNITS
setting in the CONSOLE utilities. A units conversion will need to
be done if DAP UNITS is set to display μGym2, where 0.1
μGym2 = 1 mGycm2 i.e. 200 μGym2 = 2000 mGycm2.
3C.11.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items (Cont)

CONSOLE)
DAP PRINTER DAP Printer Allows selection of the DAP printer type, or disabling of the DAP
printer function. This is only available with the DAP printer
option.
OFF: Disables the DAP printer function.
DPU414: Selects the Seiko Instruments DPU-414
printer.
SLP200: Selects the Seiko Instruments SLP-200 printer.
DAP MEMBRANE CONSOLE ONLY: Allows access to a submenu used to reset the DAP
display, test the DAP device, and print a test label. This selection is available in the
DAP SETUP menus when the DAP function is ON.
PRINT This function is Prints a DAP label. The printer will print the date and time near
not available in the top of the label, and the accumulated Dose-Area Product
GenWare® (μGym2 or mGycm2) near the middle of the label. This
information is retrieved from the generator at the time the label
is printed. Several headings are also printed on the labels; the
corresponding patient information must be manually entered.
RESET Reset Resets the DAP display to zero.
TEST Test Tests the DAP circuits by counting the number of test pulses
(refer to TEST VALUE 1, above). A pass / fail message will be
displayed after the DAP test and the actual number of test
pulses counted will be also be displayed.
Use these steps to set up the DAP device. DAP calibration is done after DAP setup.
DAP SETUP.
toolbar to access the DAP Setup utility.
2. From DAP SETUP menu 1, select DAP. Toggle Check the DAP State checkbox to enable the
the button to select ON or OFF. DAP function.
The DAP device must be enabled if you want to The DAP device must be enabled if you want to
continue. continue.
3. Select DEVICE TYPE 1. Use the + or – buttons Select the desired DAP device via the DAP
to select the desired DAP device. Device Type 1 dialog box.
4. Select TEST VALUE 1. Use the + or – buttons Select the test value for DAP device 1 via the
to enter the test value for DAP device 1. Test Value 1 dialog box.
5. Press >>.
6. Select DAP PRINTER. Toggle the selection Select the desired printer via the DAP Printer
button to select OFF, DPU414, or SLP200. dialog box.
7. Select ACC ALARM (mGycm2). Use the + or – Select the maximum permissible accumulated
buttons to set the maximum permissible DAP alarm point via the DAP Accum Alarm
accumulated DAP alarm point. (mGycm2) dialog box.
8. Press DAP to access the DAP RESET, TEST, When DAP is enabled, the accumulated DAP
and PRINT functions. value will be displayed near the bottom of
GenWare®, along with the Reset and Test
buttons.
9. Press RESET to reset the DAP display to zero. Select Reset to reset the DAP display to zero.
10. Press TEST to test the DAP system. This will Select Test to test the DAP system. This will
test the DAP chamber and DAP circuits. test the DAP chamber and DAP circuits.
11. Press PRINT to print a DAP label.
12. Press EXIT to return to the DAP SETUP menu.
3C.12.0 DAP CALIBRATION
The DAP device must be calibrated before use, and the calibration must be periodically checked as per the
DAP device manufacturers requirements, or as per local regulations.
3C12.1 Equipment Required
The following equipment is required for DAP calibration.

• An X-ray cassette and film. The speed of the film / screen is not relevant, as the film is only used to
determine the area that is irradiated at the dose-measurement plane.
An X-ray cassette and film is the preferred method to measure the irradiated area, but if this is not readily
available, for example if this is a digital only system, a procedure is given to determine the required area
using the imaging system.
• A film processor to develop the film, if required.
• A calibrated dosimeter.
• A ruler or tape measure with centimeter markings. This will be needed to measure the exposed area of the
film. If measuring in inches, use a calculator and multiply inches by 2.54 to obtain the measurement in
centimeters.
3C.12.2 DAP Calibration Overview
The first step involved in calibrating the DAP meter in the generator is to carefully make a dose measurement
at a given distance from the X-ray source. The next step is to expose a test film at the same distance from the
X-ray source as the dose measurement that was just made.
The dose-area product is calculated by multiplying the measured dose, in mGy, by the exposed area of the
film, in cm2. This gives the actual dose-area product, in mGycm2.
After the reference dose-area product is determined as described above, it is compared to the DAP reading as
measured by the generator. Adjustments are made to the CAL. VALUE 1 parameter in the DAP SETUP menu
such that the console’s DAP display corresponds to the calculated dose-area product. This procedure may
need to be repeated several times until the required accuracy is obtained.
The reason the DAP device (a specialized ion chamber) is able to accurately measure the dose-area product
at its location at the bottom of the collimator is that although the radiation level falls off at a rate inversely
proportional to the square of the distance from the source, the irradiated area increases as the square of the
distance from the source. For example, by doubling the distance, the dose falls to (½)2 = ¼ of the previous
dose BUT the area increases to 22 = 4 times the area. Therefore, the dose-area product will remain constant
at a given distance from the source. This is also the reason that care must be taken to ensure that the area
measurement is done at the same distance from the X-ray source as the dose measurement.
3C.12.3 DAP Calibration Procedure
CTM
TUBE 1
DAP chamber 1
70 cm
Dosimeter plane and film plane

20 cm
DAP chamber 2
TUBE 2
TYPICAL SETUP FOR DAP CALIBRATION

FILE: DAP.CDR
Figure 3C-19: DAP setup
3C.12.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
Use these steps to calibrate the DAP meter(s) in the generator.

Step Action
1. Set up the dosimeter as per figure 3C-19. The probe should be centered relative to the
central ray from the X-ray tube, and sufficiently far off the tabletop to minimize scatter
radiation. Do not use any absorber during this procedure.
2. Open the collimator such that the field size at the location of the probe is approximately 12
cm X 12 cm. Ensure that the probe is fully irradiated.
3. Enter the DAP SETUP menu.
4. Set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20 ms.
5. Press DAP to access the RESET / TEST /PRINT menu, then press RESET to reset the DAP
display to zero. The DAP will reset to zero, then the generator will return to the DAP SETUP
menu.
6. Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Record the mR or mGy value
in a copy of table 3C-4. Convert the mR value to mGy, if necessary.
7. Note the DAP value as displayed on the console, and record the value in a copy of table 3C-
4.
8. Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film if available. The film plane must be at
the same location as the dosimeter was in step 8.
If using an image sensor such as an I.I., or flat panel, or other non-film image sensor, the
image pickup plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 8.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS STEP CANNOT BE OVERSTATED: THE IRRADIATED
AREA MEASUREMENT MUST BE MADE AT A POINT THAT IS THE SAME DISTANCE
FROM THE X-RAY SOURCE AS THE DOSE WAS MEASURED AT.
9. Ensure that the collimator field at the measurement plane is smaller than the active area of
the image pick-up device (film, I.I., or other). Refer to figure 3C-20.
Do not readjust the collimator from the setting that was used in step 8.
10. Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 6.
11. Develop the film (if used).
12. Measure the irradiated image area. For film, measure the length and width of the exposed
area, and record the results in table 3C-4. Refer to figure 3C-20.
If using a digital imaging system, some systems have a cursor available that allows
measurement of the length and width of the area in question. If the digital imaging system
does not allow image size measurement, it is suggested that an X-ray opaque item of known
dimensions be placed at the image plane. (A collimator test tool would be useful in this
application). The length and width of the irradiated area can then be extrapolated by
comparison to the size of the reference object. Record the length and width of the irradiated
area at the measurement plane in table 3C-4.
13. Calculate the irradiated image area, in cm2. Use the length and width recorded in table 3C-4.
14. Calculate the dose-area product by multiplying the area from table 3C-4 X the dose in mGy
from table 3C-4. Record the resulting value at step 3 in table 3C-4.
15. Calculate the percentage error between the manually calculated DAP measurement (table
3C-4, step 3) and the measured DAP value (table 3C-4, step 4). Record the percentage
error in step 5 of the table.
16. If the displayed DAP reading does not meet the required accuracy, increase or decrease
CAL. VALUE 1 (membrane console) or Calibration Value (DAP Device Type 1) for
GenWare® by the same percentage as the percentage error.
17. Repeat steps 7 to 16 until the required accuracy is obtained. Make as many copies of table
3C-4 as required to record the results from all required iterations.
3C.12.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
X-RAY CASSETTE
13.2
EXPOSED 13.6
AREA
ILLUMINATED DEVELOPED FILM

COLLIMATOR
FIELD
Figure 3C-20: Irradiated area vs. available image area
3C.12.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet
STEP ACTION RESULT
1. Measured dose: _____________ mR
Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X

0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. _____________ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length _____________ Length (cm)
X Width).
_____________ Width (cm)
Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).

_____________ Area (cm2)
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step

2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in _____________DAP (mGycm2)
mGycm2.
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console. _____________DAP (mGycm2)
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at _____________ % error

the end of this section.
THIS TABLE IS REPEATED BELOW FOR THE SECOND ITERATION OF THE DAP CALIBRATION.
STEP ACTION RESULT
1. Measured dose: _____________ mR

0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. _____________ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length _____________ Length (cm)
X Width).
_____________ Width (cm)

_____________ Area (cm2)
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step

2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in _____________DAP (mGycm2)
mGycm2.
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console. _____________DAP (mGycm2)
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at _____________ % error

the end of this section.
Table 3C-4: DAP worksheets
3C.12.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet (Cont)
Refer to the sample DAP worksheet below:
STEP ACTION RESULT
1. Measured dose: ____23.3_____ mR

0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy. ____0.203____ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length X ____13.6_____ Length (cm)
Width).
____13.2_____ Width (cm)

___179.52____ Area (cm2)
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step 2).
This will yield the actual dose-area product, in mGycm2. ____36.44____ DAP (mGycm2)
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console. ____40_______ DAP (mGycm2)
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at the ____-8.9______ % error
end of this section.
Sample percentage error calculation (step 5):
(36.44 - 40) -3.56

X 100 = X 100 = -8.9 %
40 40
3C.13.0 DATA LINK (Connect to GenWare®)
This is used with the GenWare® MP (PC) utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer
in order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, perform setup and calibration
functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included with GenWare® MP (PC).
A computer (i.e. a laptop) and a 9-pin null-modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends are
required to connect the computer to the generator in order to run GenWare®.
• Connect the null-modem cable from a serial port on the computer with GenWare® to the DATA LINK
connector on the rear of the control console. Refer to the figure “Rear of control console” in chapter 2 for
the location of this connector.
• From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select DATA LINK, and then select CONNECT TO GENWARE. A
DATA LINK submenu will open, indicating WAITING FOR DATA... PLEASE DO NOT TURN OFF
POWER.
• Switch on the computer and start GenWare®.
• GenWare® is ready for use when communication is established with the generator.
If the data link connector is not available, i.e. on units without a APELEM-DMS Group supplied console, J21 on
the generator control board may be used.
NOTE: GenWare® MP (PC) should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console. Failure to
do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to re-initialize
communication with the generator.
3C.14.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION BACKUP AND RESTORE
This is used with the GenWare® MP (PC) utility software. This allows the generator configuration (ie.
receptor setup, AEC setup and calibration, etc) to be stored on a PC hard drive or other external memory
device (ie. USB flash drive).
To back up the generator configuration.

Step Action
1. Launch the GenWare® MP (PC) utility software.
2.
Select the button. This will open the standard Windows Save As window.
3. Enter a file name and select a location to save the file and click Save. A progress bar will indicate
the percentage of the back up complete.
4. Record the file name and location for future reference or the event the generator configuration
needs to be restored.
3C.14.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION BACKUP AND RESTORE (Cont)
To restore a generator configuration

Step Action
2.
Select the button. This will open the standard Windows Open window.
3. Locate and select the desired backup file.
4. Select Open. A progress bar will show the percentage of the configuration file restored.
3C.15.0 LICENSE KEY SETUP
This is used with the GenWare® MP utility software. This allows for additional features to be activated in the
generator software.
Step Action
1. Launch the GenWare® MP utility software.
2.
Select the button from the toolbar on the top of the screen. This will open the Generator
License Key Setup window. Refer to figure 3C-21.
3. Note the System ID (this will be a sixteen character string) and communicate it to CPI (via email or
phone). The System ID will belong to the generator in which GenWare® MP is connected at the
time the System ID is read.
4. CPI will provide a new license key (this will be a sixteen character string). Enter this string into the
dialog boxes to the right of License Key. The characters are not case-sensitive. For the PC
version of GenWare® MP use a regular keyboard to enter the License key. For the touchscreen
version of GenWare® MP use the on-screen keyboard to enter the License key.
5. Select Apply to program the new license key into the generator. Note: all characters MUST be
entered to enable the Apply button.
6. Select Close to exit.
3C.15.0 LICENSE KEY SETUP (Cont)
Figure 3C-21: Generator License Key Setup window
3C.16.0 MONOCHROME DISPLAY
This is used with the GenWare® MP (PC) utility software. This allows for the display to be toggled between
monochrome and full color.
Step Action
2.
Select the button from the toolbar on the top of the screen. This will open the Display
Options window. Refer to figure 3C-22.
3. Select the Monochrome Display radio button
4. Select Close to exit.
Figure 3C-22: Display Options window
3C.17.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES
This section applies to generators with the touchscreen option only.
The system utilities menu allows access to the following functions:

APR Editor Allows the APR to be edited. Changes may be saved to memory.
APR Backup / Restore Allows the APR data to be backed up, and backed-up APR data to be
restored. The factory-default APR is available in several languages.
This also allows APR files to be saved to a USB flash drive or laptop, and
saved APR files to be downloaded from a USB flash drive or laptop.
Date / Time Setup Allows the touchscreen’s date and time to be set or changed.
Receptor Symbols Allows predefined receptor symbols to be assigned to each image receptor
button. Also allows receptor symbols to saved to a USB flash drive and
saved receptor symbols to be downloaded from a USB flash drive.
Genware® Allows access to the GenWare® MP (touchscreen) utility software.
Touch Screen Setup • Allows for the setting of specific console operating parameters.
• Sets up the serial communication ports on the touchscreen console.
• Sets the specific customer code for graphical user interfaces (skin).
• Sets the screen saver interval.
• Allows adjustment of the General Volume.
• Allows adjustment of the Exposure Volume.
• Allows adjustment of the LCD Brightness.
• Enables / disables compatible equipment (i.e. Infimed digital interface).
• Allows the operator and service passwords to be changed.
Touch Screen Calibration Allows for electrical alignment of the touch sensitive membrane with the
“buttons” displayed on the touchscreen.
Data Link Prepares the console for communication with an external computer.
Configuration Backup / Allows the receptor symbols and auto-positioner data, if applicable, to be
Restore backed up, and backed-up receptor symbols and auto-positioner data, if
applicable, to be restored.
Main Menu Press to return to the main console menu.
3C.17.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu
Use these steps to access the systems utilities functions.

Step Action
1. From the main console menu (figure 3C-23), press System Utilities. A pop-up window will be
displayed (figure 3C-25), requesting a password.
2. Press 1, 9, 7, 3 in sequence to continue. This is the factory-default service password, and allows
access to all of the functions listed above.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect password.
• Press Cancel to return to the main menu.
• Press Accept to access the system utilities menu. After a brief delay, the system utilities
menu (figure 3C-26) will be displayed. The message Access Denied indicates that an
incorrect password was used. The factory-default password may be changed by a service
engineer as described later in this supplement. If this was done, the password defined
above will not allow access to the system utilities menu.
Figure 3C-23: Main menu
3C.17.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu (Cont)
Figure 3C-24: Password window
Figure 3C-25: System utilities menu
3C.17.2 APR Editor
It is strongly suggested that you review the section ANATOMICAL PROGRAMMING SELECTOR in the
operator’s manual before proceeding. A good understanding of the terminology and APR menu
structures is needed to make APR changes.
Use these steps to access the APR editor function.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu (figure 3C-25), press APR Editor. A screen similar in appearance
to the normal operating screen will be displayed (figure 3C-26). However, as a reminder that you
are in APR editor mode, the word APR EDITOR will be displayed in the APR window.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to change parameters and
technique for existing APR items, and to edit, add, or delete APR, procedural, or menu items.
Figure 3C-26: APR editor window
NOTE: THE DISPLAY ON YOUR SYSTEM MAY VARY DEPENDING ON GENERATOR TYPE, AND ON
PROGRAMMING AND TECHNIQUE SELECTIONS.
MINOR VARIATIONS MAY EXIST IN COLOR SCHEME AND GRAPHIC STYLES (SKINS) TO SUIT
SPECIFIC CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS.
NOTE: When a region of interest (i.e. SKULL) is selected, a pop-up menu will appear similar to
that in normal APR mode. In addition to “new” <Add>, <Edit>, and <Delete> buttons, a
<Move Up> and <Move Down> button will be displayed.
The <Move Up> and <Move Down> buttons allow the items in a menu or submenu to
be rearranged. To do this, select the item to be moved. This will highlight the item.
Press <Move Up> to move the selected item up in the list, and <Move Down> to move
the selected item down in the list.
3C.17.2 APR Editor (Cont)
To change parameters or techniques for an existing APR item.

Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be changed. If the APR item is in a submenu of a menu or procedural item,
select the parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open Sub-Menu. It may be necessary
to drill down through several submenus to find the desired APR item.
2. When the selected APR item is highlighted, select the patient size. The desired parameters /
technique may be changed for that patient size (kV and mA, mAs, ms, density, AEC / mA/ms /
mAs, focal spot, film screen, AEC fields, image receptor). Repeat for all patient sizes for that APR
item as required. The highlight will change to red when the programmed APR has been altered.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other APR items within that menu or submenu, if applicable.
4. Press BACK when finished changing APR items in that menu / submenu. This may need to be
done more than once to return to the top APR menu for the selected region of interest. A pop-up
window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the changes;
CANCEL cancels the changes.
NOTE: When editing or adding an APR item, menu item, or procedural item, an English
keyboard will pop up at the bottom of the screen. A partial keyboard with
international symbols corresponding to the installer-selected language may be
displayed at the top of the screen. Characters may then be entered via either
keyboard.
An ID code window may be displayed to the right of the window for the item text.
The ID code is used by some imaging systems, and use of the proper code
synchronizes the APR’s between the touchscreen console and the imaging
system. Refer to the appropriate imaging system documentation for valid ID codes.
Touching the ID code window will move the cursor into that window, allowing entry
of the ID code. THE I.D. CODE IS NOT AVAILABLE ON ALL SOFTWARE
CONFIGURATIONS OF THE TOUCHSCREEN.
To edit (change the name of) an APR item.

Step Action
1. Select the APR item as per step 1 under “To change parameters or technique for an existing
APR item”. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Edit. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described above, with the current name of
the APR item highlighted.
• Press CANCEL on the lower keyboard to exit without changing the name.
• Press DEL to delete the highlighted name on the keyboard.
• Type in the new name for that APR item. Use the BACKSPACE key to back space if
corrections are needed.
• Add / edit the ID code if desired (if displayed).
• Press ENTER when finished.
To delete an APR item.

Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to delete this item.
Press YES to delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.
To add an APR item.

Step Action
1. Select the appropriate location to add the APR item. An APR item may be added directly to a main
APR menu, or may be added to a submenu of another menu or procedural item.
If the APR item is to be added to a submenu of a menu or procedural item, select the
parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open Sub-Menu. It may be necessary to drill
down through several submenus to find the desired location for the new APR item.
2. Press Add. A pop-up window will display allowing you to select three item types to be added.
Select APR Item (this is the default selection, and the only available selection if adding to a
procedural menu).
3. Press OK to continue. Cancel will cancel this action.
4. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new APR item.
• Add the ID code if desired (if displayed).
• The new APR item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Change the parameters and technique as per the subsection “To change parameters or
technique for an existing APR item”.
To add, edit, or delete a procedural item.
NOTE: A procedural item has only one submenu, which may only contain APR items.
A procedure item will automatically select the next APR item on its list when the PREP or
EXPOSE buttons are released.
NOTE: A menu item has one or more submenus, which may include other menu items, procedural
items and / or APR items.
APR items contained within a menu must be selected manually.
Step Action
1. To delete a procedural item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing so will also
delete the submenu associated with that procedural item.
2. To edit a procedural item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an APR item”.
3. To add a procedural item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except select APR
Procedure in step 2.
Step Action
• Type in the name of the new procedural item.
• The new procedural item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Select the newly added procedural item. The selection will be highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has been automatically
inserted in that submenu.
• You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique for that APR item, and
add additional APR items for that procedural item as per previous steps.
To add, edit, or delete a menu item.

Step Action
1. To delete a menu item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing so will also delete the
submenu associated with that menu item.
2. To edit a menu item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an APR item”.
3. To add a menu item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except select APR Menu in
step 2.
• Type in the name of the new menu item.
• The new menu item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Select the newly added menu item. The selection will be highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has been automatically
inserted in that submenu.
• You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique for that APR item, and
add additional APR items for that menu item as per previous steps.
3C.17.3 APR Backup / Restore
Use these steps to access the APR backup / restore function.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window (figure 3C-27)
will display showing the available backup files and the factory-default APR files in various
languages. Pressing Close will exit the backup and restore menu.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to back-up the current APR
data, to restore saved APR data, and to upload and download APR files to and from a USB flash
drive. The entire APR (parameters and techniques, APR text, menu structures, etc) is backed up.
3C.17.3 APR Backup / Restore (Cont)
Figure 3C-27: APR back-up and restore window
To back-up current APR data.

Step Action
1. Press Backup.
• Type in the name of the new backup file.
• Press ENTER when finished. The console will return to the APR backup / restore menu.
• A pop-up window will display indicating that the backup was successful. Press OK to
continue.
To restore backed-up APR data.

Step Action
1. Select the APR data file to be restored. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Restore.
3. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that restore was successful. Press OK.
To delete an APR data file.

Step Action
1. Select the APR data file to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to delete this file.
Press YES to delete the file; NO cancels the deletion.
To restore the factory default APR data.

Step Action
1. Press Factory Defaults.
2. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that restore was successful. Press
OK.
USB file transfer utility.

Step Action
1. The USB file transfer utility allows APR files on the touchscreen to be saved to a USB flash
drive, or saved APR files on a USB flash drive to be downloaded to the touchscreen.
2. In order to use this feature a USB flash drive is required. Connect the USB flash drive to USBA
on the rear of the touchscreen console and press . After a brief auto-
detection sequence where the touchscreen looks for the USB flash drive, the USB File
Transfer Utility window (figure 3C-28) will open.
Figure 3C-28: USB File Transfer Utility window
Step Action
3. To copy an APR file from the touchscreen to the USB flash drive select the desired file from the
Touch Screen window and press . Once the file is copied successfully it will appear in the
USB Device window of the USB File Transfer Utility.
4. To copy an APR file from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the desired file from the
USB Device window and press . Once the file is copied successfully it will appear in the
Touch Screen window of the USB File Transfer Utility.
5. When finished, press Close to exit.
3C.17.4 Date / Time Setup
Use these steps to perform the date and time setup.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Date / Time Setup. A pop-up window that allows setting of
the date and time will display (figure 3C-29).
2. TO SET THE YEAR:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Year to select the desired year. The selected year will
display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
3. TO SET THE MONTH:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Month to select the desired month. The selected month
will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
4. TO SET THE DATE:
Press to select the desired date on the calendar that is displayed.
5. TO SET THE HOUR
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Hour to select the desired hour. The selected hour will
display to the left of the up / down selection buttons. This must be selected in 24 hour format, i.e.
2 PM would be entered as hour 14.
6. TO SET THE MINUTE
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Minute to select the desired minute. The selected
minute will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
The current time will be displayed under Current Time.
7. Press Apply to apply the current date and time settings without exiting the date and time menu.
Pressing OK will apply the current settings and return to the system utilities menu. Cancel returns
to the system utilities menu without applying changes to the time or date.
3C.17.4 Date / Time Setup (Cont)
Figure 3C-29: Date and time setup window
3C.17.5 Receptor Symbols
The current image receptor symbols may be replaced with predefined symbols chosen from the receptor
symbols library or downloaded from an external device.
Each image receptor button will always select a predefined image receptor (i.e. table Bucky, wall
Bucky, DR, etc.). Before changing the image receptor symbols, it must be clearly understood which image
receptors are selected by each image receptor button. Each image receptor button should then have a logical
and intuitive symbol assigned to that position.
Use these steps to change the receptor symbols.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Receptor Symbols.
2. A pop-up window (figure 3C-30) will open showing the image receptor buttons with the currently
assigned symbols near the right side of the receptor symbols window, and the library of available
receptor symbols near the left side of the window.
3. Select the image receptor button for which the symbol is to be changed. The receptor numbers in
figure 3C-31 correspond to the receptor numbers in GenWare®, and are shown for reference
only. For the CMP 200® series, only receptors 1 to 5 are available.
4. Select an appropriate symbol for the selected receptor from the symbols library. The selected
symbol will be highlighted.
5.
Press to assign the selected symbol to the selected image receptor button.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each image receptor whose symbol is to be changed.
7. Press OK to continue or CANCEL to return to the system utilities menu without making any
changes. If OK was pressed, a pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes.
Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL
cancels the changes.
3C.17.5 Receptor Symbols (Cont)
Step Action
8. To delete unused symbols from the receptor symbols library, select the symbol to be deleted. The
selected symbol will be highlighted.
• Press .
• A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to delete the selected item. Press YES to
delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.
• DO NOT DELETE SYMBOLS YOU MAY WANT TO USE IN THE FUTURE.
9.
To copy receptor symbol files to and from a USB flash drive press to
access the USB File Transfer Utility
10. To copy a receptor symbol file from the touchscreen to a USB flash drive select the desired file
from the Touch Screen window and press . Once the file has been successfully copied it
will appear in the USB Device window.
11. To copy receptor symbol files from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the desired file
from the USB Device and press the . Once the file has been successfully copied it will
appear in the Touch Screen window.
12. When finished press Close to exit.
Figure 3C-30: Receptor symbols window
3C.17.6 Touchscreen Setup
The touchscreen setup menu accesses submenus that allow the service engineer to perform the following
functions:
• Enable or disable certain console functions (audible generator ready indication).
• Enable or disable optional digital features.
• Set up serial communication ports COM 1 and COM 2 on the touchscreen console.
• Select the language for operator and error messages and graphics (i.e. on buttons, etc).
• Select the generator type.
• Select the screen saver interval.
• Select the general and exposure volumes.
• Select the LCD brightness
• Change the operator and service password.
• Set the customer code.
Use these steps to access the touchscreen setup menu.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Touch Screen Setup.
2. The touchscreen setup window will be displayed (figure 3C-31). This has three tabs, SETTINGS,
FEATURES and PASSWORDS that will be discussed in sequence.
Figure 3C-31: Touchscreen setup window, Settings tab
• The System Code is a unique code assigned to each touchscreen on which the software is installed.
• The License is a code specifically assigned to each touchscreen. This enables options in the features tab.
Please consult the factory to obtain a new license code if it is desired to enable new features, or to reinstall
the existing license should the license code be accidentally overwritten.
• The Customer Code is a unique code assigned to each customer and selects the color scheme and
graphic style (skin) to be displayed on the touchscreen console.
3C.17.6 Touchscreen Setup (Cont)
Settings
The functions near the left side of the settings window are enabled when checked (√).
Continuous Not applicable.
Fluoro Tone
Indicate Enables / disables the audible generator ready sounds (voice and / or tone).
Generator Ready A tone will sound when the generator is ready to make an exposure (while
On (√):
pressing the PREP button, or briefly before making an exposure while the
X-RAY button is pressed).
Off: A tone will not sound when the generator is ready to make an exposure. A
text message only will be presented.
Use these steps to change the parameters on the settings tab.

Step Action
1. Program the functions defined in the table above by checking or unchecking the applicable item.
2. Program the Digital Port. This selects the communication port for the optional digital interface i.e.
the InfiMed imaging system.
3. Program the DAP Port. This selects the communication port for the optional DAP printer.
4. Program the Data Link Port. This selects the communication port for serial communication to a
laptop for the Data Link function. Note: To use the Data Link function the Data Link port must
be selected in the touchscreen setup menu to match the serial port in which the null modem
cable is connected.
Note: There are only two serial COM ports available for use on the touchscreen (COM 1 and
COM 2). Therefore only two of the three available functions above may be connected at one
time.
5. Program the Languages. This selects the language for operator and error messages, and for text
on the buttons, etc. Languages indicated with the prefix * will have all on-screen text fully translated
into that language. Languages that are not indicated with the prefix * will have all on-screen text
remain in English. However, the international keyboards will allow entry of the selected language.
6. Select the Generator Type. The touchscreen will not properly communicate with the generator
unless this is set correctly.
7. Set the Screen Saver Interval. This sets the time from the last activity on the touchscreen until the
screen saver is activated. Once the screen saver has been active for five minutes the LCD
Brightness will decrease to 10%.
8. Set the General Volume by dragging the slider to the left (lower) or right (louder). This sets the
loudness of the button clicks.
9. Set the Exposure Volume by dragging the slider to the left (lower) or right (louder). This sets the
loudness of the exposure active tone.
10. Set the LCD Brightness by dragging the slider left (dimmer) or right (brighter). This sets the
brightness of the LCD display.
Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels
the changes.
Features
Use these steps to select the digital functions.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select FEATURES. Available digital interfaces will be shown
on this screen. Refer to figure 3C-32.
Figure 3C-32: Touchscreen setup window, Features tab
Step Action
2. Check the applicable item to enable that function.
Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL
cancels the changes.
Passwords
Use these steps to change the current operator and service passwords.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select PASSWORDS. Refer to figure 3C-33.
2. To change the operator password, press the … button to the right of the top operator password
line. A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
3. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second operator password line.
Figure 3C-33: Touchscreen setup window, Passwords tab
Step Action
4. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
5. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the
changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels the changes.
BE SURE TO RECORD THE NEW SERVICE PASSWORD BEFORE CHANGING THE
FACTORY-DEFAULT PASSWORD. IF THE NEW PASSWORD IS SUBSEQUENTLY LOST,
CONSULT THE FACTORY OR RE-INSTALL THE TOUCHSCREEN SOFTWARE IN ORDER TO
RESTORE THE FACTORY-DEFAULT SERVICE PASSWORD.
6. To change the service password, press the … button to the right of the top service password line.
A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
7. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second service password line.
8. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
9. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the
changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels the changes.
3C.17.7 Touchscreen Calibration
The touchscreen calibration function should be performed if touching the center of a buttons does not activate
that function, i.e. if the touch-sensitive area appears displaced from the center of the corresponding icon.
Use these steps to perform the touchscreen calibration.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Touch Screen Calibration. Refer to the note at the end of
this section if the touchscreen calibration is so far out that it does not acknowledge the
touchscreen calibration request.
2. A white screen with a cross-hairs target will appear in the top left corner of the display.
3. Press the center of the target at the top left of the screen. This will set up the touch sensitive area
in that quadrant.
4. Repeat the previous step for the four remaining targets.
5. Another white screen will appear with an X enclosed by a box in the top left corner and a 10
second timer in the center of the display.
6. Press the center of the target at the top left of the screen. This will verify the touch sensitive area
in that quadrant.
7. Repeat the previous step for the four remaining targets.
8. If the calibration procedure was done properly you will be taken to the System Utilities menu.
• If the calibration procedure was not done properly the calibration sequence will restart from
the beginning allowing you to redo the touchscreen calibration.
NOTE: If the touchscreen calibration is out significantly and pressing buttons on the touchscreen
does not provide the expected response, there are two shortcuts to entering the touchscreen
calibration utility:
1. Switch the touchscreen off, press SW1 on the back of the touchscreen, and then switch the
console on. When the console has finished booting, a Touch Screen Utilities window will
open stating that calibration will automatically start in 10 seconds. Press OK to initiate the
calibration procedure.
2. Connect a PC USB keyboard to one of the USBA ports on the rear of the touchscreen
console, power up the touchscreen, and when the Main Menu is displayed press Alt-C to
initiate the calibration procedure. No other buttons on the USB keyboard should be pressed
as this may inadvertently cause corruption of the touchscreen software.
Follow the steps on the previous page to complete the touchscreen calibration.
3C.17.8 Data Link
This is used with the GenWare® MP (PC) utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer
in order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, perform setup and calibration
functions, upgrade generator software and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included with
PC GenWare®.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both ends
are required to run this software and interface to the generator.
NOTE: GenWare® MP (PC) should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to re-
initialize communication with the generator.
3C.17.9 Configuration Backup / Restore
Use these steps to access the Configuration Backup and Restore function. This function backs up and restores
the image receptor symbol assignment (Receptor Symbols) and the auto-positioner symbol assignment (Auto
Position Symbols) if applicable.
Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Configuration Backup / Restore. A pop-up window (figure
3C-34) will display showing the available backup files that are stored on the touchscreen console’s
internal CompactFlash card.
Pressing Close will exit the backup and restore menu.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to back-up the current receptor /
auto-position symbols, to restore the current receptor / auto-position symbols, and to upload and
download receptor / auto-position symbols to and from a USB flash drive.
Figure 3C-34: Configuration back-up and restore window
To back-up current receptor / auto-position symbols.

Step Action
1. Press Backup.
2. One or two keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described under APR Editor.
• Type in the name of the new backup file.
• Press ENTER when finished. The console will return to the configuration backup / restore
menu, and the backed up file will be displayed in the Configuration Backup And Restore
window.
3C.17.9 Configuration Backup / Restore (Cont)
To restore backed-up receptor / auto-position symbols.

Step Action
1. Select the desired backup file from the configuration backup and restore menu. The selection will
be highlighted.
2. Press Restore.
3. A pop-up window will briefly display indicating the file-restoration status. The file restoration is
finished when the pop-up window closes.
To delete a receptor / auto-position symbols file.

Step Action
1. Select the backup file to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to delete this file.
Press YES to delete the file; NO cancels the deletion.
USB file transfer utility.

Step Action
1. The USB file transfer utility allows the configuration files on the touchscreen to be saved to a USB
flash drive, or saved configuration files on a USB flash drive to be downloaded to the touchscreen.
2. In order to use this feature a USB flash drive is required. Connect the USB flash drive to USBA on
the rear of the touchscreen console and press . After a brief auto-detection
sequence where the touchscreen looks for the USB flash drive, the USB File Transfer Utility
window will open.
Figure 3C-35: USB File Transfer Utility window
3C.17.9 Configuration Backup / Restore (Cont)
Step Action
1. To copy a configuration file from the touchscreen to the USB flash drive, select the desired file
from the Touch Screen window and press . Once the file is copied successfully it will
appear in the USB Device window of the USB File Transfer Utility.
2. To copy a configuration file from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the desired file from
the USB Device window and press . Once the file is copied successfully it will appear in the
Touch Screen window of the USB File Transfer Utility.
3. When finished, press Close to exit.
3C.17.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore
This feature allows you to upgrade or restore from backup the firmware in your touchscreen console. A USB
flash drive or computer containing the upgrade / original files and a USB cable are required to perform this
upgrade.
NOTE: PLEASE BACKUP ANY APR DATA TO A USB FLASH DRIVE BEFORE PERFORMING A
TOUCHSCREEN FIRMWARE UPDATE. PLEASE SEE “APR BACKUP AND RESTORE - APR
USB FILE TRANSFER UTILITY” IN THIS CHAPTER.
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE USING A USB FLASH DRIVE
Step Action
1. Insert a USB flash drive containing the upgrade / original firmware and press SW1 on the back of
the touchscreen. Switch on the touchscreen.
When the touchscreen has finished booting, a Touch Screen Utilities window will open stating
that calibration will automatically start in 10 seconds. Unless you need to calibrate the
touchscreen, select No. For further information about touchscreen calibration, refer to
Touchscreen Calibration in this chapter.
2. A System Information screen will display containing details about the firmware on your
touchscreen. Press Next.
3. You will be taken to an Upgrade Media Selection window that will allow you to choose the
method of loading (USB flash drive or computer). Select Upgrade via a USB Memory Stick. A
pop-up window will display with a list of available firmware files (see figure 3C-36). Note: The
firmware file will always have the .cpm extension. Select the desired upgrade file and press
Open.
3C.17.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore (Cont)
Figure 3C-36: Upgrade Media Selection window-‘Choose a file’ pop-up
Step Action
4. A Checking for Available Updates screen will display. It contains two windows: Current
Packets and Upgrade Packets (see figure 3C-37). Select the desired packets from the Upgrade
Packets window. Packets that require upgrading will already be selected. Press Next.
Note: If no upgrade is available for the U-boot packet, it will not be available for selection.
This is done to prevent software corruption should the touchscreen console inadvertently
lose power.
Note: Any Upgrade Packet that is of an earlier version than the one already installed will
appear in red.
Figure 3C-37: Checking for Available Updates.
Step Action
5. The progress of the installation process will be shown on the Updating Touch Screen window.
Note: In the event the upgrade should fail, the details of the error will be displayed in red
at the bottom of the screen and a pop-up window will display asking if you would
like to retry or abort the upgrade. The cause of the failure should be determined
before retrying the upgrade.
6. Once the installation process is finished a pop-up window will display stating: It is very important
that you do not disturb this process (see figure 3C-38). The flash memory is being erased and
reloaded with the upgraded firmware.
Figure 3C-38: Erasing Flash memory pop-up window
Step Action
7. Once the update is complete, a pop-up window will display indicating Upgrade Complete. Press
OK.
Figure 3C-39: Change the upgrade switch pop-up window
Step Action
8. The touchscreen will exit the Updating Touch Screen window and you will be prompted to
Please change the upgrade switch back to normal operation mode before rebooting (see
figure 3C-39). Press the upgrade switch (SW1) on the back of the touchscreen and then select
OK. The touchscreen will reboot and you will be taken back to the main menu.
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE USING A COMPUTER AND USB CABLE
NOTE: A COMPUTER, HOST-TO-DEVICE USB CABLE AND CPI TOUCHSCREEN UPDATER PROGRAM
ARE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE.
NOTE: PLEASE ENSURE ALL RELEVANT UPGRADE FILES ARE SAVED IN AN APPROPRIATE
LOCATION ON YOUR COMPUTER.
Step Action
1. Connect a host-to-device USB cable to any one of COM 1 to COM 4 on a laptop computer and to
USBB on the back of the touchscreen and press SW1 on the back of the touchscreen. Switch on
the touchscreen.
When the touchscreen has finished booting, a Touch Screen Utilities window will open stating
that calibration will automatically start in 10 seconds. Unless you need to calibrate the touchscreen,
select No. For further information about touchscreen calibration, refer to Touchscreen Calibration
in this chapter.
2. A System Information screen will display containing details of the firmware that is loaded on your
touchscreen console. Press NEXT. This will take you to the Upgrade Media Selection window.
3. Launch Touch Screen Updater (see figure 3C-40) from your computer and click the START
button.
Figure 3C-40: Touch Screen Updater
Step Action
4. A pop-up window entitled ServerApp will open (see figure 3C-41). Locate and select the desired
upgrade file and press OK. Note: All upgrade files will have the cpm extension.
Figure 3C-41: Touch Screen Updater - ServerApp screen
Step Action
5. Another pop-up window will open entitled Select Communication Media (figure 3C-42). Select
USB from the Media Types section. Do not alter the Media Config section in any way. It is set
automatically.
Figure 3C-42: Touch Screen Updater - Select Communication Media screen
Step Action
6. Once the communication media is selected, the file path, version and media information will appear
in the Server Information window of the Touch Screen Updater.
7. From the Upgrade Media Selection window select Upgrade via a USB to Computer
Connection.
8. The Touch Screen Updater will read the available firmware packets (see figure 3C-43).
Figure 3C-43: Touch Screen Updater (after Upgrade Media is selected)
Figure 3C-44: Checking for Available Updates.
Step Action
9. A list of current and available upgrade packets will be listed on the touchscreen console in the
Checking for Available Updates screen. Select the packets you wish to install by touching the
box next to the packet such that a check is placed inside the box (as shown in figure 3C-44).
Please note that packets that require updating will already be selected. Press NEXT.
Note: If no upgrade is available for the U-boot packet, it will not be available for selection.
This is done to prevent software corruption should the touchscreen console inadvertently
lose power.
NOTE: ANY UPGRADE PACKET THAT IS OF AN EARLIER VERSION OF THE ONE

ALREADY INSTALLED WILL APPEAR IN RED.
10. The progress of the installation will be shown on the Updating Touch Screen window.
NOTE: IN THE EVENT THE UPGRADE SHOULD FAIL, THE DETAILS OF THE ERROR WILL
BE DISPLAYED IN RED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN AND A POP-UP
WINDOW WILL DISPLAY ASKING IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO RETRY OR ABORT THE
UPGRADE. THE CAUSE OF THE FAILURE SHOULD BE DETERMINED BEFORE
RETRYING THE UPGRADE.
11. Once the installation process is finished, a pop-up window will display stating: It is very important
that you do not disturb this process (see figure 3C-45). The flash memory is being erased and
reloaded with the upgraded firmware.
Figure 3C-45: Erasing Flash memory pop-up window
Step Action
12. Once the upgrade is complete, a pop-up window will display indicating Upgrade Complete.
Press OK.
Figure 3C-46: Change the upgrade switch pop-up window
Step Action
13. The touchscreen will exit the Updating Touch Screen window and you will be prompted to Please
change the upgrade switch back to normal operating mode before rebooting (figure 3C-46).
Press the upgrade switch (SW1) on the back of the touchscreen console and then select OK. The
touchscreen will reboot and you will be taken back to the Main Menu.
3C.17.11 Generator Configuration Backup and Restore
NOTE: A PERMANENT BACKUP FILE OF THE GENERATOR CONFIGURATION (RECEPTOR SETUP,

AEC SETUP AND CALIBRATION, ETC,) SHOULD BE KEPT IN THE EVENT THE GENERATOR
SOFTWARE IS CORRUPTED OR A “FACTORY DEFAULTS” IS REQUIRED. THE BACKUP FILE
SHOULD BE STORED ON AN EXTERNAL STORAGE DEVICE, SUCH AS A LAPTOP OR USB
FLASH DRIVE.
NOTE: ENSURE THERE IS AN EXTERNAL USB DEVICE CONNECTED TO THE TOUCHSCREEN

CONSOLE USING ONE OF THE TWO AVAILABLE USBA PORTS AT THE REAR OF THE
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE.
Figure 3C-47: Generator Configuration Backup and Restore utility
Step Action
1. Touchscreen GenWare® must be launched before proceeding. This is done from the GenWare®
button on the touchscreen System Utilities menu.
2.
Press the button to launch the Backup and Restore utility.

3. To exit the Backup and Restore utility, press Close.
To create a new backup file.

Step Action
1. Press the Backup button.
2. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a name for the backup file you wish to create into the Backup
File Name window. Note that the keyboard will only become active after the Backup button is
pressed.
3. The newly created backup file will be saved on the touchscreen compact flash card and will appear
in the Touchscreen window.
3C.17.11 Generator Configuration Backup and Restore (Cont)
To restore a previously saved backup file to the generator
Note: Backup files can only be restored from the touchscreen window. If the desired backup file
resides on a USB flash drive it must be copied to the touchscreen before restoration. Please
see “To copy a backup file from a USB device”.
Step Action
1. Select the desire backup file from the Touch Screen window.
2. Press the Restore button.
To copy a backup file to a USB device

Step Action
1. Select the desire backup file from the Touch Screen window.
2.
Press the button to save the file to the USB flash drive.
3. The copied file will appear in the USB Device window.
To copy a backup file from a USB device

Step Action
1. Select the desired file from the USB Device window.
2.
Press the button to save the file to the touchscreen compact flash
card.
3. The copied file will appear in the Touch Screen window.
To delete a backup file
Note: Backup files can only be deleted from the Touch Screen window. If you wish to delete a backup
file stored on a USB flash drive, copy it to the touchscreen first. Please see “To copy a backup
file from a USB device”.
Step Action
1. Select the desired file from the Touch Screen window.
2.
Press the button to delete the file from the touchscreen.

3. The file will be removed from the Touch Screen window.
AEC Calibration 3D
CHAPTER 3D
AEC CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................................3D-2

3D.2.0 WIRING THE AEC PICKUP DEVICE TO THE GENERATOR.....................................................................3D-2
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) .........................................................................................................3D-3
3D.2.2 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) ......................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.2.3 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) ......................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers)..........................................................................................................3D-9
3D.2.5 Precalibration Notes ................................................................................................................................3D-11
3D.2.6 Required Test Equipment .......................................................................................................................3D-11
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) .......................................................................................................3D-13
3D.4.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION.......................................................................................................3D-22
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION...................................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY).........................................................................................................3D-27
3D.7.0 AEC CALIBRATION (MISC) .......................................................................................................................3D-30
3D.8.0 AEC OVERVIEW AND BACKGROUND INFORMATION .........................................................................3D-30
3D.8.1 Film/Screen Response vs. kV.................................................................................................................3D-30
3D.8.2 AEC Calibration Range ...........................................................................................................................3D-31
3D.9.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP .......................................................................................................................3D-32
3D.9.1 AEC Setup Worksheet ............................................................................................................................3D-32
3D.9.2 AEC Precalibration Checks.....................................................................................................................3D-34
3D.9.3 AEC Chamber Installation.......................................................................................................................3D-34
MAGNUM C Service Manual Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H Page 3D-1

3D AEC Calibration
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes interfacing and setup / calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used
in MAGNUM C and MAGNUM C DR X-ray generators.
THIS X-RAY GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH SPECIFIC AEC

DEVICE(S). REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL FOR
THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF THIS GENERATOR.
A SET OF AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIXES IS LOCATED AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL. EACH
AEC BOARD HAS A CORRESPONDING AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIX, I.E. FOR AEC BOARD 734614-
XX, USE AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIX SUP73461400.
THE AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIXES LIST THE AEC CHAMBERS / PREAMPLIFIERS THAT
EACH VERSION OF AEC BOARD IS COMPATIBLE WITH, AND THEY ALSO SHOW THE I/O PIN
CONNECTIONS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS, AS WELL AS RELATED NOTES.
This chapter contains background information that is relevant to AEC operation. This is located at the back
of this chapter, and should be understood before beginning AEC calibration.
3D.2.0 WIRING THE AEC PICKUP DEVICE TO THE GENERATOR
1. Note the part number that is printed on the AEC board in the generator.
2. Connect the AEC device to the AEC board as per 3D.2.1 to 3D.2.4. Supplementary information is in
the AEC compatibility matrixes.
Page 3D-2 Ref: 3Z-40-001 Rev.H MAGNUM C Service Manual

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid-state chambers as per AEC
compatibility matrix SUP73799200.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 7 pin in-line connectors (J11
to J14), depending on the application.
Figure 3D-1: Dedicated solid-state AEC board (assembly 737992)
NOTE: WHEN PERFORMING THE INITIAL AEC SETUP (CHAPTER 3C), THE CHAMBER TYPE MUST BE SET
TO ION FOR THIS BOARD.
AEC board input assignment (examples only, actual receptor assignments may vary):
• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:

• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.

3D AEC Calibration
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont
Tables 3D-1 and 3D-2 show the pin outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 7 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-1.
FUNCTION PIN
Anode, right (refer to note below) 3
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 4
Anode, middle 1
Cathode, middle 6
Anode, left (refer to note below) 2
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 5
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-1: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector J1 to J4
FUNCTION PIN
Anode, right (refer to note below) 1
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 2
Anode, middle 3
Cathode, middle 4
Anode, left (refer to note below) 5
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 6
Ground 7
Table 3D-2: Pin outs for 7 pin in-line connector J11 to J14
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields from J1 to J4 and J11 to J14 as per the table below.
CHANNEL LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS AS PER LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS SWAPPED RELATIVE
TABLES 3D-1, 3D-2 TO TABLES 3D-1, 3D-2
1 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 2-3 (R)

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.2 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of ion chambers as per AEC
This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J11 to J14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to
J4), depending on the application.
CPI CANADA INC Made in Canada
AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER R79
J14
JW2 JW1 J5
J4
J13
JW4 JW3
J3
J12
JW6 JW5
J2
J11
R11 R12 R13 R14
JW8JW7
J1 R1 R2 R3 R4
ML_IONBD.CDR
Figure 3D-2: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 734614)
• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).

The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
• R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.

3D AEC Calibration
3D.2.2 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont
R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.
Tables 3D-3 and 3D-4 show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-2. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID
ionization chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s)
being used.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+300 VDC output 1 Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
Left field select (refer to note below) 2
Middle field select 3
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-3: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J11 to J14)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14 as per the table below.
TABLE 3D-3 TO TABLE 3D-3
1 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 1-2 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 2-3
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
+ or - 300 VDC output 2 only provided on configurations of this board
+45 VDC output 3 designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
+12 VDC output 4 these voltage outputs.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
Ground 7 the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
Reset / start 8 the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on
Right field select 9 CMP 200.
Left field select 11
Chamber output 12
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector (J1 to J4)

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.3 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various models of ion chambers as per AEC compatibility
matrix SUP73799800.
This board is fitted with 9 pin D connectors J1 to J4.
Figure 3D-3: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 737998)
• Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc).


3D AEC Calibration
3D.2.3 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont
Table 3D-5 shows the pin outs for the 9 pin D connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-3. The 9 pin
connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization chambers. However, the installer should
verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

Not used 1
Left field select (refer to note below) 2 See note below.
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J1 to J4)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4 as per the table below.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is designed for use with various three-of-five-field ion chambers as per AEC
This board is fitted with 15 pin D connectors J1 and J2.
3 OF 5 FIELD ION AEC BOARD

CPI CANADA INC.
J1 J2
J5
JW8
JW7
JW5
JW6
R11
R12
Figure 3D-4: Three-of-five-field ion chamber AEC board (assembly 739389)
AEC board input assignment:

• Ch 1 = J1.
• Ch 2 = J2.


3D AEC Calibration
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers) (Cont)
Table 3D-6 shows the pin outs for the 15 pin D connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-4. The 15 pin
connectors are compatible with some models of three-of-five-field AID ion chambers.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

Not used 1
Left field select (refer to note below) 2 See note below.
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Not used 10
Portrait 11
Not used 12
Inverted 13
Not used 14
Not used 15
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 15 pin D connector (J1 and J2)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW5 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 and J2 as per the table below.
NOTE: THE FIELD COMPENSATION VALUES (R FIELD COMP, C FIELD COMP, L FIELD COMP) IN AEC
SETUP MENU 2 MUST ALL BE SET TO 0. THE AEC FIELD BALANCE MUST BE DONE AS PER
A.I.D.’s RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.2.5 Precalibration Notes
Please note the following points before beginning AEC calibration.
CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO

AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE AND AN “AEC
DEVICE ERR / AEC FEEDBACK ERROR” MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE RAMP VOLTAGE
FAILS TO REACH 4% OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME REACHES
20% OF THE SELECTED BACKUP TIME.
• When using a photo diode for AEC, there is normally no need to iterate all the kV breakpoints during
AEC calibration. It will usually suffice to use the 75 kV breakpoint calibration value at all kV
breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the
acquired digital images.
• For DR applications, the AEC calibration procedure uses the same potentiometers and menus as
described for film in the following sections. However, the imaging system manufacturers literature
should be consulted to determine the required dose / image brightness.
• The generator must be known to be calibrated before beginning AEC calibration.
• All components (X-ray tubes, collimators, AEC chambers, etc) used during AEC calibration must be
those that will be used during procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of
the X-ray room.
• During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
• Before placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields
on the AEC pickup device.
• Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
• During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the
exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
• The recommended absorber is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform thickness.
Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber.
• Care must be exercised when using table Buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and
grids absorb considerable radiation in the 60 – 65 kV range. This will adversely affect AEC
operation.
• During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that
the input signal level to the AEC board is too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp
voltage at the output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC
board for the subject AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does
exceed 10 V, reduce the input signal level as required.
3D.2.6 Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for AEC calibration.

• Lexan or equivalent (or water) absorbers in various thicknesses. Water should be in a plastic container
of uniform thickness.
• Radiation dosimeter for digital applications.
• A supply of film in each film speed that will be calibrated.

3D AEC Calibration
• A cassette with intensifying screen in each speed that will be calibrated.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)
CTM
O.T.
WALL
BUCKY Absorber
SID
40 in(100cm)
Grid
AEC
Chamber
BUCKY
Cassette Tray
FILE: ML_IMREC
TYPICAL TABLE BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR
Figure 3D-5: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration
The AEC CALIBRATION menus that relate to kV breakpoint calibration for the membrane console are
shown below.
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1 DENSITY SETUP
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT

3D AEC Calibration
3D.3.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
* AEC CAL, F/S1 *

50KV: 84.0 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0 +
75KV: 54.0 -
<< >>
* AEC CAL, F/S1 *

110KV: 34.0
130KV: 28.0
+
-
<<
Figure 3D-6: AEC Setup & Calibration window, Film Screen Calibration tab

AEC Calibration 3D
Use these steps to perform the table Bucky AEC calibration.

Step Action
IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS, THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION POTS TO
ZERO BY TURNING EACH OF THESE POTENTIOMETERS FULLY CLOCKWISE. THESE
ARE MULTI-TURN POTENTIOMETERS, AND MUST BE TURNED BY AS MUCH AS 25
TURNS TO REACH THE ZERO-OHMS LIMIT.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING AEC
CALIBRATION.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-5.
2. Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-8) in the X-ray field, ensuring
that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
5. Ensure that in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, Ensure that in the Receptor Setup window,
each receptor has the desired AEC channel each receptor has the desired AEC channel
assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in
chapter 3C. chapter 3C.
6. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set In the Receptor Setup window, under the
MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This Receptor Properties tab, set Memory to off
will ensure that the next receptor being for each image receptor. This will ensure that
calibrated will not remember the techniques the next receptor being calibrated will not
from the previous receptor. remember the techniques from the previous
The MEMORY function may be reset as receptor.
desired after AEC calibration is completed. The Memory function may be reset as desired
after AEC calibration is completed.
7. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that In the Receptor Setup window, under the
the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC BACKUP AEC tab, ensure that the AEC Back-Up mAs
MS are set sufficiently high that the generator and AEC Back-Up ms are set sufficiently high
backup timer will not terminate the exposure. that the generator backup timer will not
terminate the exposure
8. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, Select the AEC Setup and Calibration
select AEC CALIBRATION. window.
9. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu, select On the main AEC Calibration window, select
FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen Film Screen 1 (the slowest film screen
combination). combination).

3D AEC Calibration
CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED
TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING
EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER
MINUTE.
NOTE: BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
FILM SPEED mAs @ 75 kV

100 16
200 8
400 4
800 2
Table 3D-7: Film speed vs. mAs @ 75 kV
The mAs values noted in the above table represent the approximate desired mAs at an SID of 40 in. (100
cm), using a grid with a 12:1 ratio. All measurements were done with HVL = 3 mm Al @ 75 kV.
Step Action
10. Select the table Bucky image receptor.
11. Select the Film Screen Calibration tab.
12. Select the 75KV breakpoint. Use the + or Enter the value 4.5 into the 75 kV dialog box,
– buttons to enter the value 45. under Film Screen Calibration.
13. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-8, remembering
that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first (example 320 mA
for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
14. Make an exposure and note the mAs.
15. Referring to table 3D-7, select the target mAs required for the film speed being calibrated i.e.
approximately 16 mAs at 75 kV for 100 speed film.
16. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board while taking exposures until the mAs
noted in the previous step is obtained.
17. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
18. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy
of table 3D-11.
19. If the measured O.D. is not within the desired value, adjust the gain pot to increase or decrease
the density, and then repeat the previous two steps.
20. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, calibration number, and O.D. in a
copy of table 3D-9.
21. Vary the absorber thickness, and confirm that the mAs changes accordingly.
STEPS 22 TO 25 APPLY TO SOLID-STATE AEC CHAMBERS ONLY

AEC Calibration 3D
Step Action
22. Measure the mAs with the center AEC field only selected. Record this value.
23. Select the left field, and measure the mAs. Compare this value to the value noted for the center
field.
24. If the field balance is not acceptable, adjust the left field compensation value up or down as
described in the section AEC Setup in chapter 3C such that the left field matches the center
field.
Do not adjust the center field (C) compensation value.
25. Repeat steps 23 and 24 for the right field.
For each breakpoint in the remainder of this section, start with the approximate mAs as per table 3D-8. After
that mAs is achieved, a film must be exposed and the O.D. verified. If the O.D. is not the desired value,
further iterations may be required to achieve the desired optical density.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV BREAKPOINT IS
CALIBRATED. FURTHER DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE MADE BY ADJUSTING THE
CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.
Step Action
26. Change the absorber thickness as specified for the 55 kV breakpoint in table 3D-8. As before,
ensure that the absorber fully blocks the X-ray field.
27. In the following steps, you will need to scroll
back and forth between AEC CAL menu 1 and
AEC CAL menu 2 using the >> and <<
buttons in order to access the required
breakpoints.
28. Select the 55KV breakpoint. Select the 55 kV up or down buttons under
Film Screen Calibration. This will set the
generator kV demand to 55 kV.
29. Make an exposure and note the mAs. Use mA Make an exposure and note the mAs. Use mA
values as specified for the 55 kV breakpoint in values as specified for the 55 kV breakpoint in
table 3D-8. table 3D-8.
30. Adjust the 55 kV calibration number using the Adjust the 55 kV calibration number such that
+ or - buttons such that the actual mAs is the actual mAs is equal to the target mAs at 55
equal to the target mAs at 55 kV as per table kV as per table 3D-8.
3D-8. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
GAIN POT.
31. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
32. Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 18.
33. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, readjust the 55 kV calibration number, then repeat
the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
34. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table 3D-9.

3D AEC Calibration

AEC Calibration 3D
100 speed film screen

Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 20 cm H2O 16 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
55 kV 15 cm H2O 25 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
110 kV 25 cm H2O 6.3 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)

Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 8 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 15 cm H2O 12.5 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 20 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs

Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
Table 3D-8: Target breakpoint calibration factors
2
NOTE: For SID’s other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the mAs by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)] .

3D AEC Calibration
Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained
AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.
FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =

#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =


Table 3D-9: Breakpoint calibration worksheet

AEC Calibration 3D
Step Action
35. Repeat steps 26 to 34 for the remaining breakpoints: 50 kV, 65 kV, 110 kV, 130 kV, 85 kV, and
95 kV. Do the breakpoint calibration in the stated order.
The 50 kV and 130 kV breakpoints only need to be calibrated if these kV ranges are used
with AEC. Refer to the comments below.
50 kV: At approximately 50 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low for
practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky. Unless special techniques are used
which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55 kV calibration number into the 50 kV
breakpoint.
130 kV: Unless special high kV techniques are used which require the 130 kV range, simply
enter the 110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint.
36. Repeat steps 9 to 35 for FILM SCREEN 2, except:
1. Film screen 2 must be the next highest film speed after film screen 1.
2. When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 2, DO NOT adjust the AEC
board gain pot. Dose adjustments for film screen 2 at 75 kV must only be made by
varying the 75 kV breakpoint calibration numbers.
37. Repeat steps 9 to 35 for FILM SCREEN 3, except:
1. Film screen 3 must be the highest film speed.
2. When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 3, DO NOT adjust the AEC
board gain pot. Dose adjustments for film screen 3 at 75 kV must only be made by
varying the 75 kV breakpoint calibration numbers.
38. Select << to return to the AEC
CALIBRATION menu.

3D AEC Calibration
3D.4.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
Use these steps to perform the short AEC exposure time compensation.
Step Action
THESE STEPS ONLY APPLY IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS
ARE REQUIRED AND THE AEC BOARD HAS SHORT AEC TIME ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETERS.
1. Select the image receptor to be short AEC-time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
2. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select 75 kV.
3. Set the mA per table 3D-8 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per table
3D-8 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
4. Make an exposure and confirm the mAs readings as previously recorded in table 3D-9.
5. Increase the mA such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 10 ms.
6. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the
mAs is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4).
7. Increase the mA again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 6 ms (but
not less).
8. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the
mAs is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
9. The short AEC-time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer exposure
times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot (at 75 kV) for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the mAs values to the values previously recorded in table
3D-9. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per table 3D-8 when
readjusting the AEC gain pot.
10. Using 75 kV exposures, films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at AEC
exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film density is not
acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be necessary to iterate the
adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and the AEC gain pot by repeating
steps 3 to 8.
11. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION
The DENS. SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* DENS. SETUP *
-8: ---
-7: ---
-6: --- +
-5: 62% -
EXIT >>
* DENS. SETUP *
-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25% +
-1: 12% -
<< >>
* DENS. SETUP *
+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37% +
+4: 50% -
<< >>
* DENS. SETUP *
+5: 62%
+6: ---
+7: --- +
+8: --- -
<< >>

3D AEC Calibration
3D.5.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)
Figure 3D-7: AEC Setup & Calibration window, Density tab
Please note the following points regarding density calibration:

• Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If ± 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be deprogrammed per the procedure below. For example, if
only ± 5 density steps are desired, then density steps ± 6, 7, and 8 may be deprogrammed.
• Once the desired number of ± density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum mAs values
must be determined. Typically, the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal mAs
(dose) and the maximum density step will typically give double (100% increase) the nominal mAs
(dose). The nominal mAs is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-9.
• The relative mAs change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum mAs as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
The relative mAs change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided
by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of
density plus steps. This will yield the required mAs increment for each density minus step and for each
density plus step respectively.
For ± 8 density steps, this gives a mAs decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step = 50% mAs at -8 density) or a mAs increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step = 100% mAs increase at +8 density).

AEC Calibration 3D
Refer to table 3D-10 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus density
steps the mAs decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the mAs increase is 12.5% per step as
per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the mAs decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the mAs increase is
20% per step.
DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8 DENSITY CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5

STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8 STEP DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE) DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
-8 50
-7 44
-6 38
-5 31 -5 50
-4 25 -4 40
-3 19 -3 30
-2 13 -2 20
-1 6 -1 10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
+1 13 +1 20
+2 25 +2 40
+3 38 +3 60
+4 50 +4 80
+5 63 +5 99
+6 75
+7 88
+8 99
Table 3D-10: Example density values

3D AEC Calibration
Use these steps to perform AEC density calibration.

Step Action
1. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-8 in the X-ray field, ensuring
that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
2. Select DENSITY SETUP. Select the Density tab
3. Select 75 kV via the console. Select 75 kV via GenWare®.
4. Referring to table 3D-9, note the mAs at 75 kV Referring to table 3D-9, note the mAs at 75 kV
for film screen 1. This is the mAs required to for film screen 1. This is the mAs required to
achieve 0 density. achieve 0 density.
5. Determine the highest density minus step to Determine the highest density minus step to
be used. If there will be unused density steps, be used. If there will be unused density steps,
i.e. –8, -7, -6, these density steps must be i.e. –8, -7, -6, these density steps must be
disabled by setting them to --. This is done by disabled by setting them to 0.
using the – button to scroll down until the --
symbol is displayed.
6. Select the highest density minus step that will For the highest density minus step that will be
be used, i.e. –5. Use the + or – buttons to set used, i.e. –5, enter the desired relative density
the calibration number for that step to the value (example 50, this will give approximately
desired relative density value (example 50, this 1/2 the density).
will give approximately 1/2 the density).
7. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured mAs is approximately the desired value.
8. If the measured mAs is not as expected, adjust the calibration number and repeat the previous
step.
9. In the following steps, you will need to scroll
back and forth between the DENS. SETUP
menus using the >> and << buttons in order to
access the required density steps.
10. Select the next density step (i.e. - 4) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that step.
Then repeat steps 7 and 8.
11. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step.
12. Determine the highest density plus step to be Determine the highest density plus step to be
used. If there will be unused density steps, i.e. used. If there will be unused density steps, i.e.
+8, +7, +6, these density steps must be +8, +7, +6, these density steps must be
disabled by setting them to --. This is done by disabled by setting them to 0.
using the – button to scroll down until the --
symbol is displayed.
13. Select the highest density plus step that will be For the highest density plus step that will be
used, i.e. +5. Use the + or – buttons to set the used, i.e. +5, enter the desired relative density
calibration number for that step to the desired value (example 99, this will give approximately
relative density value (example 99, this will double the density).
give approximately double the density).
14. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured mAs is approximately the desired value.
15. If the measured mAs is not as expected, adjust the calibration number and repeat the previous
step.
16. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. +4) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that
step. Then repeat steps 14 and 15.

AEC Calibration 3D
Step Action
17. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step.
18. Press << or RETURN as required to return to
the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)
CTM
WALL
BUCKY Absorber
O.T.
FRONT VIEW OF
WALL BUCKY
72 in(180cm)
TYPICAL WALL BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR
Figure 3D-8: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration
Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration:

• If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).
• If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note on the next page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.
NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF.
A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH
150 LINE PAIR / INCH (STATIONARY).
TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND PROCESSING.

3D AEC Calibration
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Grid Absorption
The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating mAs if required: The percentages
listed are approximate.
A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18%
from center:
from center:
from center:
from center:
from center:
NOTE: BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY PREVIOUSLY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM
SCREEN COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED FOR
THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF A SPARE FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY USE, IT IS
SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE BE ASSIGNED TO
SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN.
(100 CM) SID’S WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND
WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE USED WITH THE SPARE FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180
CM) SID’S.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A SEPARATE
DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE ASSIGNED TO THE 72
IN. (180CM) SID.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Use these steps to perform the wall Bucky AEC calibration.

Step Action
Steps 1 to 15 apply only if using one receptor select button for both SID’s, using
previously calibrated film screens.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-8.
2. Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-8) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
5. Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
6. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA for that
film screen per table 3D-8 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV, large focus,
center field.
7. Make an exposure and note the mAs.
8. Referring to table 3D-9, note the previously established mAs at the 75 kV breakpoint for the film
speed being calibrated.
9. Adjust the gain potentiometer on the AEC board for the channel that is connected to the wall
Bucky while taking exposures until the mAs noted in the previous step is obtained.
DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR ANY PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED CHANNELS.
10. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
11. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of table
3D-11.
12. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, adjust the gain pot to increase or decrease the
density, then repeat the previous two steps. Do not readjust the kV breakpoints that were
previously calibrated.
13. Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 10 to 12. Adjust the gain pot if necessary
to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SID’s.
14. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
15. Press << as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu (membrane console).
Steps 16 to 21 apply only if using two receptor select buttons (one for each SID), using
one previously calibrated film screen and one uncalibrated film screen.
16. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm) SID.
17. Repeat steps 1 to 12 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
18. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
19. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm) SID.
20. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The AEC
calibration pot must not be readjusted, as it was calibrated at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID. All
breakpoints, including the 75 kV breakpoint, are to be calibrated by adjusting the calibration
numbers ONLY.
21. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu (membrane
console).

3D AEC Calibration
3D.7.0 AEC CALIBRATION (MISC)
The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for the active channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on the selected receptor. DO
NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT
READJUST THE CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREENS.
THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS
CHAPTER MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.
3D.8.0 AEC OVERVIEW AND BACKGROUND INFORMATION
AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result
in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.
Care must be exercised when using low kV values with table Buckys because most tabletops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 – 65 kV. This will adversely affect AEC operation.
3D.8.1 Film/Screen Response vs. kV
Film screen response to kV is not linear. Therefore, compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kV is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread
over three kV ranges as shown below:
• Low kV: 50, 55, 65 kV.
• Knee kV: 75 kV.
• High kV: 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Refer to figure 3D-9.
100
80
60
40
20
0 0 55
50
5 65 75 85 95 110 130
kV BREAKPOINTS
65
FILE: ML_RELEX.CDR
Figure 3D-9: kV vs. relative density


AEC Calibration 3D
3D.8.2 AEC Calibration Range
Since the MAGNUM C family of X-ray generators allows for up to three separate film screen combinations
to be calibrated, the following points must be considered:
• The AEC board allows for a zero to a maximum of 10-volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques).
• Most X-ray film-based applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all
of which will require different exposure doses.
• Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
• Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine
the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).
• Figure 3D-10 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
X = Knee dose (density) at 75 kV

= Half the knee dose
= Double the knee dose
FAST x
-8 +8
MEDIUM x
-8 +8
SLOW x
-8 +8
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
AEC CALIBRATION NUMBERS (D/A OUTPUT)

FILE: ML_AECDA.CDR
Figure 3D-10: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output

3D AEC Calibration
3D.9.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP
3D.9.1 AEC Setup Worksheet
Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information.
Refer to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page.
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3
Film/Screen 1.
2.
3.
Nominal optical density:
Grid ratio/SID:
Min - max kV range:
± Density steps
Density mAs +%:

(dose) change
(per step)
-%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Is film processing maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-11: AEC setup worksheet
ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.9.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)
Note: The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3
Film/Screen 1. Lanex/reg Lanex/reg Lanex/reg
2. Lanex/med Lanex/chest
3.
Nominal optical density: 1.2 1.1 1.4
Grid ratio/SID: 12:1 8:1 10:1
Min - max kVp range: 60 - 120 65 - 140 80 - 110
± Density steps ±8 ±8 ±8
Density mAs +%: 12.5 12.5 12.5

(dose) change
(per step)
-%: 6.25 6.25 6.25
Chamber type: Ion Solid state Ion

Regulatory AEC dose Yes Yes Yes
requirements?
Is film processing maintained? Yes Yes Yes
Assigned receptor name: Table Wall Aux
Are all cassettes similar? Yes Yes Yes
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-12: Sample AEC setup worksheet

3D AEC Calibration
3D.9.2 AEC Precalibration Checks
It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting
AEC calibration.
1. Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly CHECK:

in the Bucky. Note that some chamber types must
be physically isolated from equipment ground, refer
to figure 3D-11 as an example.
2. Verify that each AEC chamber / pickup is properly CHECK:
connected to its intended input channel on the AEC
board.
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup: AEC Ch 1_____________________________
AEC Ch 2_____________________________
AEC Ch 3_____________________________
4. Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The CHECK:
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in
the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground
return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable.
6. Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is CHECK:
functioning. This includes the AEC chambers /
devices and the AEC circuits in the generator. Each
of the fields on the AEC device must be able to
terminate the exposure.
7. Radiographic techniques to be performed with the
equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?
8. Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs / kV range)?
Table 3D-13: Precalibration checklist
3D.9.3 AEC Chamber Installation
Figure 3D-11 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to
isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.

AEC Calibration 3D
3D.9.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)
Figure 3D-11: AEC chamber installation

3D AEC Calibration

Acceptance Testing 4
CHAPTER 4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. .................................................. 4-3
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ........................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.1 Console Tests ....................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Low Speed Starter Verification ............................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.3 Dual Speed Starter (Optional) Verification............................................................................................ 4-6
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, ms, mA and mAs) ....................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DR INTERFACE) ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)................................................. 4-11
4 Acceptance Testing .
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within its limits.
Acceptance testing must be done at initial installation of the generator and as required by local Supprimé : This
regulations.
The applicable sections of this chapter should be performed when the generator is reconfigured or critical
component(s) are replaced. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, console board,
generator control board, filament supply board, and the AEC board.
Acceptance test procedures may be defined by local regulations or by some hospitals / clinics / end
users. Local or site-specific acceptance test procedures should be used as required to supercede all or
part of the acceptance test procedures in this chapter.
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT Supprimé : 1.
MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, MAINS Supprimé : 2.
VOLTAGE IS STILL PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE
IS EXTREMELY DANGEROUS; USE EXTREME CAUTION.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED BESIDE THE HT TANK, PRESENT A Supprimé : 3.
HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN
SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE
SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
WARNING: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS.

TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-
RADIATION.
WARNING: ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED Supprimé : 1.
TEST EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND Supprimé : 2.
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:
• The generator is interfaced to compatible room equipment as noted on the product configuration \
compatibility statement at the front of this manual.
• The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 3C.
• The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C.
• If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D.
• If the installation has DAP, verify that the DAP chambers have been calibrated as per chapter 3C.
• Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e. with the generator in the
final position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.
Supprimé : ¶
¶
4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.
• A kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer or a non-invasive kV meter. The non-invasive kV meter

must be rated to be accurate at the minimum mA and minimum ms that will be used during
acceptance testing.
• Storage oscilloscope.
• mA / mAs meter.
• Radiation meter 0-10 mGy (0-1000 mR).
• Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
• General purpose DVM.
• Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
• A set of HVL filters.
• Calculator.
• Strobe or reed tachometer to measure anode speed. Mise en forme : Puces et
numéros
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)
4.3.1 Console Tests
For the touchscreen console, check the console functionality by pressing the equivalent switch position
on the touchscreen for the functions described in section 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. Verify the correct response on
the touchscreen console for each function that is tested.
Step Action Result Check

1. Press the power ON then power OFF buttons Unit switches on and off.
on the console.
Note: Steps 2 and 3 apply only if a customer supplied external Emergency Power Off switch is
connected. If no Emergency Power Off switch has been connected proceed to step 4.
2. Press the Emergency Power Off switch (if Unit will remain unpowered.
installed) and then the power ON button on
the console.
3. Reset the Emergency Power Off switch N/A
4. Press the power ON button again to switch the Unit switches on.
unit on.
5. Press each of the receptor buttons that are Verify that the adjacent LED
active (those that have been enabled during lights for each receptor.
generator configuration).
Note: The technique select button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 6, 7, 8 will only be
functional if APR MODE has been disabled during generator configuration (the technique select function
is disabled if APR MODE is enabled). This function is described in chapter 3C, in the section UTILITY
MENU, under CONSOLE.
6. Select an active radiographic receptor that has
AEC programmed. A: The AEC LED lights.
Press the technique select button to select B: kV value is displayed.
AEC. C: mA value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: D: Density value is displayed.
7. Press the technique select button to select A: The mAs LED lights.
mAs. B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: C: mAs value is displayed.
8. Press the technique select button to select A: The mA/ms LED lights.
mA/ms. B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: C: mA value is displayed.
D: ms value is displayed.
9. Press the kV +/- buttons. kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
10. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). mA increases if mA + is pressed.
Press the mA +/- buttons. mA decreases if mA - is pressed.
11. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). ms increases if ms + is pressed.
Press the ms +/- buttons. ms decreases if ms - is pressed.
12. Press the focus select button. The large and small focal spot
LED’s alternately light as the
switch is pressed.
4.3.1 Console Tests (Cont)

13. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three film-screen LED’s (I, II,
Press the film-screen select button. III) alternately light as the switch
is pressed.
14. Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms. The LED adjacent to the prep
Press the PREP button. button lights.
15. Press the X-ray button. The X-ray warning indicator
lights during an X-ray exposure,
and an audible tone is heard
from the console.
16. Ensure that AEC is selected. The LEFT, CENTER, and RIGHT
Press the individual AEC field select buttons in field selection LED’s should light
sequence. as each field is selected.
17. Press the power OFF button on the console. The unit switches off.
4.3.2 Low Speed Starter Verification
NOTE: THE GENERATOR IS LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 5 CONSECUTIVE LOW SPEED BOOSTS,

FOLLOWED BY A MINIMUM 10 SECOND WAIT PERIOD.
THE X-RAY TUBE DATA SHEETS SHOULD BE CONSULTED TO CONFIRM THE TUBE
MANUFACTURERS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LOW SPEED BOOSTS.
Supprimé : ***** PLEASE
Step Action Result Check OBSERVE A MAXIMUM OF 5
CONSECUTIVE LOW SPEED
1. Connect a current probe to the common lead BOOSTS, FOLLOWED BY A
of the X-ray tube stator. A 60 Hz waveform dropping to MINIMUM 10 SECOND WAIT
PERIOD *****
Switch ON the console. less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button. prep is complete.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be as set in chapter 3C.
3. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube reaches operating speed at the
end of boost. Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
4. Switch OFF the console.
Supprimé : ¶
¶
4.3.3 Dual Speed Starter (Optional) Verification
THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER
TO BE ABLE TO VERIFY BOTH MODES OF OPERATION IN THIS SECTION. DO NOT PROGRAM
DUAL SPEED OPERATION IF A TUBE IS USED THAT CANNOT OPERATE AT BOTH LOW AND
HIGH SPEEDS.
NOTE: THE GENERATOR IS LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE.
THE X-RAY TUBE DATA SHEETS SHOULD BE CONSULTED TO CONFIRM THE TUBE
MANUFACTURERS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BOOSTS (LOW AND HIGH SPEED).
Supprimé : ***** PLEASE OBSERVE A
MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS
PER MINUTE *****
1. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
of the X-ray tube stator. less than half amplitude after
Switch ON the console. prep complete.
Select 70 kV, minimum mA, 50 ms.
Press and hold the PREP button.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
the supplement at the end of
chapter 2.
3. Select 100 kV, maximum mA, 50 ms, small A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
focus. less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button. prep complete.
4. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table at
the end of chapter 2.
5. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1 and 3
to select low and high-speed modes
respectively. Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
6. After a high-speed prep, verify that the Will hear the X-ray tube slow
dynamic brake is applied. down to 60 Hz.
Supprimé : ¶
Supprimé : ¶
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, ms, mA and mAs)
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests

• kV measurements must be made using a non-invasive kV meter or by use of an invasive device such
as a Dynalyzer.
• mA / mAs measurements must be made by connecting a mA / mAs meter to the mA measurement
jacks on the HT tank.
• ms measurements will typically be made using a non-invasive kV meter with ms measurement
capability.
• All test equipment must be calibrated and the measurement tolerances of the equipment must be
known.
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
Note: A Dynalyzer is not recommended for mA measurements with this X-ray generator.
Bandwidth limitations of the Dynalyzer will result in inaccurate mA measurements at mA
values less than approximately 100 mA. mA measurements must be made with an mA /
mAs meter connected to the mA test jacks on the HT tank.
Warning: Take all appropriate precautions when connecting the mA / mAs meter to the HT Supprimé :
tank. Ensure mains power is switched off and all capacitors are discharged before
connecting the meter. Use the same precautions when disconnecting the meter.
The mA shorting link must be in place on the HT tank at all times except when an
approved mA / mAs meter is connected.
Note: The Result column in the following section shows the acceptable generator limits for kV,
mA, mAs and ms. Test and measurement tolerances must be accounted for in all
measurements.
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RADIATION. USE Supprimé :
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.
For each step in the tables below, confirm the expected result. The measurement range shown in the Supprimé : Saut de page
Result column includes the generator tolerances only. Test and measurement tolerances must be 4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests
accounted for in all measurements. (Cont)¶

1. Set up the measuring devices to measure kV, N/A
mA/ mAs and ms as per the manufacturers
instructions.
IF HIGH kV EXPOSURES ARE NOT ALLOWED IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, CHECK THE
MAXIMUM kV SETTING THAT HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED. REFER TO “TUBE SELECTION / TUBE
SETUP” IN CHAPTER 3C.

2. Switch ON the generator and after initialization N/A
select the following parameters:
kV = 100, mA = 100, time = 100 ms.
For reference, the specified kV, mA, mAs and ms accuracy is:
kV: ±(5% + 1) kV, ±2 % from 70 to 85 kV.
mA: ±(5% + 1) mA.
mAs: ±(10% + 0.2) mAs.
ms: ±(2% + 0.5) ms ≥ 5 ms, ±(10% + 1) ms from 1 to 4 ms.
In the following steps, except for step 7, the results column shows upper and lower
limits based on the specified tolerances.
3. Make an exposure and verify the following Gen kV = 94-106 kV.
results. Gen mA = 94-106 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.

4. Repeat the previous step but set the values to Gen kV = 61-69 kV.
kV = 65, mA = 200. Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.
5. Repeat the previous step but set the values to Gen kV = 118-132 kV.
kV = 125. Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.
6. Select 75 kV, 200 mA.
Select the exposure times shown below (3
point operation). Verify the mAs shown.
A: 10 ms. A: Gen mAs = 1.6-2.4 mAs.

B: 20 ms. B: Gen mAs = 3.4-4.6 mAs.
C: 63 ms. C: Gen mAs = 11-14 mAs.
D: 100 ms. D: Gen mAs = 17.8-22.2 mAs.
7. Select 75 kV. NOTE: The time associated with
Select the mAs shown below (2 point each mAs setting may vary
operation). depending on generator
configuration.
Measure ms at 75% of the peak kV waveform. Use the ms displayed on the
console as the reference for the
measurements below.
A: 2 mAs. Gen ms per console.

B: 8 mAs. Gen ms per console.
C: 25 mAs. Gen ms per console.
D: 63 mAs. Gen ms per console.
In the above step, note the ms for the pending exposure. Then take the exposure
and confirm that the actual ms = the demanded ms within the allowed tolerance:
The ms accuracy of the generator is:
• ± (2% + 0.5) ms for ms ≥ 5 ms.
• ± (10% +1) ms from 1 to 4 ms.
8. Select 200 mA, 100 ms (3 point operation). Supprimé : 50
Select the kV values shown below.
A: 50 kV. A: Gen kV = 46.5-53.5 kV.

B: 60 kV. B: Gen kV = 56-64 kV.
C: 80 kV. C: Gen kV = 78.4-81.6 kV.
D: 100 kV. D: Gen kV = 94-106 kV.
E: 125 kV. E: Gen kV = 118-132 kV.

9. Select 100 kV, 100 ms (3 point operation). Supprimé : 50
Select the mA values shown below.
Measure mA at 75% of the peak kV waveform.
A: 50 mA. A: Gen mA = 46.5-53.5 mA.

B: 100 mA. B: Gen mA = 94-106 mA.
C: 200 mA. C: Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
D: 400 mA. D: Gen mA = 379-421 mA.
E: 500 mA. E: Gen mA = 474-526 mA.
F: 630 mA F: Gen mA = 598-662 mA.
G: 800 mA G: Gen mA = 759-841 mA.
Note: The higher mA values will not be

available on all generator models and /
or programmed tube types.
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)
For generators with AEC:
1. Review section 3D: AEC Calibration.

2. Recheck the mAs, dose and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps
in chapter 3D to verify the AEC calibration.
3. MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators have a circuit that checks that the AEC ramp is at
least 5% of the AEC reference voltage within 20% of the AEC backup time. This step confirms that
this circuit is working, and that electrical noise on the AEC input does not exceed the 5% threshold.
a) Close the collimator and point the X-ray tube away from the image receptor that has AEC
channel 1 assigned to it. Alternately, close the collimator and cover the image receptor with a
lead apron. Then select this image receptor via the console.
b) Select the AEC mode of operation and 100 mA.
c) Select the maximum kV used on that receptor and minimum density. Select the fastest film
screen if available.
d) Make an AEC exposure and verify that an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is displayed.
• An AEC DEVICE ERROR message indicates that the selected AEC channel has passed
this test. Repeat step 3 for the remaining AEC channels by selecting an image receptor that
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it.
• Go to step 3 (e) if an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is not displayed when testing the
current AEC channel.
e) If the generator runs into backup ms or backup mAs, i.e. if an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is
not displayed, some troubleshooting is required to determine the reason the “5% / 20%” circuit is
not terminating the AEC exposure. Some troubleshooting tips:
• Repeat steps 3 (a) to 3 (d) but select the minimum kV used on the current receptor,
maximum density and the slowest film screen, if available. If an AEC DEVICE ERROR
message results with these settings, this almost certainly indicates that there is sufficient
noise on the AEC input to exceed 5% of the AEC reference voltage under the test conditions
in step 3 (c), where the AEC reference voltage is at its minimum. The cause of excessive
noise on the AEC input now needs to be found.
∗ Measure the AEC reference voltage (PT reference). Then check that noise at the output
of the AEC board (PT ramp) does not exceed approximately 2% of the AEC reference
voltage.
∗ Is the AEC cable routed along with other “noisy” cables i.e. stator cables?
∗ Are the stator cables shielded and properly grounded? Shielded cable is recommended
for the low speed starter and required for the dual speed starter. The shield must be
grounded at the tube end and at the generator end of the cable(s).
∗ Is the AEC cable shielded? The shield should only be grounded at the AEC board in the
generator.
∗ Is the AEC chamber isolated from chassis ground? Some chamber types must be
isolated from equipment ground.
• If the generator runs into backup ms or backup mAs under both sets of test conditions
(maximum kV, minimum density, fastest film screen AND minimum kV, maximum density,
slowest film screen):
∗ Recheck the troubleshooting steps in 3 (e).
∗ Check the PT ramp at TP11 on the generator interface board.
f) Repeat the previous steps for the remaining AEC channels by selecting an image receptor that
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it.
Refer to the section AEC Calibration Range in chapter 3D for background information on film screen
speed vs. D/A output (reference voltage).
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DR INTERFACE)
For MAGNUM C® DR X-ray generators with a DR imaging system, follow the system manufacturer’s
recommendations for system test to verify the DR interface.
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)
Recheck the appropriate steps in chapter 3C to verify the DAP calibration.
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)
The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917 that immediately follows this chapter.
Troubleshooting 5
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
SECTION TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES........................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Operator Messages ...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Limit Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Error Messages............................................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS .......................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.1 Erratic Console Faults................................................................................................................................. 5-15
5.4.0 LED INDICATORS.......................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.1 Dual Speed Starter Board........................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.2 Generator Control Board............................................................................................................................. 5-16
5.4.3 HV Auxiliary Board ...................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.4 EMC Capacitor Board ................................................................................................................................. 5-17
5.4.5 AEC Board .................................................................................................................................................. 5-17
5 Troubleshooting
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The MAGNUM C / MAGNUM C DR series operator’s console will display status messages on the LCD display
during normal and abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and
suggests actions to be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES
5.2.1 Operator Messages
These messages indicate the status of the generator.

MESSAGE MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
(membrane console) (touchscreen console)
ERROR – The Power This could mean that the console is configured to operate with the incorrect
Generator connected to this family of generator or that there is a problem with the serial communication
console is not a CPI CMP between the generator and the console.
200 family device. Unable to Ensure that the console cable is properly connected to the console.
continue… Consult your service representative for further instructions.
DAP NOT READY DAP not ready The optional DAP is in its “warm up” state, and not ready to make DAP
measurements.
INITIALIZATION Displayed during power up sequence.
SPINNING ROTOR Displayed when prep state is active.
X-RAY ON Displayed during an X-ray exposure.
X-RAY READY Generator Ready Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Generator offline… Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator.
Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is
properly connected to the console.
Consult your service representative if this does not solve the problem.
5.2.2 Limit Messages
These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.
MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
AEC DENSITY LIM. Generator AEC density Requested density not programmed. Select another density or
limit program requested density
step.
ANODE HEAT WARN. Anode warning level Anode has exceeded programmed warning Wait for anode to cool.
exceeded level.
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont)

CAL LIMIT Calibration limit: selected Requested parameter not calibrated. Recalibrate X-ray tube or
parameter not calibrated. select a calibrated parameter.
DAP ACCUM. WARN DAP accumulation The accumulated DAP value exceeds the Reset the DAP.
Warning. programmed DAP limit.
GEN DUTY WARNING Generator duty cycle The X-ray generator has reached its duty cycle Re-evaluate technique factors.
limit warning limit. Allow generator to cool if
possible. If exposures are
continued, serious generator
damage may result due to
overheating.
GEN. JOULE LIMIT Generator Joule Limit The requested exposure will exceed the Allow the generator to cool
generators kilo joule heat limit. sufficiently to allow the
requested exposure.
GEN. KV LIMIT Generator kV limit Requested kV not allowed as generator kV limit Check technique if this is seen
has been reached. when APR is used.
GEN. KW LIMIT Generator kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as generator Check technique if this is seen
kW limit has been reached. when APR is used.
GEN. MA LIMIT Generator mA limit Requested mA not allowed as generator mA Check technique if this is seen
limit has been reached. when APR is used.
GEN. MAS LIMIT Generator mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as generator mAs Check technique if this is seen
limit has been reached. when APR is used.
GEN. MS LIMIT Generator ms limit Requested ms not allowed as generator ms limit Check technique if this is seen
has been reached. when APR is used.
INVALID PARAM. Invalid communication Generator detected invalid parameter within Select valid parameter.
parameter. received message, message ignored.
Parameter limit The selected parameter has exceeded its limits. None.
TUBE KV LIMIT Tube kV limit Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit has Release the KV + button.
been reached.
TUBE KW LIMIT Tube kW limit Requested parameter not allowed as tube kW Release the KV + or the mA +
limit has been reached. buttons.
TUBE MA LIMIT Tube mA limit Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit has Release the mA + button.
been reached.
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Cont)

TUBE MAS LIMIT Tube mAs limit Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs Release the mA + or ms + buttons.
limit has been reached.
5.2.3 Error Messages
These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log; previous errors should be reviewed by service
personnel before taking further action.
ERROR MESSAGE MESSAGE PROBLEM ACTION
CODE (membrane console) (touchscreen console)
APR MEMORY APR data has been corrupted. See note 1 near end of this
ERROR section.
The license you entered The touchscreen software Verify and re-enter the license key.
does not appear to be license key has been entered
valid. Please re-enter incorrectly.
your license key
E003 GEN NVRAM ERR. Generator CPU NVRAM Generator CPU NVRAM data Re-initialize generator CPU
error has been corrupted. NVRAM using generator factory
defaults.
E004 GEN RTC ERROR Generator CPU Real Generator CPU real time clock is Reset time and date.
Time Clock error not functioning.
E005 PS CONTACT ERR. Main Contactor Error Unit did not detect proper Measure 600V bus and determine
charging up of 600V bus caps. reason for not charging.
Main contactor will not be closed Check fuses and charging
if bus is not charged. resistors on the power input board.
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.3 Error Messages (Cont)

E006 ROTOR FAULT Rotor Fault Current relays in main and shift Check D42 on the auxiliary board.
circuits were not energized. If not lit, the tube thermal switch is
disconnected. Check the
connections of the back of the
DSS board.f
Check DS 1 on the DSS board, if
lit there is a breakdown in the
starter or stator circuits.
Disconnect stator and retry. This
will isolate where the fault
occurred.
Verify the DIP-switch settings on
the DSS board. They should be
set according to the type of tube
being used.
E007 FILAMENT FAULT Filament Fault Generator has detected filament 1. Check for open filament in X-
current <2 amps. ray tube.
2. Check for poor connections in
the cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on filament
board(s).
E008 KV/MA FAULT kV / mA Fault The generator has detected a 1. If arcing of the X-ray tube is
fault in the kV or mA output suspected, check condition of
during an exposure and tube. The X-ray tube may be
immediately terminated the damaged or simply require
exposure. This may be caused “seasoning”. Refer to chapter 6
by arcing in the X-ray tube, for tube seasoning procedure.
arcing of the HV cables, or HT 2. If failure of HT tank is
tank. suspected, contact product
support.
Troubleshooting 5

E009 PS NOT READY Power Supply Not Ready The generator is not ready to Retry exposure.
make an exposure. If error happens again, wait for
inverter to cool. Check +/- 12 V
lines in power supply section.
E011 HIGH MA FAULT mA During Exposure Generator CPU detected mA Check for actual exposure mA. Do
Too High greater than allowed tolerance. not attempt calibration until
satisfied that generator is exposing
properly.
Recalibrate X-ray tube. *
E012 LOW MA FAULT mA During Exposure Generator CPU detected mA Check for actual exposure mA. Do
Too Low less than allowed tolerance. not attempt calibration until
satisfied that generator is exposing
properly.
Recalibrate X-ray tube. *
E013 MANUAL TERMIN. Manually Terminated Operator released exposure 1. Re-take exposure if necessary.
Exposure switch during exposure. 2. Check for faulty switch contacts
or wiring.
E014 AEC BUT ERROR AEC Back-up Timer - AEC exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated allowed back up time. settings.
2. Check that correct AEC
chamber is energized.
E015 AEC BU MAS ERR. AEC mAs Exceeded - AEC exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated allowed back up mAs. settings.
2. Check that correct AEC
chamber is energized.
E016 TOMO BUT ERROR Tomo Back-up Timer – Tomo exposure exceeded 1. Check exposure technique
Exposure Terminated backup time. settings.
2. Increase tomo backup time, if
necessary.
Troubleshooting 5

E017 NOT CALIBRATED Uncalibrated Exposure Selected mA not calibrated for Recalibrate X-ray tube.
Parameter selected kV.
E018 PREP TIMEOUT Preparation Timeout Generator has been in prep Reduce length of time in prep
state too long. state.
E019 ANODE HEAT LIMIT Anode Heat Limit Selected parameters will cause Reduce parameters or wait for
X-ray tube to exceed its tube to cool.
programmed anode heat limit.
E020 THERMAL INT #1 Thermal Switch Interlock X-ray tube # 1 too hot and its Wait for X-ray tube # 1 to cool.
#1 Error thermal switch has opened.
E022 DOOR INTERLOCK Door Interlock Error Door is open. Close door.
Check J4, pins 9 and 10 on the HV
auxiliary board.
E028 PREP SW CLOSED Prep Input Active During Prep input active during power Check prep switch and input for
Initialization Phase on initialization phase. short circuit.
E029 X-RAY SW CLOSED X-ray Input Active During X-ray input active during power Check X-ray switch and input for
Initialization Phase on initialization phase. short circuit.
E032 CONSOLE COMM Console Communication Generator has detected error in 1. Check console cable for damage
ERR Error communication to console. and proper connection.
2. Turn power off and then on to
reset generator.
E033 GEN BATTERY LOW Warning Lithium Battery Generator detects lithium battery Replace lithium battery.
Voltage Low voltage is low.
E034 +12VDC ERROR +12 V DC Error +12VDC rail is out of tolerance. Check +12VDC rail on the
generator control board.
E035 -12VDC ERROR -12 V DC Error -12VDC rail is out of tolerance. Check -12VDC rail on the
E038 CAL DATA ERROR Calibration Data Corrupt Generator detects corrupt Re-calibrate X-ray tube(s).
Error calibration data.
E039 AEC DATA ERROR AEC data corrupt Generator detects corrupt AEC Reprogram AEC data or set
data. factory defaults.
Troubleshooting 5

E041 REC DATA ERROR Receptor data corrupt Generator detects corrupt Reprogram receptor data or set
receptor data. factory defaults.
E042 TUBE DATA ERR. Tube data corrupt Generator detects corrupt tube Reprogram tube data or set factory
data. defaults.
E043 KV ERROR High voltage error - kV kV detected in non X-ray state. Switch OFF generator. Prevent
detected in non X-ray (This can be seen at the end of further use of generator. Call
state an exposure if the generator is product support.
connected to long, high
capacitance HV cables. They
may have a charge when the
generator expects KV to be 0.)
E044 COMM ERROR Invalid communication Received communication Reset error.
message message not valid and ignored.
E045 NOT SUPPORTED Communication Received message is valid, but Reset error.
message not supported not supported by this system.
E046 MODE INHIBITED Mode Inhibited Received message is valid, but Reset error. An APR technique
not allowed during present state. may be asking for something that
is disabled in the generator setup.
Check the APR programming.
E049 NOT ENABLED Not enabled Requested function not Reprogram to enable function or
programmed to be enabled. change APR to not select a
function.
E050 GEN DATA ERROR Generator limit data Generator detects corrupt Reprogram generator limit data or
corrupt generator limit data. set factory defaults.
E051 AEC DEVICE ERR AEC feedback error (no Generator has detected no, or 1. Check that X-ray tube is
feedback signal insufficient, feedback signal from pointing at correct AEC device.
detected) the AEC device. 2. Check AEC cable for damage
and proper connection.
E052 HIGH SF CURRENT High small focus filament Generator detects small focus Check filament reference and
current error in standby filament current greater than feedback signals. Substitute tube
limits in standby mode. cathode with external load before
testing.
Check filament board.
Troubleshooting 5

E053 HIGH LF CURRENT High large focus filament Generator detects large focus Check filament reference and
current error in standby filament current greater than feedback signals. Substitute tube
limits in standby mode. cathode with external load before
testing.
Check filament board.
E054 AEC OUT OF RANGE AEC reference out of AEC reference has reached a Re-adjust AEC calibration
range maximum or minimum limit. including density to operate within
AEC range (O to 1O VDC).
E055 NO FIELDS ACTIVE No fields selected in AEC enabled but no fields are Select AEC field(s).
AEC mode selected.
E056 NO TUBE SELECTED Receptor Disabled All Receptors have no X-ray Program receptor(s) with tube
tube programmed. number.
E057 AEC STOP ERROR AEC stop signal In AEC stop signal (P.T. stop 1. Check that the P.T. ramp does
wrong state signal) is active low indicating not exceed the P.T. reference
exposure is finished during prep during prep state.
state. 2. Check AEC device for proper
operation.
E058 CONSOLE BUT ERR. Console back-up timer Console has detected exposure Check routing of the console
exceeded backup time and cable, route it away from noise
terminated exposure. sources.
This error can happen if the Call product support.
console communication is
corrupted during an exposure.
E060 EXP. KV HIGH High kV error kV exceeds high kV tolerance 1. Check the output of the kV
level. reference DAC on the
generator CPU board.
2. Measure the output of the
generator with a dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp meter.
Troubleshooting 5

E061 EXP. KV LOW Low kV error kV exceeds low kV tolerance 1. Check the output of the kV
level. reference DAC on the
generator CPU board.
2. Measure the output of the
generator with a dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp meter.
E063 FACTORY DEFAULTS Factory defaults set S3-1 on the generator control Set S3-1 to the NORMAL position.
board is set to the LOAD The generator will not exit the
DEFAULTS position. initialization phase until this is
done.
E065 TOMO DEVICE ERR. Tomo device error. The tomo start signal was not 1. Check the tomo connections to
received within 30 seconds of the generator.
pressing the X-ray switch on the 2. Check the tomo system.
generator.
E067 PS DUTY LIMIT Power supply duty cycle Power supply duty cycle limit Re-evaluate technique factors.
limit exceeded exceeded. Allow generator to cool if possible.
Exposures are inhibited until the
generator has cooled sufficiently.
E071 DAP DOSE OVERFLW DAP overflow error The accumulated DAP value Reset the DAP.
exceeds the display limit.
E072 DAP DEVICE ERR. DAP device error The DAP device is not 1. Check the DAP wiring.
functional. 2. Check the DAP interface board.
E073 DAP DATA ERROR DAP data error The DAP configuration data is Reset factory defaults.
corrupted.
E074 INVERTER 1 ERROR Inverter 1 Error Power circuit failure. Contact product support.
E075 INVERTER 2 ERROR Inverter 2 Error Power circuit failure. Contact product support.
E077 RES. CIRCUIT ERR Resonant Circuit Error HT primary overcurrent 1. Check for arcing of the X-ray
detected. tube.
2. Check for arcing in the HT tank;
if failure of HT tank is
suspected, contact product
support.
Troubleshooting 5

E078 BUCKY1 INTERLOCK Bucky 1 Interlock error Indicates that Bucky 1 is not Check Bucky 1.
ready.
E079 BUCKY2 INTERLOCK Bucky 2 Interlock error Indicates that Bucky 2 is not Check Bucky 2.
ready.
E080 INTERLOCK 1 OPEN Interlock 1 Open Indicates that the interlock 1 is Check the circuits connected to
open. interlock 1. Refer to INPUTS in
chapter 3C.
E081 INTERLOCK 2 OPEN Interlock 2 Open Indicates that the interlock 2 is Check the circuits connected to
open. interlock 2. Refer to INPUTS in
chapter 3C.
E082 KV OVER VOLTAGE kV Over Voltage The output kV exceeded the 1. Auto calibrate tube (per TUBE
maximum allowed kV limit. CALIBRATION in chapter 3C)
*.
2. Consult product support.
E083 ANODE MA FAULT Anode mA Fault The anode current exceeded the 1. Check for arcing of the X-ray
maximum allowed limit. tube.
support.
E084 CATHODE MA FAULT Cathode mA Fault The cathode current exceeded 1. Check for arcing of the X-ray
the maximum allowed limit. tube.
support.
E085 ROTOR MAIN FAULT Rotor Main Fault Indicates that insufficient current 1. Check the X-ray tube stator
was sensed in the stator main wiring.
winding. 2. Check the rotor board.
E086 ROTOR SHFT FAULT Rotor Shift Fault Indicates that insufficient current 1. Check the X-ray tube stator
was sensed in the stator shift wiring.
winding. 2. Check the rotor board.
Troubleshooting 5

CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E087 GEN DUTY WARNING Generator duty cycle Indicates a potential fault with 1. Check the J17 connection on
limit the inverter thermal sensor. the control board.
2. Check the thermal sensor
connection.
3. Replace the thermal sensor
cable, thermal sensor board or
control board as necessary.
E088 GEN DUTY WARNING Generator duty cycle Indicates the inverter has 1. Allow generator to cool if
limit overheated. possible.
2. Check that the inverter cooling
fan is connected.
3. Replace the thermal sensor
cable, thermal sensor board or
control board as necessary.
E100 CAL-MAX MA ERR. Calibration error – Maximum mA has been Repeat auto calibration and/or
maximum mA exceeded exceeded during auto decrease standby current.
calibration.
E101 CAL-DATA LIMIT Calibration error – Auto calibration has exceeded 1. Check to see if the filament
calibration data table data table length due to an standby current is too low.
exceeded excessive number of exposures. 2. Retry auto calibration.
E102 CAL-MAX FIL ERR Calibration error – Maximum filament current for the Confirm if exposures are accurate.
maximum filament selected focus has been If so raise maximum filament
current exceeded reached. current or lower maximum mA.
E103 CAL-MAN. TERM. Calibration error – Operator released exposure Retry auto Calibration.
manually terminated button during auto calibration.
E104 CAL-NO MA Calibration error – no mA No mA feedback detected during Check to see if generator is
auto calibration. exposing.
Call product support.
E105 CAL-MIN MA ERR. Calibration error – Minimum generator mA was Reduce filament standby current
minimum mA not exceeded at start of calibration. on primary and/or secondary
calibrated filament.
Troubleshooting 5

CODE (membrane console) (touch screen console)
E150 TABLE COMM ERR Table communication A communication error has 1. Ensure that the table is
error occurred with the table. powered on.
2. Check the serial
communication cable,
connectors, etc.
E152 Table error The table has sent a table error Refer to the table manufacturers
message to the generator. documentation.
E154 Table emergency stop The table emergency stop has Reset the table emergency stop.
been activated.
E240 OUT OF LABELS The printer is out of labels. Load more labels.
E241 LABEL JAMMED The labels are jammed. Clear the paper jam.
E242 PRINTER ERROR The printer self-diagnostics have Refer to the printer manual.
reported a printer problem.
E243 PRINTER COMM ERR The printer has reported a Try printing again.
communication error.
E244 PLATEN OPEN The paper platen is not Check the platen position.
positioned properly.
E245 PRINTER OFF-LINE The printer is off-line. Put the printer on-line.
Troubleshooting 5
* The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration
routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during
general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA
fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs
recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine
may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the
selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.
1. For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must
be restored via GenWare®. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in
chapter 6.
5.3.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS
5.3.1 Erratic Console Faults
SYMPTOM: In some environments that are “electrically noisy”, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM
data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed.
SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm2) or larger from the ground stud on the rear
of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure “Rear of control console” in chapter 2)
to the ground stud located beside the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND
CONNECTION in the figure “Generator mains connection” in chapter 2.
SYMPTOM: In some situations the touchscreen console may appear “frozen”. i.e. cannot activate any of the
buttons on the touch sensitive screen. This may be a case of the touchscreen calibration being
significantly out of alignment.
SOLUTION: Connect a USB keyboard to the rear of the touchscreen and simultaneously press Alt + C. This
will activate the touchscreen calibration sequence. Refer to Chapter 3C for the procedure to
complete this sequence.
5 Troubleshooting
5.4.0 LED INDICATORS
The following table describes the normal states and functions of the status and diagnostic LEDs on the circuit
boards in the generator.
A change in the state of an LED may be for a brief duration, especially during a fault or an exposure.
5.4.1 Dual Speed Starter Board
LED NORMAL STATE FUNCTION

DS1 Off If lit, indicates that excessive current has been drawn from the
DC Bus. This indicates a DSS fault, if lit without a tube stator
connected.
5.4.2 Generator Control Board
LED SILK NORMAL FUNCTION

SCREEN STATE
DS1 HEARTBEAT Flashing Flashing at 1 Hz to indicate the generator CPU is
functioning.
DS2 TXD Flashing Flashes to indicate that the generator control board is
sending data to the console.
DS3 RXD Flashing Flashes when data is being sent to the generator control
board by the console
DS4 AUX2 TXD Flashing Flashes to indicate that the generator control board is
sending data to the COM port J21
DS5 PREP Off Lit when in PREP state
DS6 XRAY Off Lit when in XRAY state
DS7 AUX TXD Flashing Flashes to indicate that the generator control board is
sending data to J22 on the generator control board.
DS8 AUX RXD Flashing Flashes when data is being received from J22 on the
DS9 READY Off Indicates rotor ready (sufficient stator current)
In low speed mode DS9 is on at prep.
In high speed mode DS9 is on after prep completed.
DS10 HS Off If lit, indicates rotor is in high - speed operation.
DS11 PREP Off Lit when in Prep state.
DS12 AUX1 RXD Flashing Flashes when data is being received from COM port J21 on
the generator control board.
5.4.3 HV Auxiliary Board

DS1 On Indicates presence of the +24 VDC supply.
Troubleshooting 5
5.4.4 EMC Capacitor Board

DS1 On Indicates the DC bus capacitors are charged.
5.4.5 AEC Board
AEC Board 734614

DS1 Off Indicates channel 1 is selected.
DS5 Off Indicates reset / start signal is present.
AEC Board 737992

AEC Board 737998

SCREEN STATE
DS1 CH1 Off Indicates channel 1 is selected.
AEC Board 739389

SCREEN STATE
5 Troubleshooting
Regular Maintenance 6
CHAPTER 6
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.0 SERVICE RECORD.......................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.5.0 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.0 FIRMWARE UPGRADE ................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.6.1 Console Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.6.2 Generator Firmware .................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults.......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.8.0 AEC BOARD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.............................................................................................. 6-13
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING........................................................................................................... 6-13
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning ....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE ............................................................................................................................... 6-15
6 Regular Maintenance
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the MAGNUM C series and the
MAGNUM C DR series of X-ray generators.
The initial installation date and location, and all service performed on the generator, should be
recorded in table 6-1. The record should be as thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that
was performed (all service and a record of all replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person
performing the work should date and sign the record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of
the generator.
If a major component (such as the HT oil tank or a major circuit board) is replaced, recalibration will be
needed. A separate procedure will be included with the spare in those cases, detailing the required
calibration procedure. The acceptance test procedure per Chapter 4 should then be performed prior to
placing the generator back into service.
WARNING: MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL

WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS
EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DICTATED BY CERTAIN

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE
INSTALLATION IS LOCATED. ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND
REGULATIONS WHEN SETTING THE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A MINIMUM OF
5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING ANY
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
6.2.0 SERVICE RECORD
INSTALLED BY: __________________ DATE: ______________ LOCATION: _________________________

Service Date Description of Service Performed By
Table 6-1: Installation and service record
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Description of Preventative Maintenance

Frequency
Every 6 Months AND 1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapor proof compound.
whenever a related 2. Check that all HV connections are tight.
certifiable X-ray
component is replaced: 3. Clean the control console, and main cabinet as needed. REFER TO
6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE PROCEEDING.
4. Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine; refer to Chapter 3C.
5. Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to Chapter 4.
6. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator.
Disconnect the tube thermal switch and verify the correct error
message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited.
7. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this
installation.
8. For units with the touchscreen console, perform touch screen
calibration. Refer to chapter 3C for the proper calibrating procedure.
Every 12 months: 1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
• The exterior of the control console, including the membrane
switch assembly.
• The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet.
• The hand switch (if used) and the cables connecting this to the
console.
• The HT cables.
2. Open the generator main cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.
Every 3 years: Replace the cooling fan in the generator main cabinet.
Every 5 years: 1. Replace the Timekeeper SRAM battery on the generator control
board. Refer to the spares list in chapter 8 for the required part
number. Refer to 6.7.0 for the battery replacement procedure.
6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK
MAGNUM C / MAGNUM C DR X-ray generators use different styles of HT tanks, depending on model. Refer
to figure 6-1. For the HT tank on the right side of figure 6-1, field maintenance is neither necessary nor
possible. The oil is factory-filled to the correct level and the HT tank is then sealed. An air-filled “bladder” within
the tank will expand and contract as the oil volume changes with pressure and temperature changes.
Note: For the HT tank on the right side of figure 6-1, ensure that the vent tube (“VENT” in figure 6-1)
is not blocked.
For the HT tank on the left side of figure 6-1, the oil level in the HT tank can be checked in the field and the oil
can be topped up if necessary. Refer to the steps below.
The insulating oil level in the HT tank does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions. However,
if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows.
1. Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the tank lid.
2. With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.
3. Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level, measured
always from the TOP surface of the lid of the HT tank.
• Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank
lid.
• If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
• If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.
4. Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up
the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil.
• Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is
recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter.
• Turn the syringe upright and expel any trapped air.
• Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the
surface of the oil.
• Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe
remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe.
• Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.
5. Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw is properly seated, tighten the screw
4 turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements, and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs.
6.4.0 OIL FILL / LEVEL CHECK (Cont)
SW1*
SW2*
VENT
OIL FILL
PLUG
CMP200_HT_TANK
Figure 6-1: HT tank oil fill
* Do not adjust SW1 / SW2 on the HT tank (not fitted on all models)
6.5.0 CLEANING
• To clean the console surfaces (without disinfecting) use soap and water. This should be applied using a
lint-free cloth as described below.
• If console surfaces need to be disinfected, use Actichlor or equivalent with a Hypochlorite concentration of
3 to 5%.
∗ Dilute the disinfectant 50/50 with water.
∗ Spray or dampen a lint-free cloth with the diluted disinfectant. The cloth must be damp only, not wet.
∗ Gently wipe the console surfaces with the damp cloth.
• Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
• Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
• Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
• If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
• Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
• If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the
plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
6.6.0 FIRMWARE UPGRADE
WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN

HANDLING THE DUAL-SPEED STARTER EPROM.
NOTE: Proper IC installers / extractors should always be used when removing or installing the dual-
speed starter EPROM.
CAUTION: Applying power to the generator with the EPROM installed incorrectly will damage the
device. Always double-check for the proper orientation.
6.6.1 Console Firmware
1. Ensure that GenWare® MP (version 1.03 or later) is installed on the computer that will be used for the
firmware upgrade. The APELEM-DMS Group flash program utility is part of GenWare® MP.
2. Start with the console (generator) switched off.
3. Connect a null-modem cable from the serial port on the PC that will be used to do the firmware
upgrade to the DATA LINK connector on the console.
4. Copy the updated software file onto the computer’s hard drive. The updated software file may be
distributed by various means including CD, e-mail, etc. There is only one file to be copied, in the
format 123456A.cpm. Note the folder to which this file has been copied.
5. Switch the console on.
6. Enter the GENERATOR SETUP menu. Select DATA LINK, and then select CONNECT TO
GENWARE. Refer to chapter 3C. The LCD on the console will display WAITING FOR DATA….
PLEASE DO NOT TURN OFF POWER.
7. Start GenWare® MP on your PC. The LCD on the console will display GENERATOR LINK
ENABLED-PLEASE DO NOT TURN OFF POWER. This indicates that GenWare® MP is
communicating with the console.
8. If communication is not established, check the COM port setting in GenWare® MP.
• Select Communications Setup on the GenWare® MP toolbar. The Communication Setup

window will open.
• Under COM Port Selection, select the desired COM port, if known.
• Select Apply, and then Close.
• Exit GenWare® MP, then restart GenWare® MP in order for the change to take effect.
• If the required COM port is not known, you may need to select consecutive COM ports by trial and
error. Repeat the previous steps, using a different COM port for each trial.
9. Select Firmware Updater on the GenWare® MP toolbar. The Generator Flash Program
Utility will open. Refer to figure 6-2.
10. Select EXIT on the console to return to the DATA LINK TYPE menu.
11. Select FIRMWARE UPDATE. The LCD on the console will display WAITING FOR
UPDATE…PLEASE DO NOT TURN OFF POWER.
12. On the Generator Flash Program Utility, under CPM Format, ensure that File is selected. This is the
default setting.
Figure 6-2:Console downloader utility
13. Select Browse. A dialog box will open asking you to Choose a file to open. Select the cpm file that
was copied in step 4.
14. The file path and name will be copied into the text field under CPM Format.
15. DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR DURING THE NEXT THREE STEPS. IF POWER IS
LOST DURING THE UPGRADE PROCESS, THE CONSOLE WILL NEED TO BE RETURNED TO
THE FACTORY TO BE REPROGRAMMED.
16. Select Start Download.
17. If the updated software file is able to successfully download to the console, the Progress bar on the
downloader utility window will indicate the progress, and the % indicator will show the percent
completion. The console LCD will display DOWNLOADING UPDATE… PLEASE DO NOT TURN
OFF POWER and it will also indicate the progress via a progress bar.
18. If the message Console type is not matched! is displayed, this indicates that the software file is not
compatible with that console.
19. When the download is finished and the console’s flash memory has been updated, the console will
display UPDATE SUCCESSFUL. The console and computer may then be switched off, and the null-
modem cable may be disconnected.
6.6.2 Generator Firmware
1. Ensure that GenWare® MP (version 1.03 or later) is installed on the computer that will be used for the
firmware upgrade. The flash program utility is part of GenWare® MP.
2. Start with the generator switched off.
3. Connect a null-modem cable from the serial port on the PC that will be used to do the firmware
upgrade to J22 on the generator control board.
4. Copy the updated software file onto the computer’s hard drive. The updated software file may be
distributed by various means including CD, e-mail, etc. There is only one file to be copied, in the
format 123456A.cpm. Note the folder to which this file has been copied.
5. Switch the generator on.
6. Start GenWare® MP on your PC. Then select Firmware Updater on the GenWare® MP
toolbar. The Generator Flash Program Utility will open. Refer to figure 6-2.
7. Switch the generator off. Do not switch off GenWare® MP or close the Generator Flash Program
Utility.
8. Locate jumper JW2 on the generator control board. Temporarily set this to the “upgrade” position
(short across pins 2-3).
9. Switch the generator on again.
10. On the Generator Flash Program Utility, under CPM Format, ensure that File is selected. This is the
default setting.
11. Select Browse. A dialog box will open asking you to Choose a file to open. Select the cpm file that
was copied in step 4.
12. The file path and name will be copied into the text field under CPM Format.
13. DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR DURING THE NEXT THREE STEPS. IF POWER IS
LOST DURING THE UPGRADE PROCESS, THE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD WILL NEED
TO BE RETURNED TO THE FACTORY TO BE REPROGRAMMED.
14. Select Start Download.
15. If the updated software file is able to successfully download to the generator, the Progress bar on the
downloader utility window will indicate the progress, and the % indicator will show the percent
completion.
16. If the computer is unable to communicate with the console, check the COM port setting. Select Setup,
and then try a different Com Port.
17. When the download is finished and the generator’s flash memory has been updated, the Progress bar
and the % indicator on the downloader utility window will indicate 100%.
18. Switch the generator off. Set JW2 on the generator control board back to the “normal” position (short
across pins 1-2).
19. Disconnect the null-modem cable and switch off the computer, if desired. The generator is now ready
for use.
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM
1. Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS
TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
2. Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board.
3. Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1-6.
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults
Resetting the factory defaults will restore the CPU’s flash memory contents to their factory-default state. This
will be required if a major firmware upgrade is done. Minor firmware upgrades, such as revision upgrades, do
not require resetting of the factory defaults.
The factory defaults should not be reset casually as this will erase all custom programming made to
the console or generator.
Note that there are separate procedures to reset the factory defaults for the console CPU and for the
generator CPU.
CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
The procedure for loading console defaults is described in chapter 3C of this manual. Refer to LOAD
CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is described in the section UTILITY MENU, under CONSOLE.
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults (Cont)
GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.
2. Remove the generator cover as described in chapter 2.
3. Locate S3 on the generator control board. Refer to the appropriate figure in chapter 1, in the section
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND MAJOR COMPONENTS.
4. Set S3-1 to the LOAD DEFAULTS (ON) position.
5. Switch ON the generator. After a brief period, the console will pause at the message FACTORY
DEFAULTS.
6. Switch OFF the generator. Reset S3-1 back to the NORMAL (OFF) position.
NOTE: WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE POWERING UP THE
GENERATOR.
7. Reprogram the tube selection to correspond to the connected tube AS PER Tube Selection /
Tube Setup IN CHAPTER 3C OF THIS MANUAL. This information was initialized when the defaults
were selected. This must be done before auto calibration is started, to prevent damage to the X-Ray
tube.
8. PERFORM TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION AS PER Tube Calibration IN CHAPTER 3C OF THIS

MANUAL. This must be done to ensure accuracy of the exposure parameters after the
generator factory defaults have been loaded.
Note: The tube calibration sequence must be completed in full. If tube calibration is interrupted, the
resulting mA / mAs values will be uncalibrated due to invalid calibration data.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults [tube selection, generator limits (including anode
boost time), receptor setup, I/O configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, tube calibration, time & date, error
log, statistics and anode heat units].
NOTE: IF THE FACTORY DEFAULTS HAVE BEEN SET, CRITICAL PARAMETERS (I.E ANODE BOOST
TIME, ETC) MUST BE MANUALLY REPROGRAMMED BEFORE OPERATING THE GENERATOR.
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Generator Control Board

The battery on the generator control board powers the Timekeeper SRAM chip U85 when the generator is
switched off. This contains the real-time clock and the RAM memory that stores the tube heat-unit calculations.
If the battery voltage drops below acceptable limits, the current date and time, along with the tube heat-unit
calculations will be lost when the generator is switched off.
The AEC board will need to be temporarily removed to replace the battery, if the AEC option is fitted. Refer to
6.8.0 for the procedure to remove and replace the AEC board.
1. Locate the battery on the generator control board. The battery is contained in a yellow plastic package
that sits on top of the Timekeeper SRAM chip U85, near the middle of the generator control board.
2. Remove the battery by GENTLY prying between the battery and the generator control board. Be very
careful not to damage the Timekeeper SRAM chip U85 that is directly under the battery.
3. Insert the replacement battery into the socket on U85. Orient the replacement battery such that the dot
on the corner of the battery is near the dot on the generator control board.
4. A stamp error message may be observed at initial turn-on after replacing the battery. This is normal at
this point and will be cleared by setting the date and time in the next step.
5. Reset the date and time, if required. Refer to chapter 3C for the procedure to do this.
6.8.0 AEC BOARD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Switch the generator OFF at the console, and disconnect the mains voltage.
2. Disconnect the AEC chamber connections at the AEC board.
3. Disconnect the AEC control cable at J7 on the generator control board.
4. Locate the four nylon standoffs that secure the AEC board to the control board.
5. Turn the head of each plunger on the nylon standoffs approximately 90° counterclockwise.
6. Gently lift the AEC board off the nylon standoffs. Set the AEC board aside until the required
components underneath are replaced. The AEC board should only be placed on a static-safe surface.
7. Reverse the above steps to replace the AEC board.
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING
Tube conditioning or “seasoning” is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or “seasoning” procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning
The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 40 kV, 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The
tube normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV
station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and
seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining
high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the
following procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.
NOTE: THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,

MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at
high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.
The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, follow steps 2, 4, and 6.
X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear.
1. Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.
2. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
3. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.
5. Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.
7. Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE
The generator’s useful life has been estimated at 10 years from point of sale. This will vary depending on use
and environmental conditions. If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental
regulations must be complied with in regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the
construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this
generator are itemized below:
ITEM
• Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal)
• Solder (lead/tin).
• Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.
• Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.
• Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).
• Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).
• Electrical and electronic components: IC’s, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
WARNING: DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY(S) IN THIS

PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT
AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT IN
TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL
ORDINANCES.
THE LCD IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH HANDLING OR
DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR HANDS,
IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT AFTER WASHING.
Theory of Operation 7
Chapter 7
THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 System ON (MD-0928) ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0927) ............................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0930) ................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 X-ray exposure (MD-0931) ................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0932) ..................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0934)............................................................................................ 7-7
7.2.7 Dual-speed starter (MD-0924) .............................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.8 Low-speed starter (MD-0935) ............................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.9 DAP (MD-0938)................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.10 Temp sensor / programming jumpers (MD-0925)............................................................................... 7-10
7.2.11 Serial communications (MD-0937)...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.12 AEC (MD-0936)................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.13 Digital interface (MD-0926) ................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.2.14 Interconnect diagram (MD-0939) ........................................................................................................ 7-16
7 Theory of Operation .
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the theory of operation for the MAGNUM C® and MAGNUM C® DR X-ray
generators. The theory of operation is organized by functional blocks as per the functional drawings in
chapter 9.
7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION
Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation
in this chapter. Waveforms and voltages at the pertinent test points are typically shown on the last page
of each functional drawing.
7.2.1 System ON (MD-0928)
The generator control board on the MAGNUM C® series of X-ray generators includes power ON and
power OFF switches S1 and S2 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working
on the equipment. These switches are connected in parallel with the generator ON and OFF switches that
are located on the consoles.
Pressing any of the power-ON switches turns on Q5 on the generator control board. This turns on Q6,
holding the collector of Q6 low. This latches Q5 in the “on” state by holding the base of Q5 low when the
ON switch is released.
The collector of Q6 is connected to K1 on the generator control board (MD-0927). K1 will be energized
when the generator is switched on, supplying +24 V to the console.
With Q6 turned on, the base of Q7 is held low, turning Q7 off. The collector of Q7 is connected to the ON
/ OFF control pins on the +5 V, +12 V, and +15 V switching regulators on the generator control board
(MD-0927). With Q7 turned off, the regulator control pins will be pulled to a logic high state, enabling the
low-voltage supplies on the generator control board (MD-0927).
In normal operation, a wire jumper is connected between J2-1 and J2-2 on the generator control board.
An emergency-off switch may be connected to the generator by removing the jumper between J2-1 and
J2-2, and then wiring the emergency-off switch to J2-1 and J2-2. If the connection between J2-1 and J2-2
is open-circuit (i.e. no jumper or an open emergency-off switch), K2 will be de-energized as shown. This
holds the base of Q6 low, preventing Q6 from turning on.
A supervisory circuit (not shown) monitors the +1.2 V, +3.3 V, and +5 V DC supplies on the generator
control board. The supervisory circuit releases the CPU reset line when these low voltage DC supplies
are detected at start-up. This causes the CPU to enter its startup sequence. The CPU will initialize itself,
perform its startup diagnostics, and then output a command via U86 and U83 on the generator control
board to energize soft-start contactor K2 on the H.V auxiliary board. The CPU will then wait for
approximately 10 seconds for the output of opto-coupler U5 on the H.V auxiliary board to ramp high,
indicating that the DC bus capacitors are charged. If U5 indicates proper DC bus capacitor charging
within the allotted time, the CPU will output a command to U86 and the driver consisting of Q28, Q29, etc
to energize the main power contactor via the H.V auxiliary board. Soft-start contactor K2 will be de-
energized after a maximum of 10 seconds, as the soft-start circuit is not needed once the DC bus
capacitors are charged.
If opto-coupler U5 on the H.V auxiliary board does not indicate normal DC bus capacitor charge within the
allowed time limit, an error message will be presented and the turn-on sequence will be aborted.
Pressing any of the power-OFF switches turns on Q4 on the generator control board. This turns off Q5,
turning off Q6. This will de-energize K1 on the generator control board, removing the +24 V supply from
the console. With Q6 turned off, Q7 will turn on, taking the ON / OFF control lines on the +5 V, +12 V, and
+15 V regulators low. This disables the switching regulators, shutting down the generator control
functions. The main power contactor will open, removing the AC input to the mains rectifier assembly.
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0927)
Sheet 1 applies to single-phase generators:

Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of the
auxiliary transformer via F8 and F9 on the H.V auxiliary board. This will establish the +/-35 V supplies via
F1 and D1, and the +24 V supply via F2 and F3, and D3 / D4.
When the generator is switched on as described in 7.2.1, +24 V is supplied to the consoles via K1 and F2
on the generator control board. For the membrane console, the +24 V supply is regulated to +5 V and -20
V on the console board (page 4). The touchscreen console is powered from the +24 V supply; on-board
regulators step this down as required by the internal circuits. The low voltage DC supplies on the
generator control board are also established when the generator is switched on, as per 7.2.1.
K2 on the H.V. auxiliary board will be energized when the soft-start command is received from the CPU.
This will pre-charge the DC bus capacitors via F4 and F5, K2, D5 and series current limiting resistors. The
DC bus charging current flows through R17, developing sufficient voltage drop to energize U5. At the start
of DC bus capacitor charging, current through R17 is at its maximum. U5 will be on at all times except
near the zero crossing of the AC current waveform. The output of U5 will as per figure 1 on page 5 of MD-
0927 (early charging). As the bus capacitors approach a fully charged state, the current in R17 will
approach zero. U5 will only be on near the peaks of the AC current waveform, and the output of U5 will as
per “nearly finished charging” in figure 1 on page 5 of MD-0927. When the CPU detects the “nearly
finished charging” state via U5, the main power contactor and the cooling fan will be energized. The line
voltage is then rectified by the chassis-mounted mains rectifier assembly to produce approximately 320
VDC for 230 VAC input. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board to produce the drive for the
primary of the HT transformer as described in 7.2.5.
LED DS1 on the H.V. auxiliary board confirms the presence of the +24 VDC supply, and DS1 on the EMC
capacitor board indicates that the DC bus is charged.
The BUCKY DRIVE output may be configured for +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC. Connecting E11 to E5
and E7 to E8 supplies +24 VDC, wiring E9 to E5 and E7 to E8 supplies 110 VAC, and jumpering E12 to
E5 and E7 to E8 outputs 220 VAC.
K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board will be energized when the +12 V supply on the generator control board is
present, supplying +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC to the Bucky drive circuits (section 7.2.3).
The low-speed starter boost voltage is jumper selectable to be 120 or 240 VAC. Connecting E16 to E15
selects 240 V boost, and jumpering E14 to E15 selects 120 V boost.
As described in 7.2.1, the +5 V, +12 V, and +15 V switching regulators become operational when the
generator is switched on. The –12 V, +1.2 V, and +3.3 V supplies are derived from the +12 V and +5 V
supplies, respectively.
Sheet 2 applies to three phase 208 / 230 V generators:

With respect to MD-0927, the operation of three phase 208 / 230 V generators is similar to that described
above for single-phase generators.
Sheet 3 applies to three phase 400 / 480 V generators:

With respect to MD-0927, the operation of three phase 400 / 480 V generators is similar to that described
for single-phase generators.
The rectified DC bus voltage for 400 VAC units will be approximately 560 VDC, or approximately 670
VDC for 480 VAC units.
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
Refer to MD-083, sheet 4:

Sheet 4 applies to all units. For the membrane console, the +24 V supply is regulated to +5 V, +3.3 V,
+1.2 V, and -20 V via F1 on the console board. The console board contains a 300 VAC (approximately)
power supply that drives the cold-cathode fluorescent lamp in the LCD display assembly. This power
supply is driven from the +5 VDC supply.
The touchscreen console is powered from the generator’s +24 V supply; on-board regulators step this
down via F3 on the touch-screen board as required by the internal circuits.
Sheet 4 also shows the low-voltage DC power supply connections to the filament board and to the AEC
board.
7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0930)
+24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC for the BUCKY DRIVE is available when K6 on the H.V. auxiliary board
is closed as described in 7.2.2. The 24 VAC and 24 VDC supplies are present at all times that the AC
mains is energized. The 24 VAC supply is fused by F11 and brought out at J11-6 and J11-5 on the H.V.
auxiliary board (maximum 150 watts for collimator use), and the 24 VDC supply is fused by F12 and
made available at J11-2 and J11-1 for system locks use (maximum 45 watts).
Bucky relays K1 and K3 on the H.V. auxiliary board are driven by U83 and U86 on the generator control
board. When K1 or K3 is energized, +24 VDC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC is provided at J2-7 or J4-1 on the
H.V. auxiliary board to start Bucky 1 or Bucky 2.
The Bucky 1 or Bucky 2 ready signal (a contact closure is needed) will energize opto coupler U2 or U6
respectively. The Bucky-ready status from U2 / U6 is conveyed to the CPU via data buffer U89, where it is
processed to determine if the Buckys are ready to make an X-ray exposure.
During an X-ray exposure, the base of Q31 on the generator control board is pulled high via U19. This will
turn on Q31, energizing K7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. K7 provides a dry contact closure when
energized, which may be used to control the room light.
The H.V. auxiliary board also contains 4 interlock inputs. These include interlocks 1 and 2, the door
interlock, and the X-ray tube thermal switch interlock. Each of these interlock inputs requires a contact
closure to indicate a normal condition, with a closed interlock energizing the associated opto coupler U1,
U3, U4, or U9 respectively. The outputs of the opto-couplers are read by the CPU via data buffer U89 on
the generator control board, where the information is used to determine the readiness of the associated
input.
7.2.4 X-ray exposure (MD-0931)

The PREP and X-RAY switches on the membrane console are connected in parallel with the console-
mounted hand switch, as shown on drawing MD-0931. The PREP and X-RAY switches on the
touchscreen console, the X-ray mini-console, and on their associated hand switches are connected to the
inputs of U8 and U9 on the generator control board, respectively.
Pressing PREP on the membrane console will energize opto coupler U16 on the console board. If U16 is
energized, or one of the PREP switches on the touchscreen console, X-ray mini-console, or on the
associated hand switch is pressed, U8 on the generator control board will be energized. The output of
U16 on the console board is read by the console CPU (FPGA), and the output of U8 on the generator
control board is read by the generator CPU via data buffer U71. A prep request will be recognized if the
output of U16 on the console board (membrane console only) and / or U8 on the generator control board
is low. DS5 on the generator control board will light to indicate that a prep request has been made.
7.2.4 X-ray exposure (Cont)
Pressing X-RAY on the membrane console will energize U17 on the console board. If U17 is energized,
or one of the X-RAY switches on the touchscreen console, X-ray mini-console, or on the associated hand
switches is pressed, U9 and U7 on the generator control board will be energized. The output of U17 on
the console board is read by the console CPU, and the output of U7 on the generator control board is
read by the generator CPU via data buffer U71. An X-ray request will be recognized if the output of U17
on the console board (membrane console only) and / or U7 on the generator control board is low. When
the generator CPU receives an X-ray request, the emitter of U9 on the generator control board will be
pulled low via U86 and driver U83, assuming that there are no errors that would prevent an exposure.
With U9 on the generator control board energized, and its emitter held low, the collector of U9 will be held
low.
Jumpers JW1 and JW2 on the console board (membrane consoles) may be removed to disable the
console PREP and X-RAY buttons. If these jumpers are removed, PREP and X-RAY requests may be
made via a hand switch connected to J3 on the membrane console.

The collector of opto-coupler U9 on the generator control board (page 1) is OR’ed with several other
signals on the generator control board, all of which must be at the correct logic level in order to be able to
make an X-ray exposure.
• The base of Q27 on the generator control board must be held low to allow an exposure. This requires
the following conditions:
∗ The output of U65 must be low, indicating that no fault has been detected by the CPU.
∗ The X-RAY ENABLE command from U9 (page 1) or U11 (MD-0926) must be low.
∗ The HT tank must be connected, holding the line connected to TP17 low.
• The base of Q26 must be held low by U67, indicating a valid X-ray request.
With the base of Q26 and Q27 held low, Q26 and Q27 will be off. The line connected to TP16 on the
generator CPU board will then be pulled high via R91, pulling the control inputs on AND gates U26A and
U26B on the generator control board high, as described in 7.2.5.
Lastly, with the output of U67 on the generator control board low, the collector of Q21 will be high. This
turns Q22 off, isolating Q22 from the kV demand circuit, part of 7.2.5.
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0932)

When there is no X-ray request by the CPU, the RAD INHIBIT line from MD-0931 will be pulled high. This
circuit is described in 7.2.4. When the RAD INHIBIT line is high, the junction of R131 / R123 on the
generator control board will be held high (+12 V). This ensures that the error amplifier cannot generate
any kV demand.
When a valid X-ray request is received, the RAD INHIBIT command is removed and the D/A converter
U43 will produce the required kV reference voltage. The kV reference voltage is buffered by U38A,
inverted by U48A, and then summed with the positive going kV feedback signal from U51B at the input of
error amplifier U25A. Error amplifier U25A will regulate the kV by producing a DC output that is
proportional to the difference between the kV reference voltage and the kV feedback voltage.
The kV demand signal and the kV feedback signals are also processed by U72A, U72B, and Q25. The
result is an HV ON signal at the output of Q25 that is high when the actual kV is greater than
approximately 75% of the demanded kV.
The HT primary current is sampled by T2 and rectified by D33, D36, D38, and D42 to produce a current
limit signal (a negative voltage proportional to the primary current). This is applied to the input of U25B,
where it will limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds safe limits. This current limit signal is also
fed to comparator U69, which generates a fault pulse if excessive primary current is sensed. This fault
pulse is fed to the CPU via U78, immediately causing the gate drive to be inhibited, preventing inverter
damage due to the over-current condition.
The output of U25B swings increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is
buffered and inverted by U33A, and then applied to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator).
The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses
is inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T1
synchronizes the start of the pulses.
The gate-drive pulses from the VCO are fed to AND gates U26A and U26B. The control inputs of U26A
and U26B are held high if all logic conditions to allow an X-ray exposure are satisfied. The drive pulses
are inverted and level shifted by U27A and U27B, and then applied to the gates of the MOSFET inverter
consisting of Q16, Q17, Q19, and Q20 on the generator control board. These MOSFETS form a full
bridge inverter circuit that outputs high frequency gate pulses to the power MOSFETS on the inverter
board(s) via J5 and / or J13 on the generator control board.
The differential kV feedback voltage from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board.
This is applied to the inputs of U51A and U56B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R218.
The differential feedback signals are then summed by U51B. The output of U51B supplies a kV feedback
signal to error amplifier U25A as described earlier in this section. The kV feedback signal is also supplied
to the CPU via A/D converter U45, which monitors the output voltage during an exposure. Lastly, the kV
feedback signal is fed to the kV over-voltage comparator U55, which will send a fault pulse to the CPU via
U78 if a kV over-voltage condition is detected.
The generator control board also contains circuits that guard against an inverter “shoot-through” fault. If a
shoot through fault is detected, T3 and / or T4 on the generator control board will supply a current pulse
that is detected by comparator circuits U70 and U75. The relevant comparator will then generate a fault
pulse that is passed to the CPU via U78, causing the gate drive to be inhibited immediately, thus
preventing inverter damage due to this fault.
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (Cont)
Refer to MD-0932, sheet 2 and 3:

The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (32 and 40 kW generators
use one inverter board, 50 kW and 65 kW units use two inverter boards). The output of the inverter
board(s) drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the resonant / sharing inductors and the resonant
capacitor and a current transformer that samples the HT primary current.
The HT tank has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their
own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode
voltage, 0 to 62.5 or 75 kV. The cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -62.5 or -75 kV. The
anode and cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback
voltages. The kV feedback from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board as described
earlier in this section.
The HT tank is not field-repairable. Defective HT tanks must be replaced as a complete unit with the
factory-specified replacement.
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0934)

D/A converter U42 on the generator control board will produce the filament reference voltage (1 volt = 1
amp of filament current) when the CPU receives a valid Prep command. This is buffered by U32B, and
then routed to the filament supply board via J14 on the generator control board.
The filament reference voltage is fed to U1B on the filament supply board. The output of U1B is summed
with the output of current limit clamp U1A. The filament current limit is set at 5.5 or 6.5 amps via JW1; it is
shown set to limit at 5.5 amps on MD-0934.
Next, the filament reference voltage is summed with the filament feedback voltage at the input of error
amplifier U4B. When the reference voltage is greater than the feedback voltage, the output of U4B rises,
causing the pulse width at the output of U3 to increase.
PWM (pulse-width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETS Q6, Q7, Q12, and Q13, which form a full bridge
inverter. The MOSFETS convert the + and - 35 V supplies to high frequency AC to drive the primary of
the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency, approximately 40 kHz, via C22, the primary
of T1, large / small filament select relay K1, J5 on the filament supply board, and J4 on the tank lid board.
The secondaries of the filament transformers provide high voltage isolation, and drive the filaments via
the filament mounting board and the cathode high voltage connector as shown.
The output of filament current sense transformer T1 on the filament supply board is rectified by D12, D13,
D27, and D28, and fed to RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The output
of the RMS converter drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback is
calibrated such that 1 volt = 1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage
(representing actual filament current) appears at the input of buffer U2B, at the summing input of error
amplifier U4B as described earlier in this section, and at the input of comparator U2A.
The output of U2B is brought to J2-2 on the filament supply board. The filament current feedback signal is
then converted to a digital signal by A/D converter U45 on the generator control board in order that the
filament current can be monitored by the CPU.
The output of U2A will be low if a filament fault is present, i.e. filament current less than approximately 1.7
amps. This will turn Q1 on the filament supply off, taking its collector high. The output of Q1 is taken to
the CPU via U78 on the generator control board. If low filament current is detected, X-ray exposures will
not be possible, and a filament fault message will be displayed.
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)

When an exposure is in process, X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and
cathode boards. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube
current, is taken to J9 on the generator control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards
clamp the voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs.
The grounded mid-secondary circuit in the HT tank is connected to the mA test jacks E17 / E18 on the
tank lid board. Transient protectors on the tank lid board clamp the voltage across the mA measuring
device during high voltage arcs, and prevent the voltage at E17 and E18 from rising above approximately
15 volts if the ma test jack is removed and no measuring device is connected.
The anode mA feedback that appears at J9-1 and J9-2 on the generator control board is scaled
approximately 0.4 volts = 100 mA of anode current, and is applied to the input of differential amplifier
U68B.
The output of U68B is taken to comparator U47, which detects high anode mA. U47 will send a fault pulse
to the CPU via U78 if an anode over-current condition is detected, causing the kV output to be inhibited
immediately, thus preventing generator damage due to the over-current fault.
The output of U68B is also fed to the input of U68A, which provides a scaled mA feedback voltage. The
mA is calibrated by R160 such that 1 volt = 100 mA at the output of U68A. The output of U68A is taken to
the data bus via A/D converter U45, and also to voltage amplifier U74A, which provides a better quality
(higher gain) feedback signal at low anode currents. The mA feedback information is used by the CPU to
regulate the X-ray tube mA and to perform mA monitoring functions during exposures.
The cathode mA feedback at J9-4 and J9-3 on the generator control board is used for cathode over-
current detection only. The cathode mA feedback is fed to the input of differential amplifier U56A. The
output of U56A is taken to comparator U50, which detects high cathode mA. U50 will send a fault pulse to
the CPU via U78 if a cathode over-current condition is detected, inhibiting the X-ray exposure, thus
preventing generator damage due to the over-current fault.
7.2.7 Dual-speed starter (MD-0924)
The generator CPU decides whether the pending exposure should be made at low-speed or high-speed
operation. Based on this determination, the CPU will output the high-speed / low-speed command via
U86 and U83 on the generator control board. The output of U83 lights DS10 on the generator control
board, and energizes U12 on the dual-speed starter board. The dual-speed starter CPU monitors the
output of U12, and sets low or high-speed operation based on the state of U12.
The prep command is also output by the generator CPU and latched by U86. Driver U83 lights DS11 on
the generator control board, and energizes U13 on the dual-speed starter board. The dual-speed starter
CPU monitors the output of U13, and starts the boost cycle when the output of this opto coupler is low.
K1 on the dual-speed starter board will close at the start of the prep cycle. K4 will close at the same time
that K1 is energized. This ensures that the high voltage is isolated from the stator terminals at all times
except during normal operation of the dual-speed starter.
The dual-speed starter contains an inverter, Q1 to Q4, which produces the required stator current at 50,
60, 150, or 180 Hz by precisely switching the 560 / 650 volt DC bus. The dual speed starter CPU controls
the switching of the inverter via the driver circuit consisting of U1-U9 and T1-T4, etc. The setting of DIP
switch SW1 determines all stator drive parameters (boost voltage and boost time, run voltage, brake
voltage and brake time, etc).
7.2.7 Dual-speed starter (Cont)
The modulated output from the inverter is fed to the common stator terminal via one leg of the inverter
and via K4. The shift and main currents are taken from the other leg of the inverter via K5 and K6. K1-A
switches the main current, and K1-B switches the shift current.
The following description applies to dual-speed starters 901297-12, 13, 16 and 901298-12, 13, 16 only.
Relay K3 is held open for high-speed operation and closed for low-speed operation. The dual-speed
starter will automatically set K7 open or closed based on the setting of DIP switch SW1, selecting one-of-
two possible capacitor values. The available capacitor values are shown in the tables on MD-0924.
The operation of dual-speed starter 901297-15 and 901298-15 is similar, except that relay K7 is always
held open during low-speed operation, providing 28μF of low-speed capacitance. It is also possible to
configure this starter to provide 15.5μF of low-speed capacitance by removal of one of the low speed
capacitors. One-of-two possible value of high-speed capacitance is automatically selected using K7.
The operation of dual-speed starter 901297-02 and 901298-02 is similar, except that K7 is not used,
resulting in only one value each of low-speed capacitance (60μF) and high-speed capacitance (20μF).
The DC bus current is monitored by a circuit consisting of CS1, U10, U11, etc. If a problem such as a
ground fault in the stator circuit is detected, a latch in the inverter fault detector circuit will be set. This will
light DS1 and inhibit the drive pulses for the inverter Q1 to Q4.
The contacts of current sense relays K5 and K6 will be closed when the main and shift currents are above
preset limits. With K5 and K6 closed, Q5 on the dual-speed starter board is supplied with base current.
This will turn on Q5, whose output is monitored by the dual-speed starter CPU. If normal stator current is
detected, the CPU will output a logic low signal at J1-10 on the dual-speed starter board. This stator-
ready signal drives opto-coupler U88 on the generator control board, turning U88 on in the normal (no
stator-current fault) state. DS9 will be on at prep in low speed mode, and on after prep is finished in high-
speed mode. The generator CPU reads the output of U88 via U87 on the generator control board. A
stator fault condition will immediately remove the generator ready and drive-enable signals, inhibiting kV
output. Additionally, the dual-speed starter CPU will open K1 and K4 on the dual-speed starter board,
removing the stator drive.
7.2.8 Low-speed starter (MD-0935)
120 or 240 VAC is supplied to the low-speed starter via F6 and F7 on the H.V. auxiliary board. This
voltage is jumper-selectable on the H.V. auxiliary board; refer to MD-0927 for details.
The coil of K4 on the H.V auxiliary board is connected in parallel with the main power contactor, and
therefore is energized when the main power contactor is energized after completion of the generator
power-on sequence. This is described in 7.2.1.
When a Prep request is made, K5 on the H.V. auxiliary board is energized by the CPU via U86 and driver
U83 on the generator control board for the ROTOR BOOST duration that was selected in the
GENERATOR LIMITS menu (chapter 3C) in order to boost the rotor. The rotor is allowed to coast briefly,
and then boosted again for approximately 500 milliseconds every 5 seconds during Prep in order to
maintain normal anode rotation. During the boost cycles (when K5 is energized), 120 or 240 VAC is
applied directly to the main winding and to the shift winding on the stator via the chassis-mounted phase
shift capacitor.
The main and shift currents flow through R20 and R19 on the H.V. auxiliary board, respectively,
energizing opto couplers U7 and U8 if there is sufficient stator current. Normally, the opto couplers will
only conduct during the peaks of the stator current. This is reflected in the output waveform of the opto
couplers at TP8 and TP7 as shown on page 2 of MD-0935. If there is low (or no) stator current, U8 and /
or U7 will not be energized. The output of the opto couplers at TP8 / TP7 will then be pulled high (+5 V).
This steady-state condition (+5 V) is detected by the CPU via U89 on the generator control board, where
it is recognized as a rotor fault.
7.2.9 DAP (MD-0938)
The DAP circuits consist of switching circuits to control the outputs at J4, and circuits to feed the DAP
pulses back to the CPU. Data latch U19 and driver U20 switch the +5 V and +15 V supplies via Q2, Q3,
and Q1 as required to control and test the DAP chamber. For DAP chambers with differential outputs,
JW14 is jumpered from pins 2-3, thus connecting the differential output from the DAP chamber directly to
the input of U1. For DAP chambers with a single-ended output, JW14 must be jumpered on pins 1-2. This
connects the output of the DAP chamber to the input of opto-coupler U94. This provides increased noise
immunity for single-ended DAP chambers, as the signal must be greater than approximately 2 V in order
to turn on the opto-coupler. The single-ended output of U94 is then connected to the input of U1.
The RS-485 driver, U1, sends single-ended (not differential) pulses to the CPU via U78. The DAP pulses
are counted by, and the related calculations are performed by the generator CPU.
7.2.10 Temp sensor / programming jumpers (MD-0925)
The inverter temperature sensor is mounted on a thermal sensor board that is mounted on one of the
inverter heat sinks. The output of the inverter temperature sensor is connected to J17-2 on the generator
control board. The temperature sensor, which has an output of 10mV / °C, is connected to the input of
U79A. The output of U79A is scaled 100mV / °C; this is divided by R162 / R163 to bring the signal within
the useable range of A to D converter U45. The digital output of U45 is read by the generator CPU, which
will inhibit further exposures if it calculates that the next exposure will exceed a safe inverter temperature.
The output of U79A is also connected to a fan voltage circuit controlled by voltage comparator U97. When
the voltage at TP34 is less than 3.5V, the output of U97 is high. The logic high is fed into the fan voltage
regulator circuit putting the voltage at J28-1 between 6.5 and 7 volts (driving the cooling fan at low
speed).
If the voltage at TP34 reaches 3.5V (approx. 35°), the output of U97 goes low. The logic low is fed into
the fan voltage regulator circuit, which will drive the voltage at J28-1 to approximately 12.5 volts (driving
the cooling fan at high speed).
MD-0925 also shows programming jumpers JW12, JW2, and JW13. JW12 tells the CPU if the generator
has a cooling fan. JW-12 should be jumpered from pins 2-3 for generators with fans, and pins 1-2 if a
new-style generator control board is used to upgrade or repair older generators without fans. Note that if
the jumper is in position 1-2 (no fan), the generator duty cycle will be reduced.
JW2 is used to upgrade the generator firmware. This is set to JW2 pins 1-2 for normal operation, and pins
2-3 to upgrade the firmware. JW13 is factory-set, and should not be reconfigured in the field.
7.2.11 Serial communications (MD-0937)
When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are finished, the console will attempt to
communicate with the generator. The console will send data to the generator, and then wait for a
response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue. If the
console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error message will
be displayed.
When the membrane console is sending data to the generator, DS2 on the console board will flash. DS3
on the generator control board will flash when data is being received by the generator control board from
the membrane console or the touchscreen console. DS2 on the generator control board and DS3 on the
membrane console board (if applicable) will flash to indicate that the generator control board is sending
data to the console.
U11 on the console board (membrane consoles) is a RS-232 driver that drives serial port J4. DS5 and
DS4 on the console board will flash to indicate that data is being sent to, and received from the serial
port.
The generator control board includes two serial communications ports. These include J21, which is an
RS-232 communications port, and J22, which is used for optional features.
DS1 on the console board (membrane consoles) and on the generator control board will flash at a
consistent 1 Hz rate if the related CPU is operational.
7.2.12 AEC (MD-0936)

Sheet 1 shows the circuits on the generator control board that provide the interface between the
generator CPU and the AEC board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select signals, the start signal,
and the field select signals to the AEC board via U90 and driver U91. The AEC ramp (PT RAMP) from the
AEC board is voltage-amplified by a factor of approximately 20 by U66B and compared to the AEC
reference voltage by U73. The output of U73 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the
AEC ramp is approximately 5% of the AEC reference voltage. This step change at the output of U73 is
detected by the CPU via U71, and is used by the CPU to generate an error message if the trajectory of
the AEC ramp is such that the AEC exposure will exceed the AEC backup time.
The AEC reference voltage is generated by D/A converter U44, buffered by U38B, and fed to comparator
U73 and to the AEC board via J7-10. The magnitude of the AEC reference voltage is determined by the
CPU (based on the upcoming exposure), and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts.
The PT stop signal is generated by the AEC board when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the
AEC reference voltage, and indicates that the desired AEC exposure should be terminated. The PT stop
signal is routed via U71 to the CPU, where it will terminate the AEC exposure immediately when this
signal is received.

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 734614, used with various ionization type AEC
chambers. The AEC chambers are connected to J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board
will either be fitted with 12 pin in-line connectors, or 15 pin ‘D’ connectors, depending on the application.
The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the
AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals originate on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber
may be active at one time, and DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board indicate which channel is active. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D, and U3F; and connected to the control inputs of
the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the
selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal
to preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a
non-inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output, and as an inverting
amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output.
The start signal also originates on the generator control board. This signal, when active, will light DS5 on
the AEC board. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low at the
output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample and
hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other times.
The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during standby
operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
7.2.12 AEC (Cont)
The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog
switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel
will be closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4
corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage
depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an
integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output
voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC
chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch
opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal.
The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp
voltage is processed by U4A and U4B, and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit
consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the
chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the
phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is
disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum
short-time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected
to U2B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The START, and LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals are brought to the AEC chambers via
J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and J4/J14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly output the active
low signal from the generator control board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output +12 V or +24 V if
the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high outputs, the start,
right, middle, or left field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4, respectively. The active low
signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either +12 V or +24V (depending on
factory configuration) at the collector when active.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the left field select signal to pin 6 and the right field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the left field select signal to pin 2 and the right field select
signal to pin 6.
The AEC board also contains a DC to DC converter that produces +45 V, + or - 300 V, and +500 VDC.
The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79, and associated
components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors, and + or - 300 V is
permanently connected to J1 to J4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either
+ or - 300 V or +500 V to J11 to J13, and to a second pin on J1 to J4 (in addition to the + or - 300 V fixed
output).

This page shows the input circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. This board is used with solid-state
AEC chambers. The AEC chamber outputs are connected to the anode and cathode inputs of J1/J11,
J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will be fitted either with 7 pin in-line connectors, or with
circular style connectors, depending on the application. U2A, U2B, U8A, U8B, U16A, U16B, U3A, U3B,
U9A, U9B, U17A, and U17B are extremely high gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the
AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps, typically) to a useable voltage.
7.2.12 AEC (Cont)
The output of each preamplifier is connected to an analog switch used for field selection. Selecting the
desired field closes the corresponding analog switch, connecting the output of that preamplifier to the
summing node at the junction of R69, R9, R22 for channel 1, R40, R47, R55 for channel 2, R70, R11,
R23 for channel 3, and R41, R49, R56 for channel 4.
JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields. Jumpering pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers (JW1, JW2 for
channel 1, JW3, JW4 for channel 2, JW5, JW6 for channel 3, JW7, JW8 for channel 4) selects the normal
left-right orientation, and jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector jumpers reverses the left-right field
selection.
Selecting an active AEC channel closes U4D for channel 1, U14D for channel 2, U5D for channel 3, and
U15D for channel 4. The output from the selected AEC channel will then be passed on to the signal
processing circuits as shown on the next sheet of MD-0936.

This shows the signal processing circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. The AEC channel 1 to
channel 4 outputs are connected to the inverting input on U12A, which is a variable gain amplifier where
the gain of this stage depends on the number of AEC fields that are selected. With one field selected, the
gain of this stage will be at its maximum; and with three fields selected, the gain of this stage will be
divided by three. The variable gain of U12A compensates for the variable voltage output of the input
preamplifiers, thus keeping the signal output from U12A constant relative to the number of fields that are
selected.
The output of U12A feeds the inverting input of U11B. A sample and hold circuit is connected to the non-
inverting input on U11B. This circuit samples any electrical noise at the output of U12A during standby
operation, and subtracts this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U11B is proportional to the AEC chamber output only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U11B is connected to the input of U11A via the gain adjustment pots R1 to R4 and the
analog switches for channels 1 to 4.
U11A is an integrating amplifier where C31 starts to integrate the AEC voltage when the AEC exposure
starts. This is accomplished by opening the analog switches that are in series with R35, R38, R42, and
R59 at the start of the exposure. This produces a ramp whose slope is proportional to the input voltage at
U11A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section, and fed to comparator U10 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference voltage.
The output of U10 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the
reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be
active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-
select signals are inverted by U6, and then connected to the control inputs on analog switches U4D,
U14D, U5D, and U15D (sheet 3) for AEC channel selection and to the analog switches in series with R1
to R4 to select the required gain pot.
The field select signals from the generator control board are also active low. These signals are inverted
by U6, and then connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U12A, and to the analog
switches that select the fields on the previous sheet.
The start signal from the generator control board is inverted by U6 on the AEC board, and then inverted
again by Q2. The output of Q2 is connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U11A. The
extra inversion provided by Q2 is required to open those analog switches during an exposure.
7.2.12 AEC (Cont)

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 737998, used with ionization AEC chambers. The AEC
chambers are connected to J1 to J4. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of
analog switches U1A to U1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-
select signals.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may be
active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The chamber-
select signals are inverted by U6, and connected to the control inputs of the analog switches described in
the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC channel will be closed
when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to the input of U7A.
The start signal also exits from the generator control board. This is inverted by U6, and then inverted
again by Q4 and Q5. The output of Q5, when active, opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U8A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U7A during standby
The output of U8A connects to the common inputs of the analog switches that are in series with gain pots
R11 to R14. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch
corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U8A to the AEC gain
adjustment potentiometer R11 to R14 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be
a ramp, is now fed to the input of U8B. The analog switch in the feedback loop of U8B is opened during
an exposure, allowing the AEC ramp to appear at the outputs of U4A and U4B.
The AEC ramp output from U4B is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as
described earlier in this section, and fed to comparator U9 on the AEC board where it is compared to the
AEC reference voltage. The output of U9 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC
ramp equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control
board.
The START signal from Q4, and the LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals from Q1, Q2, Q3
respectively are brought to the AEC chambers via J1 to J4.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the left field select signal to pin 6 and the right field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the left field select signal to pin 2 and the right field select
signal to pin 6.

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 739389, used with various 3-of-5-field ion chambers.
The AEC chambers are connected to J1 and J2. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to
the input of analog switches U1C and U1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by
the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals originate on the generator control board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber
may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 and DS2 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U6. The signals CH 1 and CH 2 are connected to the control
inputs of the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to
the selected AEC channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to
the input of U7A.
7.2.12 AEC (Cont)
The channel 3 and channel 4 select lines from U6 are inverted by Q6 and Q7. The outputs of Q6 and Q7
are redesignated as the PORTRAIT and INVERTED signals, respectively. These signals select four
different combinations of the L-M-R fields from the five available fields on the AEC chamber.
The start signal also exits from the generator control board. This is inverted by U6, and then inverted
again by Q4 and Q5. The output of Q5, when active, opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U8A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U7A during standby
The output of U8A connects to the common inputs of the analog switches that are in series with gain pots
R11 and R12. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch
corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U8A to the AEC gain
adjustment potentiometer R11 or R12 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be
a ramp, is now fed to the input of U8B. The analog switch in the feedback loop of U8B is opened during
an exposure, allowing the AEC ramp to appear at the input of U4A via a phase-lead network that provides
short time compensation.
The AEC ramp from U4A is again inverted by U4B and taken to the generator control board where it is
processed as described earlier in this section, and fed to comparator U9 on the AEC board where it is
compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of U9 is normally high, switching low when the
magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the
7.2.13 Digital interface (MD-0926)

Sheet 1 shows the digital outputs on the generator control board that drive the digital imaging system and
the optional X-ray mini-console. Data latch U5 latches the output data for the imaging system. One of the
outputs from U5 is an EXPOSURE ENABLE signal that is taken low if the generator has recognized a
valid exposure request. The remaining outputs from U5 are fed to driver U4, where three of the outputs
are connected directly to J25 and to inverters Q9, Q10, and Q11. The next two outputs from U4 are
connected to inverters Q12 and Q14 only. The outputs of inverters Q9, Q10, Q11, Q12, and Q14 drive
five of the outputs on J25.
Four of the single-ended outputs from U5 also drive differential drivers U21, U28, U30, and U35. These
differential drivers drive four of the outputs on J25.
The HV ON signal from MD-0932 is taken to the input of U37D on MD-0926. Monostable timer U40 is
triggered at the start of the HV ON signal, generating a 13-millisecond pulse. This ensures that the output
of U37C stays on for a minimum of 13 milliseconds for very short exposures, while having no effect on
longer exposures. The resulting “exposure on” signal from U37C is taken to J25 via driver U4, and is
inverted by Q15. The output of U37C is also taken to differential driver U31 for imaging systems that need
a differential “exposure on” signal.
Lastly, U19 latches the commands to drive the prep / exposure indicators and LS1 and LS2 in the mini-
console. These signals are fed to driver U20, which provides the required current gain.
7.2.13 Digital interface (MD-0926) (Cont)

Sheet 2 shows the digital inputs from the digital imaging system. One input is a differential input that is
fed to the data bus via U46 and U18, and six inputs are opto-coupled via U12, U16, U17, U22, U23, and
U36. The digital imaging system must pull J25-11 high to enable an X-ray exposure. When this line is
high, turning on U29 and U11, and the EXPOSURE ENABLE line is low, the X-RAY ENABLE command
will be low. This allows the DRIVE ENABLE signal on MD-0931 to be pulled high, enabling the gate drive
pulses on MD-0932.
7.2.14 Interconnect diagram (MD-0939)
This drawing shows the cabling between the major subassemblies in the MAGNUM C® X-ray generator.
Where applicable, this document references the appropriate functional schematics and sections of the
service manual for details on the area of interest.
Spares 8
CHAPTER 8
SPARES
CONTENTS:
Section Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST ........................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8 Spares
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the list of spare parts for the MAGNUM C® series and MAGNUM C® DR series of X-ray
generators.
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST
The matrix on the next page lists the recommended spare parts for the MAGNUM C® and MAGNUM C® DR
families of X-ray generators.
Spares 8
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST (Cont)
TABLE 1
DESCRIPTION 1P 208/230V 3P 208/230V 3P 400/480V SUGGESTED NOTE
QTY
H.V. auxiliary board See note 1 See note 1 See note 1 1 1.
Generator control board Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1 4.
Filament board 731407-00 731407-00 731407-00 1
Inverter board Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1
Console board 900923-00 900923-00 900923-00 1 5.
LCD display assembly 737200-00 737200-00 737200-00 1 5.
AEC board See note 2 See note 2 See note 2 1 2.
Contactor, main power SC2715 SC2715 SC2715 1
Capacitor, DC bus, 9000uF, 400V 736877-00 3
Capacitor, DC bus, 2200uF, 400V SC4108 SC4108 2
Capacitor, DC bus, 4700uF, 400V SC4407 2
Rectifier assembly, mains 6623071100 6623071100 6623071100 1
Transformer, auxiliary 903409-00 903409-00 903409-00 1
Fan assembly 739401-00 739401-00 739401-00 1
HT tank assembly (complete) Consult factory Consult factory Consult factory 1
Dual speed starter board 728877-06 1
Dual speed starter subassembly See note 3 1 3.
Battery, Timekeeper SRAM 7412300170 7412300170 7412300170 1
Thermal sensor board 901531-00 901531-00 901531-00 1
EMC capacitor board 737803-08 737803-09 737803-09 1
Spares 8
Spares 8
TABLE 2
FUSE LOCATION FUSE TYPE & PART NO. SUGGESTED QTY
Main Line Fuses (1 phase units): F1, F2 (50A FRN-R-50, 5550031200 2
250V)
Main Line Fuses (32 / 40 kW, 400 / 480 V units): AG40, 6713837700 3
F1, F2, F3 (40A 480V)
Main Line Fuses (32 / 40 kW 208 – 230 V and 3 SC60, 6713837500 3
phase 50 kW 400 / 480 V units): F1, F2, F3 (60A
480V)
Main Line Fuses (50 kW 3 phase 208 – 230 V OTN60, 6800000400 3
units): F1, F2, F3 (60A 250V)
Main Line Fuses (65 and 80 kW, 3 phase 400 – OTS60, SC3434 3
480 V units): F1, F2, F3 (60A 600V)
Console board: F1 (1A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-1, 5550032900 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F1, F6, F7 (8A 250V Slo-Blo) S506-8A, 5550037500 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F2, F3 (5A 250V Slo-Blo) 372-1500, 5570210570 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F10 (0.8A 250V Fast Acting) GMA-800-R, 5570211500 5
H.V. auxiliary board: F11 (6.3A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-6.3, 5550033400 5
H.V. auxiliary board, 208/230 V units: F4, F5
H.V. auxiliary board: F12 (2A 250V Slo-Blo) GDC-2, 5550032600 5
H.V. auxiliary board, 208/230 V units: F8, F9
Generator control board: F2 (2A 250V)
H.V. auxiliary board, 400/480 V units: F4, F5 (1A FNQ-1, 6711905800 5
500V Slo-Blo)
H.V. auxiliary board, 400/480 V units: F8, F9 (2A FNQ-2, 5550005300 5
500V Slo-Blo)
Filament board: F1, F2 (4A 250V Slo-Blo) MDL-4, 6713544000 5
DSS board: F1, F2 (10A 700V) A70QS10-14F, 6739951800 5
Generator control board: F3 (0.5A 250V) GDC-500mA, 5550033600 5
8 Spares
NOTE:
1. For the X-ray generator that contains the H.V auxiliary board, the part numbers 739445-00 / 739445-01 or
739442-00 / 739442-01 and the serial number prior to CPD05500F09, refer to table 8-1.
For the X-ray generator that contains the H.V auxiliary board, the part numbers 739445-00 / 739445-01 or
739442-00 / 739442-01 and the serial number after and including CPD05500F09:
If you want to upgrade the X-ray generator by using the LSS kit, refer to table 8-2.
Otherwise, refer to table 8-1.
For the X-ray generator that contains a chassis-mounted phase-shift capacitor, refer to table 8-3.
TABLE 8-1
STATOR TYPE 208 / 230 V GENERATORS 400 / 480 V GENERATORS
“R” type stator SP739445-00 SP739442-00
GE 23/23 Ω stator SP739445-01 SP739442-01
TABLE 8-2
Capacitor AC Mains H.V Auxiliary
LSS Kit No Note
Value Voltage Board No
SP90369000 30 μF
SP90369001 40 μF 400 / 480 V 739442-99
SP90369002 20 μF Includes Mounting
SP90369010 30 μF Hardware
SP90369011 40 μF 208 / 230 V 739445-99
SP90369012 20 μF
Table 8-3: Capacitor Field Kit

Field Capacitor Kit part Number Capacitor Value Notes
903836-00 30 μF
903836-01 40 μF Includes Mounting Hardware
903836-02 20 μF
Units with the dual speed starter option will be fitted with H.V. auxiliary board 739442-99.
Before installing a replacement H.V. auxiliary board, jumpers must be properly installed on this board in
order to select the Bucky voltage (24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC). After determining the Bucky drive
voltage requirement, connect the appropriate pair of jumpers in accordance with table 8-4 *.
Spares 8
The jumpers that select the Bucky voltage must be set per table 8-4.
TABLE 8-4
BUCKY H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD JUMPERS
OUTPUT (units with isolated 110 / 220 VAC, using auxiliary transformer 739446)
24 VDC E11-E5, E7-E8
110 VAC E9-E5, E7-E8
220 VAC E12-E5, E7-E8
After determining the required rotor boost voltage, connect a wire jumper between the desired tabs on the
boards *.
TABLE 8-5
ROTOR BOOST H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD JUMPERS
VOLTAGE
120 VAC E14-E15
240 VAC E16-E15
* A complete set of jumpers is shipped with each new generator. Three of the jumpers are installed on the
H.V. auxiliary board, and the remaining jumpers are in a bag attached to the lip on the inside of the cable
access slot above the HT tank.
If the Bucky or low-speed starter boost voltage needs to be changed on an existing H.V. auxiliary board,
use the existing jumper(s) if they are of the correct length and have the proper connector to fit the tab(s) on
the board. Otherwise, select the shortest wires from the spare jumper set that will connect between the
desired tabs on the board and that have the proper connectors on the jumpers. For spares boards, the
jumpers will need to be removed from the “old” board and reused.
Additionally, JW1 must be set per table 8-6 before installing a replacement H.V. auxiliary board.
TABLE 8-6
UNIT TYPE JW1 CONFIGURATION: H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD
1 phase OPEN (jumper pins 2-3)
3 phase CLOSED (jumper pins 1-2)
8 Spares
2. The AEC board in your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC devices. To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to
chapter 9, section 9.2.0, for the part number of the original AEC board that was shipped in the
generator for which this manual was prepared.
3. This applies to the dual speed starter option only, spares should be stocked accordingly. The part
number shown for the dual speed starter board is for the board only, without the phase-shift
capacitors. For the complete dual speed starter subassembly, several part numbers (which are tube-
stator dependent) are used in MAGNUM C® DR 400 / 480 VAC generators. To determine which dual
speed starter subassembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER ASSY part number
on a label near the top left side of the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that
must be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 901297-XX or 901298-XX
where XX is a two digit number designating the exact configuration.
4. This generator control board is jumper configurable. Please refer to the following tables to configure
the generator control board for your x-ray generator.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RECONFIGURE 125 kV MAXIMUM GENERATORS FOR 150 kV

OPERATION. SERIOUS GENERATOR DAMAGE WILL OCCUR.
TABLE 8-5
FUNCTION JUMPER CONFIGURATION
Firmware JW2 PINS 1-2: Normal

Upgrading PINS 2-3: Upgrade
JW4 and JW5 Set as per Table 8-5b below.
kV Overvoltage JW6 PINS: 1-2: 125 kV
Trip PINS: 2-3: 150 kV
JW7 Not used.
Cooling Fan JW12 PINS 1-2: No Fan
PINS 2-3: Fan
Maximum kV JW13 PINS 1-2: 125 kV (For 125 kV tank)
PINS 2-3: 150 kV (For 150 kV tank)
DAP JW14 Set as per DAP Installation in Chapter 3C.
HT Tank JW15 PINS 1-2: 125 kV
Feedback Comp. PINS 2-3: 150 kV
KV Feedback JW16 PINS 1-2: 125 kV
Compensation PINS 2-3: 150 kV
TABLE 8-5b
32 / 40 kW 50 kW 32 / 40 kW 32 / 40 kW 50 kW 65 / 80 kW
400 / 480 VAC 400 / 480 VAC 208 / 230 VAC 400 / 480 VAC 208 / 230 VAC 400 / 480 VAC
125 kV 150 kV 125 kV 150 kV 150 kV 150 kV
JW4 Pins 1-2 Pins 2-3 Pins 2-3 Pins 1-2 Pins 2-3 Pins 2-3
5. These assemblies apply to generators equipped with a membrane console only.
Spares 8
Schematics 9
CHAPTER 9
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX......................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9 Schematics
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the functional schematics for the MAGNUM C X-ray generator. Each functional
schematic represents a major function in the generator. The functional schematics in this chapter
represent all of the major functional blocks in MAGNUM C X-ray generators.
9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX
The following functional schematics are included in this manual.
MAGNUM C FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS

DESCRIPTION DRAWING NUMBER
DC Bus and Power Distribution MD-0927
System ON MD-0928
Room Interface MD-0930
X-Ray Exposure - Radiographic MD-0931
kV Control and Feedback MD-0932
Filament Drive and mA Control MD-0934
Low Speed Starter MD-0935
Dual Speed Starter MD-0924
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) MD-0936
Serial Communications MD-0937
DAP MD-0938
Digital Interface MD-0926
Temp Sensor / Programming Jumpers MD-0925
Interconnect Diagram MD-0939
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
The functional schematics immediately follow this page.
REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES,
ETC, REFERENCED BY THIS SYMBOL:
+12V
+35 V
F1
E1 +
J15-1
AC MAINS INVERTER
F2 TP11
INPUT BOARD -12V SWITCHING
208-230 VAC REGULATOR CIRCUIT J15-3
DS1 E2 - (U3 AND ASSOCIATED
1 PHASE J15-5
COMPONENTS)
PE J15-6
TO FILAMENT BOARD
EMC CAPACITOR -12 V REFER TO PG 4
BOARD J15-2
+1.2V
+5V
U58 TP30
+5V
J5-5 J5-7 J10-1 J10-3 J5-3 J5-1 +1.2V -35 V
+12 V +12 V REGULATOR
ON / OFF +24V
TP13 J15-4
D7 COMMAND 2
FROM MD-0928
MAIN CONTACTOR DRIVE
FROM MD-0928 D5 J6-1 J11-1 +5V SWITCHING
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
F7 J6-2 J11-2 (U14 AND ASSOCIATED
E16 E15
E1 ** D12 COMPONENTS)
120/240 VAC
E14 TO LOW SPEED
F6 STARTER
MD-0935 +12V
R33
R27
R32
D43 +12 V
K2
F5 R11
+3.3V J7-13
+5V
U64 TP31 TP14
F4 R17
+3.3V +24 V
REGULATOR
R14
+12V J7-19
TO AEC BOARD
J6-12 J11-12
+24V REFER TO PG 4
2 4 J7-17
SOFT-START
CONTACTOR DRIVE SOFT-START
D8 FROM MD-0928 U5 SENSE TO J7-11
+12V SWITCHING
MD-0928 REGULATOR CIRCUIT
(Q8, Q13, U10 AND
BUCKY DRIVE 1 3 J6-6 J11-6 ASSOCIATED -12 V
D13 COMPONENTS)
F8 F9 E7 TO MD-0930
R13 J2-3
TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION
+35 V RELAY (CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED)
K6 J2-4
J9-1 MAXIMUM 100 MA
E8 +35 V J1-4 J12-6
J9-3 +24 V
J1-5 J12-5 K1
J9-7 E11 E5 F10 F2 J20-13
* C2
E9 J20-15
+24 V +12V
E12 D1 J20-3 TO TOUCHSCREEN
CONSOLE
D5 J20-9
220V J8-5 REFER TO PG 4
0V J20-12
D10 C4
J8-3 J20-14
110V J1-8 J12-2 ON / OFF
COMMAND 1
0V J8-1 J1-9 J12-1 FROM MD-0928
F11
-35 V J3-8
120V 24 VAC TO
MD-0930 F12 +24 V +15V
26V J3-1 F1 24 VDC TO +24 V TO MEMBRANE
MD-0930 TP10 TP9 CONSOLE
208V -35 V +24V
J1-1 J12-9 REFER TO PG 4
0V
J1-2 J12-8 J3-3
240V 1
18V J3-4 F2
R27
C6 TP12
400V +15V SWITCHING
0V J3-3 TP9 REGULATOR CIRCUIT
D3 DS1 (U15 AND ASSOCIATED
480V J1-6 J12-4
18V J3-5 F3 D14 COMPONENTS)
J1-7 J12-3
D4
J3-2 DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 DC BUS & POWER
CHECKED DISTRIBUTION
JAC 14 AUG 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
THIS SHEET DEPICTS 1 PH. UNITS. H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD MD-0927 REV E
REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR 3 PH. JAC 14 AUG 2008
208-230V UNITS, AND PAGE 3 * E5, E9, E11, and E12 CONFIGURE THE BUCKY OUTPUTS FOR +24 VDC, 120 VAC, OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 8 FOR DETAILS. Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions SHEET 1 OF 5
FOR 3 PH. 400/480V UNITS ** E14, E15, E16 CONFIGURE THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOOST VOLTAGE FOR 120 OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 FOR DETAILS. on the title page of this CPI document.
F3
~ +
E1 + +12V
~
AC MAINS +35 V
INPUT F2 INVERTER
BOARD J15-1
208-230 VAC
~
TP11
3 PHASE F1 DS1 E2 - -12V SWITCHING
J15-3
- REGULATOR CIRCUIT
(U3 AND ASSOCIATED
COMPONENTS) J15-5
PE J15-6
EMC CAPACITOR
TO FILAMENT BOARD
BOARD -12 V REFER TO PG 4
J15-2
+1.2V
+5V
U58 TP30
+5V
J5-5 J5-7 J10-1 J10-3 J5-3 J5-1 +1.2V -35 V
ON / OFF +24V
TP13 J15-4
D7 COMMAND 2
FROM MD-0928
FROM MD-0928 D5 J6-1 J11-1 +5V SWITCHING
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
E16 E15
E1 ** D12 COMPONENTS)
120/240 VAC
E14 TO LOW SPEED
F6 STARTER
MD-0935 +12V
R33
R27
R32
D43 +12 V
K2
F5 R11
+3.3V J7-13
+5V
U64 TP31 TP14
F4 R17
+3.3V +24 V
REGULATOR
R14
+12V J7-19
TO AEC BOARD
J6-12 J11-12
+24V REFER TO PG 4
2 4 J7-17
SOFT-START
CONTACTOR DRIVE SOFT-START
D8 FROM MD-0928 U5 SENSE TO J7-11
+12V SWITCHING
(Q8, Q13, U10 AND
D13 COMPONENTS)
F8 F9 E7 TO MD-0930
R13 J2-3
TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION
+35 V RELAY (CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED)
K6 J2-4
J9-1 MAXIMUM 100 MA
E8 +35 V J1-4 J12-6
J9-3 +24 V
J1-5 J12-5 K1
J9-7 E11 E5 F10 F2 J20-13
* C2
E9 J20-15
+24 V +12V
CONSOLE
D5 J20-9
220V J8-5 REFER TO PG 4
0V J20-12
D10 C4
J8-3 J20-14
110V J1-8 J12-2 ON / OFF
COMMAND 1
0V J8-1 J1-9 J12-1 FROM MD-0928
F11
-35 V J3-8
120V 24 VAC TO
MD-0930 F12 +24 V +15V
MD-0930 TP10 TP9 CONSOLE
208V
-35 V +24V
J1-1 J12-9 REFER TO PG 4
0V
J1-2 J12-8 J3-3
240V 1
18V J3-4 F2
R27
C6 TP12
400V +15V SWITCHING
480V J1-6 J12-4
J1-7 J12-3
D4
J3-2 DRAWN DATE
JAC 14 AUG 2008
THIS SHEET DEPICTS 3 PH. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
208-230V UNITS. REFER TO PAGE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD MD-0927 REV E
JAC 14 AUG 2008
1 FOR 1 PH. UNITS, AND PAGE * E5, E9, E11, and E12 CONFIGURE THE BUCKY OUTPUTS FOR +24 VDC, 120 VAC, OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 8 FOR DETAILS. Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions SHEET 2 OF 5
3 FOR 3 PH. 400/480 V UNITS ** E14, E15, E16 CONFIGURE THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOOST VOLTAGE FOR 120 OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 FOR DETAILS. on the title page of this CPI document.
F3
~ +
E1 +
~
AC MAINS +12V
F2 +35 V
INPUT * INVERTER
400/480 VAC BOARD J15-1
~
3 PHASE F1 DS1 E2 - TP11
-12V SWITCHING
- REGULATOR CIRCUIT J15-3
(U3 AND ASSOCIATED
COMPONENTS) J15-5
PE
* 50/65/80 KW UNITS USE
EMC CAPACITOR TWO INVERTER BOARDS J15-6
BOARD TO FILAMENT BOARD
-12 V REFER TO PG 4
J15-2
+1.2V
+5V
U58 TP30
+5V
J5-5 J5-7 J10-1 J10-3 J5-3 J5-1 +1.2V
TP10 2 -35 V
ON / OFF +24V
TP13 J15-4
D7 COMMAND 2
TP11 FROM MD-0928

D5 J6-1 J11-1 +5V SWITCHING
FROM MD-0928
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
120/240 VAC
E1 D12 COMPONENTS)
TO LOW SPEED
E16 E15 F7 STARTER
** MD-0935
+12V
R27
R33
E14 R32
K2
F5 R11 D43 +12 V
+3.3V J7-13
F4 R17 +5V
U64 TP31 TP14
+3.3V +24 V
+12V 4 REGULATOR
TP5 3
R14
TP4 J7-19
TO AEC BOARD
J6-12 J11-12
+24V REFER TO PG 4
SOFT-START
2 4 J7-17
CONTACTOR DRIVE
D8 FROM MD-0928
SOFT-START
U5 SENSE TO +12V SWITCHING J7-11
F8 F9 (Q8, Q13, U10 AND
D13 COMPONENTS)
E7 TO MD-0930
R13 J2-3
J9-5 TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION
+35 V +35 V RELAY (CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED)
K6 J2-4
J9-1 TP2 MAXIMUM 100 MA
E8 J1-4 J12-6
J9-3 +24 V
J1-5 J12-5 K1
J9-7 E11 E5 F10 F2 J20-13
* C2
R28
E9 J20-15
+24 V +12V
CONSOLE
D5 J20-9
220V J8-5 -35 V REFER TO PG 4
0V J20-12
D10 C4
R29
TP3
J8-3 J20-14
110V J1-8 J12-2 ON / OFF
COMMAND 1
0V J8-1 J1-9 J12-1 FROM MD-0928
F11
J3-8
120V 24 VAC TO
MD-0930 F12 +24 V +15V
MD-0930 TP1
-35 V TP10 TP9 CONSOLE
208V J1-1 J12-9 +24V
0V REFER TO PG 4
J1-2 J12-8 J3-3
240V 1
18V J3-4 F2
R30
C6 TP12
400V TP12 +15V SWITCHING
480V J1-6 J12-4
J1-7 J12-3
D4
J3-2 DRAWN DATE
JAC 14 AUG 2008
THIS SHEET DEPICTS 3 PH. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
400/480V UNITS. REFER TO H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD MD-0927 REV E
JAC 14 AUG 2008
PAGE 1 FOR 1 PH. UNITS, AND * E5, E9, E11, and E12 CONFIGURE THE BUCKY OUTPUTS FOR +24 VDC, 120 VAC, OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 8 FOR DETAILS. Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions SHEET 3 OF 5
PAGE 2 FOR 3 PH. 208-230V UNITS ** E14, E15, E16 CONFIGURE THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOOST VOLTAGE FOR 120 OR 240 VAC. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 FOR DETAILS. on the title page of this CPI document.
+35 V
TP6
J1-1 F2
J1-3
TP2
-12 V
J1-5
FROM J15 GENERATOR J1-6

CONTROL BOARD
PG 1, 2, 3
TP7
J1-2 F1
+12 V
-35 V
J1-4
+24V FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
J28-13
J28-15 F3
FROM J20 GENERATOR
CONTROL BOARD TOUCHSCREEN
PG 1, 2, 3 J28-3 CONSOLE
J28-14
FROM J7 GENERATOR REFER TO MD-0936 (AEC) FOR

CONTROL BOARD PINOUTS OF THE +/-12 VDC
TOUCH-SCREEN BOARD
PG 1, 2, 3 AND +24 VDC SUPPLIES
AEC BOARD
FLUORESCENT LAMP
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
J5-1 J5-5
+5V TP9 5
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY C36
(Q1, Q2, T1, ETC)
MEMBRANE
+5V CONSOLE
+3.3V
TP7
TP2 +1.2V
+ 5V, + 3.3V, +1.2V TP6
AND - 20V
J8-8 F1 POWER SUPPLY TP14
CIRCUITS
(U12, U18, U20,
FROM J3 GENERATOR D3-D7, L1, ETC.)
CONTROL BOARD TP3
PG 1, 2, 3 TP8
J8-3
-20V
CONSOLE BOARD
DRAWN DATE
JAC 14 AUG 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0927 REV E
JAC 14 AUG 2008
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 4 OF 5
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) DISABLES THE +5V, +12V, AND +15V REGULATORS (GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF). “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 24V DC) ENABLES THESE REGULATORS
1 (I.E. GENERATOR SWITCHED ON) .
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES THE MAIN POWER CONTACTOR IN THE GENERATOR, (”HIGH”, + 12V DC = NOT ENERGIZED). THIS CONTACTOR IS ENERGIZED AFTER THE MAIN BUS CAPACITORS
2 ARE CHARGED, APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER POWER-ON. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) ENERGIZES THE SOFT START CONTACTOR K2 ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD, (”HIGH”, + 12V DC = NOT ENERGIZED). THIS CONTACTOR IS ENERGIZED FOR A MAXIMUM OF
3
APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER POWER-ON IN ORDER TO CHARGE THE DC BUS CAPACITORS. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
4 THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
5 THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 2 BELOW.
8.33-10 ms
+5 V +5 V
FIGURE 1
0V 0V
EARLY CHARGING NEARLY FINISHED CHARGING
18 s
4V
FIGURE 2
-8 V
DRAWN DATE
JAC 14 AUG 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0927 REV E
JAC 14 AUG 2008
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions SHEET 5 OF 5
on the title page of this CPI document.
J1-10 J19-10
J1-9 J19-9
X-RAY MINI- OFF
CONSOLE
ON
J1-13 J19-13
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD +24 V
J1-4 J16-4 J28-11 J20-11

D2
OFF
J1-5 J16-5 J28-10 J20-10
*
TOUCHSCREEN * TO CONNECT AN EMERGENCY-OFF SWITCH, REMOVE JUMPER
CONSOLE ON J2-1 J2-2 FROM J2-1 TO J2-2, AND THEN CONNECT THE EMERGENCY OFF
J1-6 J16-6 J28-12 J20-12 SWITCH TO J2-1 AND J2-2.
TOUCH-SCREEN K2
FRONT PANEL BOARD BOARD
ON / OFF
Q4
COMMAND 1
TO MD-0927
J7-16 J8-7 J3-7
ON / OFF
R13
J7-15 J8-6 J3-6 COMMAND 2
Q5
OFF TO MD-0927
MEMBRANE ON TP3 TP9 S2
Q7
CONSOLE J8-3 J3-3
J7-17 OFF
R17
Q6
S1
CONSOLE ON
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY BOARD
+5 V
U87
R300
J6-12 J11-12 DATA
BUFFER
MAIN CONTACTOR 5
DRIVE TO
MD-0927 SOFT START
SENSE FROM U5
MD-0927
4
J6-6 J11-6
D7
+12 V
+12 V
J6-1 J11-1
D48
J6-2 J11-2
U86
J6-3 J11-3 R294
Q29
J6-4 J11-4
R290
Q28
DATA
U83 LATCH
SOFT-START J6-11 J11-11 DATE

CONTACTOR DRIVE DRIVER DRAWN
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008
TO MD-0927
CHECKED SYSTEM “ON”
SB 11 SEPT/08
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
DATA, ADDRESS, &
CONTROL BUS MD-0928 REV A
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions L. FOSKIN 11/SEPT/2008
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 1 OF 1
BUCKY DRIVE +12V
FROM MD-0927
24 VDC, 1
RETURN 120 / 240 VAC K1
D2 TP13
U83 U86
J6-13 J11-13 DATA
J2-10 DRIVER
LATCH
BUCKY RETURN
2 TP14
BUCKY 1 J2-9
R2 ** C3 J6-14 J11-14 +5V
GROUND
1 4
J2-8 +24V
R326
BUCKY 1 OUT
U89
+24V U2
DATA
R5
BUCKY 1 J2-7
BUFFER
START K1 3
1 4 2 3
R3
TP15
J2-6 +5V
J6-15 J11-15
U1
BUCKY 1
READY J2-5
R304
2 3 +24V 4 U89
J2-4 DATA
TP16
+5V BUFFER
INTERLOCK
R7
J2-3 J6-16 J11-16
#1
1 4
R309
J2-2 +12V 5 U89
INTERLOCK #2 / U3
TP19 DATA
TOMO EXPOSURE J2-1 BUFFER
INPUT *
2 3 K3 D6
J4-4 U83 U86
BUCKY RETURN
J6-19 J11-19 DATA
TOMO / BUCKY 2 J4-3 DRIVER
R15 ** LATCH
C10
GROUND
+5V
J4-2
TOMO / BUCKY 2 OUT
24 VAC
R325
TOMO / BUCKY 2 J4-1 6 TP18
FROM U89
START K3
MD-0927 J6-18 J11-18 DATA
1 4 BUFFER
J11-6 24 VDC
24 VAC FROM
OUT J11-5 MD-0927 U6 +5V
+24V 7
R318
J11-2 2 3
24 VDC TP17 U89
R9
OUT J11-1
J6-17 J11-17 DATA
+24V BUFFER
1 4
J4-6 R10
+5V
BUCKY 2 U4
READY J4-5 8
R319
2 3 TP6 U89
J4-10
J6-10 J11-10 DATA
DOOR BUFFER
INTERLOCK J4-9 +24V 1 4
+12V U19
J7-1 R26 R25 U9 DATA
D49 LATCH
THERMAL
SWITCH J7-2
2 3 R295
J6-9 J11-9
+12V Q31 DATA, ADDRESS, &
J11-3 CONTROL BUS
R296
ROOM K7 D11 J6-20 J11-20
LIGHT
J11-4 DRAWN DATE
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 ROOM
CHECKED INTERFACE
SB 30 APR 08
REFER TO CHAPTER 3 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS REGARDING INTERFACING OF BUCKYS, INTERLOCKS, ETC. REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY THIS SYMBOL: MD-0930 REV C
* THIS IS THE TOMO EXPOSURE INPUT FOR ANY IMAGE RECEPTOR THAT IS PROGRAMMED FOR TOMO OPERATION. THIS L. FOSKIN 06/MAY/2008
INPUT IS AN INTERLOCK FOR ALL REMAINING RECEPTORS THAT DO NOT HAVE TOMO ENABLED. THIS INPUT MUST NORMALLY
BE PROGRAMMED AS INACTIVE ON ALL NON-TOMO RECEPTORS IF THIS IS USED AS A TOMO INPUT ON THE TOMO RECEPTOR. Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BUCKY 1 START. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +12 VDC) = BUCKY 1 NOT REQUESTED TO START. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
2 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BUCKY 1 READY. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = BUCKY 1 NOT READY. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
3 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = 40” S.I.D. INTERLOCK CLOSED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = 40” S.I.D. INTERLOCK OPEN. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
4 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = 72” S.I.D. INTERLOCK CLOSED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = 72” S.I.D. INTERLOCK OPEN. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
5 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BUCKY 2 START. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +12 VDC) = BUCKY 2 NOT REQUESTED TO START. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
6 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BUCKY 2 READY. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = BUCKY 2 NOT READY. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
7 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = DOOR INTERLOCK CLOSED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = DOOR INTERLOCK OPEN. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
8 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC) = THERMAL SWITCH OPEN. (Test point available on 400 / 480V AC units only)
** THESE RESISTORS MAY NEED TO BE INSTALLED IN SOME APPLICATIONS. REFER TO CHAPTER 3C FOR DETAILS.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 11 FEB 2003 ROOM
CHECKED INTERFACE
SB 30 APR 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0930 REV C
L. FOSKIN 06/MAY/2008
SHEET 2 OF 2
+5V +5V
+24V
R84
R87
R33
U71 U77
DATA
1 4 BUFFER CPU
5V-3.3V
U7
2 3
X-RAY ENABLE
1 1 4 TO PG 2
TP13 U9
REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR DS6
U83 U86
LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES, J8-5 J3-5 2 3 DATA
DRIVER
ETC, REFERENCED BY LATCH
THIS SYMBOL: 1 4
+3.3V
U17 +24V
R55
J3-1 2 3
R42
2 1 4
TP12 U8
DS5
J8-4 J3-4 2 3
HAND
+3.3V SWITCH
DATA, ADDRESS, &
X-RAY
PREP
COM
CONTROL BUS
U21
R56
X-RAY
FPGA
1 4 J2-3 J2-2 J2-1
U16
J3-3 2 3
J19-11 J1-11
PREP J3-5 X-RAY MINI-
JW2 *
CONSOLE
J19-12 J1-12
HANDSWITCH PREP
JW1 * DATA, ADDRESS, &
ASSY CONTROL BUS X-RAY
J19-14 J1-14
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
J7-2
J20-7 J28-7 J21-3 J2-3

X-RAY J7-3
J20-8 J28-8 J21-4 J2-4

PREP
PREP TOUCHSCREEN
J7-1
J8-3 J3-3 X-RAY CONSOLE
J20-9 J28-9 J21-5 J2-5
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY CONSOLE BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD FRONT PANEL BOARD
* REMOVE JW1 TO DISABLE THE CONSOLE PREP BUTTON, AND JW2

J30-3
TO DISABLE THE CONSOLE X-RAY BUTTON PREP
HAND J30-1
X-RAY DRAWN DATE
SWITCH
J30-5 G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 X-RAY EXPOSURE
MEMBRANE CONSOLE COM CHECKED
JAC 5 MAY 08
(RADIOGRAPHIC)
TOUCH-SCREEN DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. BOARD
JAC
MD-0931 REV B
28 MAY 08
SHEET 1 OF 3
J3-9 J9-9
J3-7 J9-7
H.T. TANK X-RAY ENABLE

+5V +5V +5V
FROM PG 1
AND FROM
MD-0926 PG 2
R293
R253
3 6
R91
TP17 TP19
R288
R270
TP18
U65
DATA R282 7
BUFFER Q27
U77 TP16
3.3V-5V R276
DRIVE ENABLE
TO MD-0932
5 PG 1
CPU
TP20
U67
DATA R287
BUFFER Q26
3.3V-5V
R269
+12V +12V
R137
R129
Q22
R151
Q21 R130 RAD INHIBIT
TO MD-0932
R136
PG 1
ADDRESS / DATA
& CONTROL BUS
D0..D7
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 X-RAY EXPOSURE
CHECKED (RADIOGRAPHIC)
JAC 5 MAY 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. JAC
MD-0931 REV B
28 MAY 08
SHEET 2 OF 3
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +24V DC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
2 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = PREP REQUESTED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +24V DC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
3 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = HT TANK CONNECTED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5V DC) = HT TANK NOT CONNECTED.
4 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = NO FAULT PRESENT. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5V DC) = FAULT DETECTED, EXPOSURE INHIBITED.
5 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5V DC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED BY THE CPU.
6 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = EXPOSURE REQUESTED. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5V DC) = EXPOSURE NOT REQUESTED OR REQUEST NOT VALID.
7 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +5V DC) = GATE DRIVE PULSES ENABLED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) = GATE DRIVE PULSES NOT ENABLED DUE TO A FAULT OR NO VALID EXPOSURE REQUEST.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 X-RAY EXPOSURE
CHECKED (RADIOGRAPHIC)
JAC 5 MAY 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0931 REV B
28 MAY 08
SHEET 3 OF 3
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR
LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES, INVERTER “SHOOT THRU” INVERTER “SHOOT THRU”
ETC, REFERENCED BY SENSE, FROM PAGE 2 SENSE, FROM PAGE 2
+5V +5V +12V
THIS SYMBOL: 1 1V = 20 kV OF
R250
H.V. FEEDBACK
TP26 J10-1 J10-3 J16-1 J16-3 R156 - 2
1 R177 J9-6
TP8 + 3
-
U77 U78 U51A
R165
+ T3 T4 R166
R283
R184
DATA U70 C154
CPU TP27 J9-5
BUFFER 2
5V-3.3V - 6
-
R260 R285 7
1 JW15
R128
5 KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL
R272
+
J9-7
FROM PAGE 2
+
U51B 2 125 kV
U75
R193
R289
3 150 kV
R178
INVERTER “SHOOT THRU”
R171 6
DETECTOR CIRCUITS
-
7 R204 J9-8
+ 5
+5V +5V U56B
R202
R183
U77 U78 TP23
DATA - 3
7 R191
CPU BUFFER + 2 GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT J5-1
5V-3.3V FOR MOSFET INVERTER
U55 J5-2
1 JW6
R212
J5-3
2 125 kV Q16 Q19
J5-4
R198 3 150 kV
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U45 J13-1
R135
A/D J13-2
CONV Q17 Q20
R134
J13-3
R219 J13-4
1V = 15 kV OF TP5
H.V. DEMAND
HV ON
TO MD-0926
R149
- PG 1
-
R243
+ Q25
1 JW16 +
U72A
U72B
2 125 kV
R105
R390 3 150 kV “HV ON” CIRCUIT
RAD INHIBIT C184 TP2 TP3 5

FROM MD-0931 D19
R138 PG 2
U43
R100
R108
D/A 2- ERROR AMPLIFIERS
R144 R112 U26A U27A
CONV 1 2- R131 R123
3+ 1 2
3 - D23 3 2 7
+ - R106 2- 1
U38A + 1
U48A D27 JW7 +
3+
U25A
R150
1 U25B VCO U26B U27B

U33A 5
R119
6 4 5
2 INCLUDES U34, U39, 4
U49, U52, U62, Q23
C69 3 JW7 NOT
USED AT
THIS
C70 TIME
4
TP15
- 3 R218 D33, 36, 38, 42
7 DRIVE ENABLE
2 CURRENT SENSE FROM MD-0931
+
R222
R103
+5V U69 PG 2
R214
R217
T2 T1 1 JW4 *
R228
U77 U78 2
DATA -12V 1 JW5 * R209
CPU BUFFER 3
5V-3.3V 2
R107 3 J6-4 J6-1
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 KV CONTROL
DATA BUS H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE CHECKED & FEEDBACK
FROM PAGE 2 GW MAY 7, 2008
D0..D7
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC 27 AUG 2008
MD-0932 REV B
* REFER TO TABLE 1 (SHEET 3) FOR THE SHEET 1 OF 3
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. JW4 AND JW5 JUMPER POSITIONS
TO J9-8
kV FEEDBACK TO J9-7
TO PAGE 1
TO J9-5
HV ANODE
T2 J2-1 TO J9-6
TO J16-1 INVERTER BOARD
PART OF INVERTER “SHOOT “SHOOT THRU”
THROUGH” DETECTOR CIRCUIT J2-3
TO J16-3 SENSE, TO PAGE 1
*
E1: 560 to 670 VDC (+)
MOSFET INVERTER J1
(INCLUDES Q1-Q16) ANODE
C S
L
J13-1 J1-1
J3-8
J13-2 J1-2 HV MULT
ASSY +
E3 J3-7 (ANODE)
J13-3 J1-3
J13-4 J1-4 J3-5
J3-6
E4
E9
INVERTER BOARD E2: 560 to 670 VDC (-)
FROM
PAGE 1
T2 J2-1
TO J10-1 INVERTER
PART OF INVERTER “SHOOT “SHOOT THRU” E10
E1: 560 to 670 VDC (+) HV MULT
MOSFET INVERTER
ASSY-
(INCLUDES Q1-Q16)
(CATHODE)
J5-1 J1-1
*
J5-2 J1-2
E3
C L
J5-3 J1-3
S
J5-4 J1-4
HV CATHODE J2
TANK LID CATHODE
E4 BOARD
BOARD
GENERATOR * DEPENDING ON GENERATOR

CONTROL BOARD INVERTER BOARD E2: 560 to 670 VDC (-) MODEL, THE H.T. TRANSFORMERS
MAY USE TWO PAIRS OF SECONDARY
WINDINGS, OR THREE SECONDARIES
AS SHOWN ABOVE
THIS PAGE DEPICTS 50 KW, 65 KW AND 80 KW UNITS (WITH TWO INVERTER ASSEMBLIES.
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR 32/40KW UNITS THAT USE ONE INVERTER ONLY. H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT TO J6-1 PART OF H.V. OIL TANK
SENSE, TO PAGE 1 TO J6-4
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED & FEEDBACK
GW MAY 7, 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. JAC 27 AUG 2008
MD-0932 REV B
SHEET 2 OF 3
T2 J2-1
TO J10-1 INVERTER
PART OF INVERTER “SHOOT “SHOOT THRU”
E1: 325 to 670 VDC (+)
MOSFET INVERTER
(INCLUDES Q1-Q16)
TO E9 AND E10
ON H.V. TANK
(PAGE 2)
FROM J5-1 J1-1

PAGE 1 J5-2 J1-2
E3
J5-3 J1-3
J5-4 J1-4
E4
GENERATOR
CONTROL BOARD INVERTER BOARD E2: 325 to 670 VDC (-)
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT TO J6-1

SENSE, TO PAGE 1 TO J6-4
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
A NARROW PULSE WILL BE PRESENT AT THIS TEST POINT IF AN INVERTER “SHOOT THROUGH” HAS BEEN DETECTED. THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW.
1 THIS PULSE MAY BE VERY DIFFICULT O DETECT, AS THE INVERTER DRIVE WILL BE SHUT DOWN WHEN A “SHOOT THROUGH” IS DETECTED, THUS REMOVING THE FAULT CONDITION.
2 AS PER # 1.
A NARROW PULSE WILL BE PRESENT AT THIS TEST POINT IF KV OVER VOLTAGE HAS BEEN DETECTED (130 KV FOR 125 KV UNITS, 163 KV FOR 150 KV UNITS). REFER TO FIGURE 1. THIS PULSE MAY BE VERY
3 DIFFICULT TO DETECT, AS THE HIGH VOLTAGE WILL BE SHUT DOWN WHEN THE OVER VOLTAGE CONDITION IS DETECTED, THUS REMOVING THE FAULT CONDITION.
A NARROW PULSE WILL BE PRESENT AT THIS TEST POINT IF INVERTER OVER CURRENT HAS BEEN DETECTED. THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW.
4
THIS PULSE MAY BE VERY DIFFICULT O DETECT, AS THE INVERTER DRIVE WILL BE SHUT DOWN WHEN AN OVER CURRENT CONDITION S DETECTED, THUS REMOVING THE FAULT CONDITION.
5 THE VOLTAGE AT TP2 AND TP3 SHOULD BE A 50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR
OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 2.
+5 V 32/40 kW 50 kW 32/40 kW 32/40 kW 50 kW 65/80 kW

400/480 VAC 400/480 VAC 208/230 VAC 400/480 VAC 208/230 VAC 400/480 VAC
FIGURE 1 12 VDC 125 kV 150 kV 125 kV 150 kV 150 kV 150 kV
FIGURE 2
0V 0 VDC
TABLE 1
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED & FEEDBACK
GW MAY 7, 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. JAC 27 AUG 2008
MD-0932 REV B
SHEET 3 OF 3
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR
LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES, MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT
ETC, REFERENCED BY LIMIT CIRCUIT
THIS SYMBOL: SET MAX
CURRENT ERROR AMPLIFIER, PWM REGULATOR,
JW1 AND FILAMENT CURRENT DRIVERS
3
+
2 6.5 A
-
R76 5.5 A
U1A 1 +35V
1 -12V
TP4
D6
R117
U42 R72 6
Q6 Q12
D/A 6 - R116 J14-6 J2-6 R65 TP3
CONV 7 6- R95 R77 U3
5 +
7 -
U32B 5+
J14-5 J2-5 R66 U1B +
U4B PWM
REGULATOR
R71
R85
Q13
5 Q7
TP2 TP4
C22
R84
L CATHODE
-35V
C L
J5-2 J4-2
S
+12V
4 J5-1 J4-1
+12V 2 TP1 K1 K1
J5-4 J4-4
TP29
D50 J5-3 J4-3
J14-11 J2-11
U77 U67
DATA R299
CPU BUFFER Q30
3.3V-5V S
R297
3 FILAMENT
T1 MOUNTING
TP28 D12, 13
U45 U7 BOARD
D 27, 28
R140 J14-2 J2-2 R69 - U4A
A/D + RMS
CONV +
-
CONVERTER
U2B
R141
J14-10 J2-10
R21
+5V TANK LID

BOARD
R292
U77 U78 Q1
PART OF H.V. OIL TANK
DATA 1.7 V
CPU BUFFER U2A Ref
5V-3.3V -
+
FILAMENT CURRENT SENSE,

RMS CONVERTER, AND
FILAMENT FEEDBACK
DATA BUS
D0..D7
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 FILAMENT DRIVE
CHECKED & MA CONTROL
JAC 5 MAY 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
JAC
MD-0934 REV A
28 MAY 08
U74A
3+ R277
1
2-
1V = 100 mA
R271
OF ANODE
CURRENT R238
R246
TP7
R233
U45
R216
2- A/D
R118
1 CONV
3+
U68A
R122
R257
R237
J1 HV ANODE
R160
ANODE BOARD
S C
R265
L
+5V +5V
R155
R143
J3-1 J9-1 R258 R227 R221 TP25
3-
6- R142 7
R278
7 2
5+ +
U47
J3-2 J9-2 R208 R234 U68B
R148
R239
mA
TEST
E18 JACK
- +5V
R159
R176
U78 U77
-12V TP24
+ DATA
3- BUFFER CPU
E17 7
2+ 5V-3.3V
R169
U50
R185
J3-4 J9-4 R215 R192
2- R170
R266
1
3+
J3-3 J9-3 R213 R199 DATA BUS
R164
U56A
D0..D7
L C
R203
S
J2
CATHODE HV CATHODE TANK LID
BOARD BOARD
PART OF HV OIL TANK GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN DATE
JAC 5 MAY 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0934 REV A
28 MAY 08
SHEET 2 OF 3
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 1 VOLT AT THIS TEST POINT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT DEMAND.
2 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES K1 ON THE FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (SMALL FILAMENT), “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY +12 VDC) DE-ENERGIZES K1 (LARGE FILAMENT).
3 0.6 VOLT AT THIS TEST POINT = 1 AMP OF ACTUAL FILAMENT CURRENT.
4 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT.
5 1 VOLT AT THIS TEST POINT = 1 AMP OF ACTUAL FILAMENT CURRENT.
6 PWM OUTPUT. THE WAVEFORM WILL BE AS PER FIGURE 1 FOR LOW AND HIGH FILAMENT CURRENT DEMAND.
A NARROW PULSE WILL BE PRESENT AT THESE TEST POINTS DURING SEVERE ANODE OR CATHODE OVER CURRENTS (I.E. TUBE OR TANK ARCS). REFER TO FIGURE 2. THESE PULSES MAY BE VERY
7, 8 DIFFICULT TO OBSERVE, AS THE HIGH VOLTAGE WILL SHUT DOWN WHEN A FAULT IS DETECTED, THUS REMOVING THE OVER CURRENT SITUATION.
Approx 25 usec (40 kHz)

+12 V
LOW FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
FIGURE 1
+12 V
HIGH FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
+5 V TP25
0V
FIGURE 2
+5 V
TP24
0V
DRAWN DATE
JAC 5 MAY 08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0934 REV A
28 MAY 08
SHEET 3 OF 3
REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR
LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES,
ETC, REFERENCED BY
THIS SYMBOL:
CHASSIS-MOUNTED
F7 J7-4 PHASE-SHIFT CAPACITOR
COM
120/240 VAC
R19 J7-6
TO LOW SPEED
STARTER
SHIFT
E17 E18
FROM MD-0927 F6 R20 J7-5
MAIN
R31 J7-3
GROUND
R23
R24
R21
R22
2 1
3 4 +5 V +5 V
2 1
U89
2
R310
R305
3 U8
4
1 TP7
U7 TP8 J6-8 J11-8

DATA
J6-7 J11-7 BUFFER
J6-6 J11-6
3
K5 U83
TP9 U86
J6-5 J11-5
DRIVER
D9
DATA
LATCH
K4 +12 V
TP10 J6-3 J11-3
4
J6-4 J11-4 D48
D7
TP11 +12 V
R294
J6-1 J11-1 Q29
R290
J6-2 J11-2
Q28
DATA, ADDRESS, &
CONTROL BUS
H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 LOW SPEED
CHECKED STARTER
SB 30 APR/08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 02/JUN/2008 MD-0935 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 MAIN STATOR CURRENT SENSE. IF MAIN CURRENT IS LOW, THIS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY +5V DC. PULSES AT 100 OR 120 HZ WILL BE PRESENT AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 AT NORMAL STATOR CURRENT.
2 PHASE-SHIFT STATOR CURRENT SENSE. IF SHIFT CURRENT IS LOW, THIS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY +5V DC. PULSES AT 120 HZ WILL BE PRESENT AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 AT NORMAL STATOR CURRENT.
3 “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) FOR APPROXIMATELY 1.8 SEC DURING PREP, THEN PULSED LOW FOR 500 MSEC EVERY 5 SECONDS DURING PREP. REFER TO FIGURE 2.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0V DC) ENERGIZES K4 ON THE H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD, (”HIGH”, + 12V DC = NOT ENERGIZED). THIS RELAY IS ENERGIZED AFTER THE MAIN BUS CAPACITORS ARE CHARGED,
4
APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER POWER-ON.
+5 V
FIGURE 1
THIS APPROACHES 0 V AS CURRENT INCREASES
0V
PULSE WIDTH INCREASES AS CURRENT INCREASES
+12V K5 DE-ENERGIZED
FIGURE 2
0V K5 ENERGIZED
N/A
APPROXIMATELY 1.8 SEC.
PREP STARTED
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 LOW SPEED
CHECKED STARTER
SB 30 APR/08
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN 02/JUN/2008 MD-0935 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 2
E10 E9 F2 +5V
CS1 560/650 VDC (+) SW1 * SW2 *
DC BUS VOLTAGE DS1
560/650 VDC
E11 E10 F1 INVERTER
560/650 VDC (-) FAULT 560 / 650 VDC (+)
R24
INVERTER
E12 E11 FAULT
DETECTOR
U10, U11
EMC CAPACITOR BOARD
U17, U18 IGBT IGBT

+12V +12V DRIVER SWITCH SWITCH
U19, U22, U24
CIRCUIT AND (Q2) (Q4)
J18-1 J1-1 FAULT
CURRENT
J18-3 J1-3 LATCH
+12V +12V
J18-5 J1-5 (U1-U9, IGBT IGBT
T1-T4, ETC). SWITCH SWITCH
J18-7 J1-7
(Q1) K4
R317
R324
(Q3)
J18-9 J1-9
R40 TUBE 1
HS PREP
TB2-3 SHIFT
U86 U83 DS10 DS11 J18-6 J1-6 1 5
J18-8 J1-8 U12 DUAL SPEED 560 / 650 VDC (-)

STARTER CPU, K1
2 4
BUFFERS,
DATA DRIVERS
DRIVER
LATCH K1-A
HIGH SPEED K5
SELECT K3 TB2-2 MAIN
D47
R41 Q5
+12V +12V TB2-1 COMM
K6
J18-2 J1-2 1 5 K5
R31
+5V R32
K4
U13
R308
J18-4 J1-4 C22

2 4 K6 K1-B
R302
READY PREP K7
U87 DS9 INITIATED K3
E5 C1 E8
4 1
DATA U88 SHIFT CAPACITOR

+5V
BUFFER ARRANGEMENT
3 2 901297-12, 13
J18-10 J1-10 E7 E6 901298-12, 13
R303
C2 C3 C4
K7
J18-19 J1-19 DUAL SPD DUAL SPD DUAL SPD DUAL SPD DUAL SPD E14
STARTER ASSY STARTER ASSY STARTER ASSY STARTER ASSY STARTER ASSY
901297-02 901297-12 901297-13 901297-15 901297-16
901298-02 901298-12 901298-13 901298-15 901298-16
U45 CAPACITOR VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE REMOVE WIRE

R273 J18-12 J1-12 SHIFT
R274 - 6 C1 40 uF 30 uF 25 uF 12.5 uF 25 uF FOR 15.5 uF LS CAPACITOR
A/D 7 R259 C6 (-15 ONLY)
5 C2 N/A 30 uF 25 uF 6 uF 12.5 uF ARRANGEMENT
CONV +
J18-11 J1-11 901297-15, 16
K3
R281
U79B C3 40 uF 15 uF 12.5 uF 6 uF 12.5 uF E5 E8 901298-15, 16

C147 J18-13 J1-13
C4 40 uF 15 uF 12.5 uF 6 uF 12.5 uF C1
J18-15 J1-15
C5 N/A N/A N/A 6 uF 12.5 uF
DATA BUS J18-17 J1-17
C6 N/A N/A N/A 12.5 uF N/A E7 E6
D0..D7
K7 C3 C4
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD E14
C2 C5
DUAL SPEED STARTER ASSY
901297-02 901297-12 901297-13 901297-15 901297-16

K3 K7 901298-02 901298-12 901298-13 901298-15 901298-16
K3
LOW SPD (1) CLOSED OPEN 36 uF 30 uF 15.5 / 28 uF 31 uF E5 E8
60 uF C1
LOW SPD (2) CLOSED CLOSED 37.5 uF 31 uF N/A 37.5 uF
HIGH SPD (1) OPEN OPEN 6 uF 5 uF 3 uF 6 uF SHIFT CAPACITOR DRAWN DATE
20 uF E7 E6
HIGH SPD (2) OPEN CLOSED 7.5 uF 6 uF 6 uF 12.5 uF ARRANGEMENT G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 DUAL SPEED
C3 C4 901297-02
K7 CHECKED STARTER
E14 901298-02
REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE DES.\MFG.\AUTH.

DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD J.B. MD-0924 REV C
PROCEDURE TO SET DIP SWITCH SW1. SW2 IS NOT USED. 26 AUG 2008
SHEET 1 OF 1
REFER TO PAGE 7 FOR
LOGIC LEVELS, NOTES,
ETC, REFERENCED BY
THIS SYMBOL:
U90 U91
J7-2
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
J7-3
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
J7-4
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
J7-5
DATA CHAMBER 1 SELECT
LATCH DRIVER J7-6
START
J7-7
RIGHT FIELD SELECT
J7-8 TO AEC BOARD.
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
J7-9
REFER TO SHEETS 2-6
LEFT FIELD SELECT AS APPLICABLE FOR THE
AEC BOARD IN YOUR UNIT
+5V
VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
TP21 R264
1 COMPARATOR -
- R245 R232 J7-15
PT RAMP
+
+
U77 U71 U66B J7-10

U73 PT REF
R249
R263
DATA J7-1
CPU BUFFER PT STOP
5V-3.3V
2
TP6
R256
R220
U44
D/A 6-
CONV 7
5+
U38B
U77 U71
DATA R286
CPU BUFFER
5V-3.3V
DATA, ADDRESS, &

CONTROL BUS
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
SHEET 1 OF 7
+500V
TP10 LEFT +/-300V
J1-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 1
+12V +12V +12V +12V +12V
6 J11-1
JW8 H.V. J1-1
+12V * 1 +/-300/+500 V
RN6C
RN6D
RN6B
RN6A
RN6E
TP22 2 J1-3
+/-300V +45V +45 V
TP24 H.V. 3 J11-4
START J1-8
DS5 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 RIGHT RESET/START
J11-3
MIDDLE J1-10
RN4A JW7 M FIELD SEL
J7-2 J5-2 D6 J11-2
CHAMBER 4 SELECT CH 4 1 L/R J1-9
TP9 2 R FIELD SEL
U3C 3 J11-6
J7-3 J5-3 RN3D CONVERTER R/L J1-11
D5 L FIELD SEL
CHAMBER 3 SELECT CH 3 +12V +24V CIRCUIT J11-5
R66
12 VDC TO 45 VDC TP11 J1-12
U3B R89 CHAMBER O/P
J7-4 J5-4 D12 RN3C AND 300 / 500 VDC 9 J11-9
CHAMBER 2 SELECT CH 2 J1-7
+45V CH 1 GROUND
U3F * INCLUDES U7 AND T1
J7-5 J5-5 D4 RN3A
CHAMBER 1 SELECT CH 1 S1D R90
D16 **
U3D
J7-6 J5-6 D11 RN3B Q1
SET
R79
START STRT
VALUE LEFT +/-300V
J2-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 2
U3E U3A * START J12-1
JW6 H.V. J2-1
1 +/-300/+500 V
2 J2-3
+12V +24V +12V +24V +12V +24V +45V +45 V
3 J12-4
START J2-8
RIGHT RESET/START
J12-3
MIDDLE J2-10
JW5 M FIELD SEL
J5-7
* * * 1 J12-2
L/R
J7-7 J2-9
RIGHT FIELD SELECT 2 R FIELD SEL
D30 D40 D65 3 J12-6
J7-8 J5-8 R/L J2-11
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT Q2 Q3 Q4 L FIELD SEL
J12-5
J7-9 J5-9 TP12 J2-12
LEFT FIELD SELECT * * * R67 CHAMBER O/P
RIGHT MIDDLE LEFT 9 J12-9
J2-7
CH 2 GROUND
FROM
PAGE 1 S1C R68
LEFT +/-300V
J3-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 3
TP18 J13-1
TP17 4 TP20 5 JW4 H.V. J3-1
J7-19 J5-19 CH 1 1 +/-300/+500 V
+24V J3-3
2 +45V +45 V
TP23 - STRT R1 S2A 3 J13-4
START J3-8
-
CH 2 RESET/START
J7-13 J5-13 TP5 TP6 TP7
+
S4 RIGHT
+12V + J13-3
U4A MIDDLE J3-10
FROM J7-17 J5-17 U4B R2 S2B JW3 M FIELD SEL
R32 J13-2
MD-0831 C11 CH 3 1 L/R J3-9
* 2 R FIELD SEL
3 J13-6
TP4 C4 S2C R/L J3-11
R3 L FIELD SEL
CH 4 J13-5
J7-11 J5-11 CH 1 R53 TP13 J3-12
-12V -
R57 CHAMBER O/P
R4 S2D 9 J13-9
S3A
+
J3-7
CH 3 GROUND
U2B
R11 CH 2 S1B R58
TP3 2 TP19 7
S3B
TP2 8
J7-15 J5-15 R54 LEFT +/-300V
J4-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 4
PT RAMP R12 J14-1
RN4C CH 3 JW2 H.V. J4-1
J7-10 J5-10 +/-300/+500 V
PT REF 1
2 J4-3
J7-1 J5-1 S3C +45V +45 V
PT STOP 3 J14-4
START J4-8
R13 CH 4
-
RIGHT RESET/START
+12V D27 - J14-3
R56 + MIDDLE J4-10
+ JW1 M FIELD SEL
S3D U1A 1 J14-2
RN4B U2A L/R J4-9
RN4D
- 3 STRT 2 R FIELD SEL

7 R14 3 J14-6
+ 2 R/L J4-11
L FIELD SEL
J14-5
U6 TP14 J4-12
R35 CHAMBER O/P
SAMPLE 9 J14-9
J4-7
D22 & HOLD CH 4 GROUND
S1A R36
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734614 DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions DRAWN DATE
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS. SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008
on the title page of this CPI document.
CHECKED AEC
THE +/- 12V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND J11 TO J14 ARE NOT SHOWN ON DESIGNATES A FACTORY CONFIGURED LOGIC OR SIGNAL LEVEL. AEC BZ 29 APR 2008
THIS DIAGRAM. THESE ARE DETAILED ON THE CONNECTOR PIN OUT BOARDS ARE CONFIGURED AT THE TIME OF ORDER TO BE COMPATIBLE DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
TABLES IN CHAPTER 3D. * WITH THE SPECIFIED AEC CHAMBER(S). FOR EXAMPLE, THE START
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
** SIGNAL TO THE CHAMBER MAY BE FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE ACTIVE 28 MAY 08
R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC LOW (0 V), ACTIVE HIGH (+12 V), OR ACTIVE HIGH (+24 V). SHEET 2 OF 7
CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS.
AEC CH 1 AEC CH 3
LEFT 1 LEFT 1
SELECT SELECT
2 2
JW1 JW5
RIGHT 3 R5 RN1 RN1 RIGHT 3 R6 RN2 RN2
3 6 7 2 J1-2 3 6 7 2 J3-2
SELECT ANODE (R) SELECT ANODE (L)
2 J1-5 2 J3-5
R69 - CATH (R) R70 - CATH (L)
1 RN1 RN1 1 RN2 RN2
3 4 5 8 1 J1-1 3 4 5 8 1 J3-1
ANODE (M) ANODE (M)
+ +
U4A U5A
U2A J1-6 U3A J3-6
CATH (M) CATH (M)
R10
R50
J1-3 J3-3
ANODE (L) ANODE (R)
J1-4 J3-4
CATH (L) CATH (R)
MIDDLE MIDDLE
SELECT J1 (shell) SELECT J3 (shell)
R13 RN7 RN7 GROUND R14 RN8 RN8 GROUND
3 6 7 2 3 6 7 2
R9 - 6 R11 - 6
7 RN7 RN7 7 RN8 RN8
+ 5 4 5 8 1 + 5 4 5 8 1
U4B U5B
U2B U3B
R7
R8
RIGHT 1 J11-5 RIGHT 1 J13-5
ANODE (R) ANODE (L)
SELECT J11-6 SELECT J13-6
2 CATH (R) 2 CATH (L)
JW2 J11-3 JW6 J13-3
3 ANODE (M) 3 ANODE (M)
LEFT R27 RN9 RN9 J11-4 LEFT R28 RN10 RN10 J13-4
3 6 7 2 CATH (M) 3 6 7 2 CATH (M)
SELECT SELECT
2 J11-1 2 J13-1
R22 - ANODE (L) R23 - ANODE (R)
1 RN9 RN9 1 RN10 RN10
3 4 5 8 1 J11-2 3 4 5 8 1 J13-2
CATH (L) CATH (R)
+ +
U4C U5C
U8A J11-7 U9A J13-7
R16
R17
CH 1 CH 3
SELECT U4D SELECT U5D
CH 1 CH 3
OUT OUT
(SHT 4) (SHT 4)
AEC CH 2 AEC CH 4
LEFT 1 LEFT 1
SELECT SELECT
2 2
JW3 JW7
RIGHT 3 R43 RN11 RN11 RIGHT 3 R44 RN12 RN12
3 6 7 2 J2-2 3 6 7 2 J4-2
SELECT ANODE (R) SELECT ANODE (L)
6 J2-5 6 J4-5
R40 -
CATH (R) R41 - CATH (L)
7 RN11 RN11 7 RN12 RN12
5 4 5 8 1 J2-1 5 4 5 8 1 J4-1
ANODE (M) ANODE (M)
+ +
U14A U15A
U8B J2-6 U9B J4-6
CATH (M) CATH (M)
R33
R34
J2-3 J4-3
ANODE (L) ANODE (R)
J2-4 J4-4
CATH (L) CATH (R)
MIDDLE MIDDLE
SELECT J2 (shell) SELECT J4 (shell)
R51 RN13 RN13 GROUND R52 RN14 RN14 GROUND
3 6 7 2 3 6 7 2
R47 - 2 R49 - 2
1 RN13 RN13 1 RN14 RN14
+ 3 4 5 8 1 + 3 4 5 8 1
U14B U15B
U16A U17A
R45
R46
RIGHT 1 J12-5 RIGHT 1 J14-5
ANODE (R) ANODE (L)
SELECT J12-6 SELECT J14-6
2 CATH (R) 2 CATH (L)
JW4 J12-3 JW8 J14-3
3 ANODE (M) 3 ANODE (M)
LEFT R57 RN15 RN15 J12-4 LEFT R58 RN16 RN16 J14-4
3 6 7 2 CATH (M) 3 6 7 2 CATH (M)
SELECT SELECT
6 J12-1 6 J14-1
R55 - ANODE (L) R56 - ANODE (R)
7 RN15 RN15 7 RN16 RN16
5 4 5 8 1 J12-2 5 4 5 8 1 J14-2
U14C
+
CATH (L) U15C
+
CATH (R)
U16B J12-7 U17B J14-7
R54
R53
CH 2 CH 4
SELECT U14D SELECT U15D
CH 2 CH 4
OUT OUT
(SHT 4) (SHT 4)
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737992. THIS DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
PAGE SHOWS THE INPUT CIRCUITS; THE SIGNAL PROCESSING THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CIRCUITS ARE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE. LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 5V = ON). G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
SHEET 3 OF 7
+5V +5V +5V +5V
8 7 6 5
RN3
RN3
RN3
RN3
1 2 3 4 U6
DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
J7-2 J5-2 R67 2 18 CH 1 OUT
CHAMBER 4 SELECT CH 4 SELECT (FROM SHT 3)
J7-3 J5-3 R66 3 17

CHAMBER 3 SELECT CH 3 SELECT
J7-4 J5-4 R65 4 16

J7-5 J5-5 R64 5 15

INVERTING
BUFFER
J7-6 J5-6 D28 6 14

START
J7-7 J5-7 R63 7 13
RIGHT FIELD SELECT RIGHT SELECT
J7-8 J5-8 R62 8 12
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT MIDDLE SELECT CH 2 OUT
J7-9 J5-9 R61 9 11 (FROM SHT 3)
LEFT FIELD SELECT LEFT SELECT
+5V
R15
R36
TP1 10 R18
FROM +12V +5V

PAGE 1 U1 R21
R39
Q2
+5 V TP2 11
REGULATOR
R35
- 2
J7-13 J5-13 1
+ 3
CH 3 OUT
TP6 TP7 U12A (FROM SHT 3)
FROM J7-17 J5-17 R38
MD-0831
J7-11 J5-11 R25
-12V
R42 R29
- 6
7
CH 1 + 5
SELECT U11B
R59 R1
4 TP3 CH 2 6- R32
TP4 7
2 SELECT 5+
R31
C31
R26 U12B
J7-15 J5-15
R37
PT RAMP R60 R2
- 2
J7-10 J5-10 1 CH 3
PT REF + 3 SELECT CH 4 OUT
J7-1 J5-1 (FROM SHT 3)
PT STOP U11A
+12V R3
CH 4
R19
+5V SELECT
R20
SAMPLE
R4 & HOLD
3 D37
R12
R24
TP5
D38 R30
- 3
7
+ 2
U10
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737992. THIS DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
PAGE SHOWS THE SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS; THE INPUT THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE PREVIOUS PAGE. LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 5V = ON). G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
LEFT AEC CH 1
+5V +5V +5V +5V SELECT
JW8 NO CONNECTION N/C
+5V 1
J1-2
R51
R49
R50
R52
2 LEFT/RIGHT
3 J1-6
U6 RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
R39
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 SELECT MIDDLE J1-3
R61 +12V JW7 MIDDLE
J7-2 J5-2 2 18 SELECT
CHAMBER 4 SELECT +12V
CH 4 SELECT START/ 1 J1-4
START RESET/START
2
R62 R40 D12 3 TP1 J1-8
J7-3 J5-3 3 17 Q5 +12V
CHAMBER 3 SELECT CH 3 SELECT 9
R1 J1-5
START CHAMBER O/P
J7-4 J5-4 R63 4 16
CHAMBER 2 SELECT CH 2 SELECT R38 CH 1 J1-7
Q4 SELECT -12V
J7-5 J5-5 R64 5 15 J1-9
CHAMBER 1 SELECT GROUND
CH 1 SELECT U1D R2
INVERTING -12V
BUFFER
LEFT AEC CH 2
SELECT
J7-6 J5-6 D20 6 14 JW6 NO CONNECTION N/C
START
R66 1
J7-7 J5-7 7 13 J2-2
RIGHT FIELD SELECT 2 LEFT/RIGHT
R67 3 J2-6
J7-8 J5-8 8 12 RIGHT/LEFT
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT RIGHT
J7-9 J5-9 R68 9 11 SELECT MIDDLE J2-3
LEFT FIELD SELECT JW5 MIDDLE
SELECT
+12V
1 J2-4
START RESET/START
2
+12V +12V +12V 3 TP2 J2-8
9 +12V
R3 J2-5
CHAMBER O/P
+12V +5V D11 D10 D9
CH 2 J2-7
R37
R36
R35
U3 LEFT MIDDLE RIGHT SELECT -12V
SELECT SELECT SELECT J2-9
+5 V GROUND
FROM U1C R4 -12V
REGULATOR Q3 Q2 Q1
PAGE 1
J7-13 J5-13
LEFT AEC CH 3
SELECT
TP11 TP12 JW4 NO CONNECTION N/C
1
J7-17 J5-17 J3-2
FROM 2 LEFT/RIGHT
MD-0831 TP7 13 CH 1 SELECT 3 J3-6
RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
J7-11 J5-11 SELECT MIDDLE J3-3
-12V - R11 JW3 MIDDLE
CH 2 SELECT SELECT
START/ +12V
+
1 J3-4
START RESET/START
U4A 2
R12 3 TP3 J3-8
CH 3 SELECT 9 +12V
* R5 J3-5
CHAMBER O/P
R13 CH 3
CH 4 SELECT J3-7
SELECT -12V
-
J3-9
+ R14 GROUND
TP9 4 TP8 U1B R6 -12V
2 U8B
J7-15 J5-15 R30 - LEFT AEC CH 4

PT RAMP + TP5 12 SELECT
J7-10 J5-10 TP6 JW2 NO CONNECTION N/C
PT REF U4B
7 1
J4-2
J7-1 J5-1 2 LEFT/RIGHT
PT STOP +5V +12V 3 J4-6
- RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
-
SELECT
R32
R31
+ MIDDLE J4-3
JW1 MIDDLE
R69
R34
+
SELECT
U7A +12V
U8A 1 J4-4
START/ START RESET/START
3 2
D25 3 TP4 J4-8
R33 +12V
TP10 9
R7 J4-5
CHAMBER O/P
D27 3
7
-
SAMPLE CH 4 J4-7
+ 2 & HOLD SELECT -12V
U9 J4-9
GROUND
U1A R8 -12V
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737998 DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE DRAWN DATE
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
+5V LEFT +12V
+5V +5V AEC CH 1
+12V JW8
1 J1-8
+12 V
R39
2
R49
R50
D29 3 J1-2
LEFT/RIGHT
U6 STRT RIGHT J1-6
DS1 DS2 INVERTED RIGHT/LEFT
R40 JW7
J7-2 J5-2 R61 2 18 R71 Q5 J1-4
CHAMBER 4 SELECT Q7 1 START RESET/START
+12V +12V 2 J1-3
R62 3 MIDDLE MIDDLE
J7-3 J5-3 3 17
CHAMBER 3 SELECT J1-11
D28 D12 9 PORTRAIT PORTRAIT
TP1 J1-13
J7-4 J5-4 R63 4 16
CHAMBER 2 SELECT CH 2 INVERTED INVERTED
PORTRAIT START CH 1
R2 R1 J1-5
R64 R70 R38 CHAMBER O/P
J7-5 J5-5 5 15 Q6 Q4 U1D
CHAMBER 1 SELECT CH 1 J1-7
INVERTING -12 V
BUFFER J1-9
GROUND
-12V
J7-6 J5-6 D20 6 14
START
J7-7 J5-7 R66 7 13 LEFT +12V
RIGHT FIELD SELECT AEC CH 2
J7-8 J5-8 R67 8 12 JW6
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT 1 J2-8
R68 +12 V
J7-9 J5-9 9 11 2
LEFT FIELD SELECT 3 J2-2
LEFT/RIGHT
+12V +12V +12V
RIGHT J2-6
RIGHT/LEFT
JW5
D11 D10 D9 J2-4
1 START RESET/START
R37
R36
R35
J7-19 J5-19 2 J2-3
+24V LEFT MIDDLE RIGHT 3 MIDDLE MIDDLE
J2-11
J7-13 J5-13 Q3 Q2 Q1 9 PORTRAIT PORTRAIT
+12V TP11 TP12 TP2 J2-13
FROM FROM INVERTED INVERTED
J7-17 J5-17 CH 2
PAGE 1 MD-0831 R4 R3 J2-5
CHAMBER O/P
U1C J2-7
J7-11 J5-11 -12 V
-12V
J2-9
GROUND
5 TP7 -12V
STRT
R11 S2B
TP8 4 CH 1
TP9 2
U2A
J7-15 J5-15 R30 R12
PT RAMP CH 2
J7-10 J5-10 R32 -
PT REF U2B
+ R4
U8B
TP6 7
+5V TP5 12
R69
-
J7-1 J5-1 -
+
PT STOP +
U4A
U4B -
+12V D27 -
+
+
U7A
D25 R33 U8A STRT
R34
R31
- 3
7
+ 2
SAMPLE
U9 & HOLD
TP10 3
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 739389 DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE DRAWN DATE
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 GENERATES A PULSE PER FIGURE 1 WHEN THE AEC RAMP IS APPROXIMATELY 5 % OF THE AEC REFERENCE IF THE AEC RAMP IS ON THE CORRECT TRAJECTORY.
2 AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE, 0 TO +10 VDC, DEPENDING ON AEC TECHNIQUE. THE LENGTH OF THE AEC EXPOSURE IS PROPORTIONAL TO THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE.
3 AEC STOP (PT STOP) SIGNAL. THIS IS NORMALLY HIGH (APPROXIMATELY +5 VDC), SWITCHING LOW WHEN THE AEC RAMP = THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE. REFER TO FIGURE 1.
4 AEC RAMP. THIS IS A SIGNAL RAMPING FROM 0 TOWARD +10 VDC, THE ACTUAL MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE. REFER TO FIGURE 2.
5 AS PER # 4.
6 PWM OUTPUT. THIS WILL BE VARIABLE WIDTH PULSES (PULSE WIDTH INCREASING AT INCREASING LOAD), UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 50% DUTY CYCLE. REFER TO FIGURE 4.
7 AEC RAMP OR DC VOLTAGE. THIS IS A RAMP OR DC VOLTAGE, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER TYPE (INTEGRATING OR NON-INTEGRATING). REFER TO FIGURE 3.
8 AS PER # 7, EXCEPT THAT THE RAMP OR DC VOLTAGE WILL BE POSITIVE GOING AND NOT OF THE SAME MAGNITUDE.
9 THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
10 THIS IS THE START SIGNAL. “HIGH” (5 VDC) = START = ANALOG SWITCHES CLOSED, “LOW” (0 VDC) = START = ANALOG SWITCHES OPEN.
11 THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
12 AS PER # 7, EXCEPT THAT THE POLARITY WILL BE POSITIVE.
13 THE POLARITY AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS THE PT RAMP OUTPUT. NOTE REFERENCE 4.
+5 V
FIGURE 1
0V
AEC STOP
<10 VDC
FIGURE 2
0V
0V
FIGURE 3 OR
< -10 VDC
INTEGRATING NON-INTEGRATING
AEC CHAMBERS AEC CHAMBERS
200 kHz
12 VDC
FIGURE 4
0 VDC
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED AEC
BZ 29 APR 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
JAC
MD-0936 REV A
28 MAY 08
SHEET 7 OF 7
+3.3V +3.3V
R242
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V
R11
DS2 DS3 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS12 DS7 DS8
DS1 TXD RXD DS1
1 Hz TXD RXD AUX2 AUX2 AUX AUX
U21 1 TXD RXD U77
R361
R362
U8 RXD TXD 1 Hz
R19
R20
R81
R94
R69
R61
RS-232
U4 TP10 TP11
U6
U71
DATA R23 J8-1 J3-1 R41
BUFFER DATA
3.3V-5V R54 BUFFER
U14 5V-3.3V
DATA R24 J8-2 J3-2 U65

BUFFER R40
5V-3.3V DATA
FPGA R37 BUFFER
3.3V-5V
U95
J21-2 R365
J21-8 R366
RS-232
+5V +5V COM PORT J21-3 R363
(AUX 2) CPU
J21-7 R364
DS4 DS5
RXD TXD J21-5 U13
U71
R59
DATA
R21
R22
R73 BUFFER
RS-232 5V-3.3V
U11
RS-232 J4
U4 U65
R25 R68
DATA 3 TXD DATA
BUFFER R26 R56 BUFFER
3.3V-5V 7 RTS 3.3V-5V
U14
R27
DATA 2 RXD
BUFFER R28
5V-3.3V 8 CTS
5
DATA BUS
D0..D7
CONSOLE BOARD (MEMBRANE CONSOLE)
J28-1 J20-1
J28-2 J20-2 DATA BUS

TO INTERNAL D0..D7
COMMUNICATION J28-4 J20-4
CIRCUITS
J28-5 J20-5
TOUCH-SCREEN BOARD (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE)
J22-2
J22-8
RS-232 J22-7
COM PORT
(AUX) J22-3
1 A PULSE TRAIN WILL BE OBSERVED AT TP10, TP11 DURING J22-5

CONSOLE - GENERATOR COMMUNICATION. THE TXD AND RXD
LEDs ON THE CONSOLE BOARD AND GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
WILL FLASH TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF THESE PULSES.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 SERIAL
CHECKED COMMUNICATIONS
J.B 28 AUG 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. MD-0937 REV C
J.B 28 AUG 2008
SHEET 1 OF 1
+15V
F1
R10
Q2
R8
R15
Q3
J4-1
SWITCHED +15V
R11
U19 U20
R353 J4-6
TEST +15V
J4-7
TEST +15V
DATA J4-2
DRIVER + DOSE
LATCH
J4-3 DAP
- DOSE
+5V +5V J4-4
CHAMBER
OPTO
J4-5
RELAY
R5
R6
J4-8
U1 GROUND
U77 U78
J4-9
DATA GROUND
RS-485
CPU BUFFER
TRANCEIVER
5V-3.3V
+5V
R4
R3
Q1
R2
D1
1 JW14
2 Opto-coupler
3 Direct
+5V
DATA BUS 5 6 1
D0..D7
U94 D55
4 3
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED DAP
GW 7 MAY 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. L. FOSKIN 07/MAY/2008
MD-0938 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
U5 U4 +24V
F3 J25-3
J25-22
J25-1
DATA
LATCH DRIVER J25-20
J25-2
J25-21
J25-4
J25-23
J25-5
R355
R356
J25-24
R357
J25-6
R358
J25-25
R359
+24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V
+24V
R360
+24V
R29
R30
R31
R32
R53
R50
9 J25-7
4 8
6 10 J25-26
5 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q14 Q15
U37C J25-29
U37B OUTPUTS TO
R22
R23
R24
R25
R48
R49
U37D
U40 DIGITAL IMAGING
12 11 D7 D8 D9 D10 D16 D11 SYSTEM
HV ON MONOSTABLE
13 TIMER
FROM MD-0932
PG 1 U31
J25-34
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA J25-16
BUFFER
U35
J25-33
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA J25-15
BUFFER
U30
EXPOSURE ENABLE J25-32
DIFFERENTIAL
TO PG 2 DATA J25-14
BUFFER
U28
J25-31
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA J25-13
BUFFER
U21
J25-30
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA J25-12
BUFFER
U19 U20
DATA +12 V
LATCH DRIVER
J19-1 J1-1
J19-2 J1-2 DS1 DS3
RAD PREP
EXP X-RAY MINI-
LS1 LS2 CONSOLE
DATA, ADDRESS, J19-4 J1-4

AND CONTROL BUS J19-3 J1-3
J19-7 J1-7
J19-8 J1-8
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE DIGITAL OUTPUTS. DRAWN DATE

G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. GW 8 MAY 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0926 REV A
J.B. 26 AUG 2008
SHEET 1 OF 2
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V
R55
R58
R60
R64
R67
R72
R82
R80
U18
DATA U46
BUFFER J25-36
DIFFERENTIAL
DATA J25-18
BUFFER
+24V +24V +24V +24V J25-11
J25-10
4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1
R95
U12 U16 U17 U22 U36
R86
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 1
U29
R121
4 1
R63
R66
R76
R79
3 2 U23
3 2
R96
R62
R65
R75
R78
R92
INPUTS FROM
DIGITAL IMAGING
SYSTEM
X-RAY ENABLE
TO MD-0931
1 4 PG2
U11
2 3
EXPOSURE ENABLE
FROM PG 1
J25-35
J25-17
J25-28
J25-9
J25-27
J25-8
DATA, ADDRESS,
AND CONTROL BUS
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE DIGITAL INPUTS.

DRAWN DATE
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
GW 8 MAY 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0926 REV A
J.B. 26 AUG 2008
SHEET 2 OF 2
FAN VOLTAGE J26-1
REGULATOR
& J26-3
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
100mV / deg C
+5V
TP34 +12V
+12V
R396
R162
R393
R377 U97
R320
2- R395
R279 1
3+
J1-3 J17-3
2-
INVERTER J1-2 J17-2 R291 R280 1
3+ R394
R391
TEMP
SENSOR J1-1 J17-1 U79A
R162
R284
C158 U45
A/D
CONV
R163
THERMAL SENSOR
BOARD
(LOCATED ON
INVERTER HEAT SINK)
+5V +5V +5V
R313
R323
R307
U87
DATA
BUFFER
JW12 1 JW2 1 JW13 1
No fan 2 Normal 2 125 kV 2
Fan 3 Upgrade 3 150 kV 3
DATA BUS
D0..D7
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 14 APR 2008 TEMP SENSOR /
CHECKED PROG JUMPERS
GW 8 MAY 2008
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. MD-0925 REV B
JAC 27 AUG 2008
SHEET 1 OF 1
STATOR OUTPUT
(LOW SPEED STARTER)
SEE MD-0935
BUCKY 1 IN/OUT, SEE MD-0927

THERMAL SWITCH INPUT
BUCKY 2 IN/OUT, INTERLOCK I & 2 SHEET 1, 2, 3
SEE MD-0930
DOOR INTERLOCK INPUTS
SEE MD-0930 SEE MD-0930
“SOFT START” BUS
AC MAINS FROM VOLTAGE TO DC
LINE FUSES BUS CAPACITORS
J4 J2 J7
PRIMARY OF
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER J9 J8
SEE MD-0927 SHEET 1, 2, 3
24 VAC & 24 H.V. AUXILIARY BOARD
VDC OUT, ROOM J5
J11
LIGHT OUT
SEE MD-0930 J10
SECONDARY OF 12 VDC DRIVE FOR MAIN
J6
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER J3 POWER CONTACTOR
J1
SEE MD-0927 SHEET 1, 2, 3 SEE MD-0927 SHEET 1, 2, 3
FOR CPI
USE ONLY
TO TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
SEE MD-0927 AND MD-0937 SEE NOTE
BELOW
J4
FROM DAP J20 J3
J19 J2
CHAMBER J4
J12 J15
SEE MD-0938 J8 INTERNAL SYSTEM
J21 J22 GROUNDS
J2 J1
J3
DIGITAL INTERFACE J25
SEE MD-0926 TO X-RAY MINI-CONSOLE J26
SEE MD-0926
X-RAY TUBE
J5 HOUSING GROUND
HT TANK
CONTROL BOARD
FILAMENT SUPPLY
J13 BOARD
J6
J10
J14
J9 J16
INVERTER J5
J23 J24 J7 J18 J11 J17 TEMP SENSOR
SEE MD-0925
FOR CPI
USE ONLY
DRAWN DATE
INTERCONNECT
CHECKED
DIAGRAM
SB 11 SEPT/08 (CMP 200 R )
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
NOTE: J2 CONNECTS TO AN EXTERNAL EMERGENCY POWER-OFF SWITCH AND ALSO SUPPLIES POWER FOR MD-0939 REV D
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions L. FOSKIN 11/SEPT/2008
AN INSTALLER-SUPPLIED POWER DISTRIBUTION RELAY. REFER TO MD-0927 SHEETS 1-3, MD-0928, AND TO
on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 1 OF 3
CHAPTER 2 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
ALTERNATE CONNECTION:
CANON SINGLE CONSOLE
J4
J2
J4 J3
J20 J3
J2
J21 J12 J15
J8
J22 J19
RESONANT E10
J25 RS-232 PORT (AUX) INVERTER BOARD INDUCTOR &
SEE MD-0937 J26 E9
CAPACITOR
J1
RS-232 PORT (AUX 2) J5
SEE MD-0937 HT TANK
J13
E17 E18
CONTROL BOARD
J6
mA/mAs PORT
J10
J14
J9 J16
J23 J24 J7 J18 J11 J17

THIS APPLIES TO UNITS WITH ONE INVERTER BOARD (32 / 40 kW). SEE PAGE 3 FOR UNITS WITH TWO INVERTER BOARDS (50 / 65 / 80 kW UNITS)
J1
TO RS-232 PORT TO
HAND SWITCH LAPTOP COMPUTER E11
SEE MD-0931 SEE MD-0937 DUAL SPEED
J3 J4
J8 STARTER BOARD
(OPTIONAL)
STATOR OUTPUT FROM EMC

TB2 (DUAL SPEED STARTER) CAPACITOR
SEE MD-0924 BOARD
SEE MD-0924
E10
E9
CONSOLE BOARD DATE

DRAWN INTERCONNECT
CHECKED
DIAGRAM
SB 11 SEPT/08 (CMP 200 R )
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0939 REV D
11/SEPT/2008
J2
J4
J20 J3
J2
J21 J12 J15 J4
J8 INVERTER BOARD
J22 J19
J1 J3
J25
J26
J5
RESONANT / SHARING
INDUCTOR & RESONANT E10
CONTROL BOARD CAPACITOR E9
J13
J6 HT TANK
J10
E17 E18
J14
J9 J16 J2
mA/mAs PORT
J23 J24 J7 J18 J11 J17
INVERTER BOARD
J1
AEC BOARD (OPTIONAL)
REFER TO MD-0936
AND CHAPTER 3D
OF SERVICE MANUAL
J5
THIS APPLIES TO UNITS WITH TWO INVERTER BOARDS (50 / 65 / 80 kW). SEE PAGE 2 FOR UNITS WITH ONE INVERTER BOARD (32 / 40 kW UNITS)
DRAWN DATE
INTERCONNECT
CHECKED
DIAGRAM
SB 11 SEPT/08 (CMP 200 R )
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0939 REV D
11/SEPT/2008

Magnum C Series

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magnum C Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magnum C Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAGNUM C® / MAGNUM C® DR

DOCUMENT REFERENCE NUMBER: 3Z-40-001 Rev. H

Manual part number: TROUBLESHOOTING 5¾

The original version of this manual (April 03, 2008)

1.1.1 Generator Description

1.1.3 Radiographic Performance

kVp range: 40 to 125 kV or 40 to 150 kV, depending on

1.1.4 Environmental Specifications

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

1.1.5 Applicable Standards

• * Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).

• * EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1, EN 60601-2-7/IEC 60601-2-7, CSA 601.1, UL60601.1.

• EN 60601-1-4/IEC 60601-1-4, EN ISO 14971, EN 60601-1-6/IEC 60601-1-6 **.

B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2:2001/IEC 60601-1-2:2001)

1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

1.1.5 Applicable Standards (Cont)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

1.1.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1.1.7 RoHS Compliance

1.2.1 Safety and Warning Symbols

High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence of

Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard

Radiation exposure symbol used on operator

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings

THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR

THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)

DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)

The following notes apply to the touchscreen console only.

WARNING: THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE HAS NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS. DO NOT

NOTE: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED CIRCUITRY INSIDE THE

1.2.2 Safety Notices and Warnings (Cont)

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels

NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE PROVIDED TO ALERT SERVICE

REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE

Caution HV/High Energy Warning Label

Caution HV Behind Cover Label

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Notice

Danger High Tension Notice

Auxiliary Transformer Labels

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

ALL 208/230 V UNITS ALL 400/480 V UNITS

1.2.3 Safety Warning Labels (Cont)

1.3.0 PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION

1.3.1 Generator Heat Output

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

* Nominal Current = Generator standby current only. External or installer-supplied equipment

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

1.3.2 Generator Power Requirements (Cont)

Recommended Service Disconnect: As per the above table

1.3.3 Generator Ground Requirements